HellermannTyton Product Catalogue 2014/2015

HellermannTyton Product Catalogue 2014/2015
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Cable Ties and Fixings
1
1.1 Technical Information
With Open Head
Properties of Polyamide PA66
20
standard, natural
Q-Series, PA66
42
Properties of Polyamide PA66W, PA12, PA46
21
UV-resistant, black
Q-Series, PA66W
43
Material Specification Overview
22
up to + 105 °C, natural and black
Q-Series, PA66HS
44
Optimum Storage Conditions for Cable Ties
25
standard, coloured
Q-Series, PA66
45
Tool Overview for Cable Ties
26
1.2 Cable Ties Outside Serrated
Flowchart for Optimum Tool Selection
27
For Thin-Walled Bundles
1.1 Cable Ties Inside Serrated
OS-Series
47
With Low Profile Head
T-Series
standard, natural
PA66
28
PE-series
48
for outdoor use, black
PA66, UV-resistant
28
E.R.D.F. approved
PE-Series
48
E.R.D.F. approved,releasable
RPE-Series
48
standard, black
PA66
31
standard, coloured
PA66
32
LPH-Series
49
up to + 105 °C, natural
PA66, heat stabilised
34
Robusto-Series
50
up to + 105 °C, black
PA66, heat stabilised
35
for higher impact resistance,
scan black
PA66, high impact
modified
36
LK-Series
37
Detectable
MCT-Series
38
Detectable, releasable
MCT-Series
38
1.3 Cable Ties Without Serration
Endless
with Separate Head and Spacer
EL-TY-Series
51
In-between size to T-Series
black, natural
16
Date of issue: January 2014
For Food Industry
1
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4 Cable Ties, Releasable
1.5 Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Inside Serrated
With Ball-Lock
RELK-Series
52
MBT-Series SS304
RLT-Series
52
MBT-Kit SS304
61
with tuckaway
RT250-Series
53
MBT-Series SS316
62
with release lever
REL-Series
54
coated
MBT-FC-Series
63
double wrapped
LR55-Series
55
MBTXHD- and
MBTUHD-Series
64
double wrapped, coated
MBTXHDFC- and
MBTUHDFC-Series
65
uncoated
MLT-Series
66
coated
MLT-C-Series
66
uncoated
MAT-Series
67
coated
MAT-C-Series
67
Outside Serrated
for marking
Without Serration
in flexible TPU
SOFTFIX-Family
56
SRT-Series for
Industry Volumes
56
Inside Serrated
with one-hand release mechanism
REZ- Series
57
With Quick Release Mechanism
SpeedyTie
58
With Fold Locking
With Raster Locking
Protective Channel for Stainless Steel Ties
With Hook and Loop
TEXTIE-Series
Date of issue: January 2014
60
59
LFPC-Series
68
17
1.6 Cable Ties With Fixing Elements
Square-cut
1-Piece Fixing Ties
for Weld Studs (Softpush)
in the strap
69
with Mounting Head
for screws
69
TAS-Series
70
For Parallel Routing
For Cable Trays
Inside Serrated
77
screw-fixing
Q-Mount-Series, QM
77
Q-Mount-Series,
CTQM
78
PMB5
79
LKC-, NY-Series
80
KR-, CTM-Series
81
CTAM-Series
82
MB-, TY- Series
83
LKM-, CL-, FH-Series
84
For limited space
screw-fixing
Paste Adhesive Mount
CTF-Series
71
1-Piece Fixing Ties
with Rivet
Q-Mount-Series,
QMA
Overlapping curved design
releasable
with Self Adhesive Socket
72
screw-fixing
72
Curved design
1.7 Cable Tie Mounts
screw-fixing
Technical Information
For limited space
Installation of self adhesive mounts
73
Fixing Parts with Special Adhesive
screw-fixing
Curved design
SolidTack-Series
74
Square-cut
screw-fixing
Curved design, for sideways fixing
screw-fixing
MB-Series
75
screw-fixing
screw-fixing, self adhesive
MB-Series
75
Stainless Steel 316 Mounts for MBT-ties
screw-fixing
TY-Series
76
Mounting Plates
screw-fixing, self adhesive
LK-, TY- Series
76
screw-fixing
Rectangle design
18
screw-fixing
SSPC-Series
85
MP-Series
86
Date of issue: January 2014
Outside Serrated
screw-fixing, self adhesive
1
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8 Fixing Elements
Clips for flat ribbon cables
Cable Fixing Cradle
TM1SF
87
SFC-series
94
FKH-Series
95
WPC
96
TY
97
ALU-P-Series
98
87
Plastic Rivets
Fixing Elements for Corrugated Tubing
CTC-Series
88
SB-Series
89
Aluminium P-Clips
Fixing Elements
for Weld Studs
130100
screw-fixing, self adhesive
Wire Push-in Clips
Arrowhead Cradle
with Fir Tree
self adhesive
Plastic P-Clips
Fixing Base
LOK-Series
90
KM
91
Clips with flat design
TY8H1(S)-Series
92
Clips with round design
self adhesive
100
Cradle Slips
101
Klam-Klip (KK)
102
BMS-100
103
Strain Relief Clips
1.9 Clips, Clamps and Plugs
screw-fixing, self adhesive
HP-Series
Clips with Elasticated Loop
Plastic Nuts
RA-Series
93
RB-Series
93
SAC-Series
94
Maintenance Kit
Clips with flat design
Date of issue: January 2014
self adhesive
Clips with flexible flat design
self adhesive
19
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Technical Information
Properties of polyamide PA66
Polyamides are among the most important thermoplastic synthetic
materials. Thermoplastics can be reshaped by heating as often as
required without undergoing chemical decomposition or other
negative changes. This makes polyamide ideal for processing via
injection moulding into high quality products. About 90% of cable
ties and fixings from HellermannTyton are made from this material.
Polyamide is also known under the brand name of Nylon®, which
was introduced by the Dupont company.
The molecular chains of PA66 are made from two
base units:
Water content in polyamide
1st base unit with
6 C atoms
2nd base unit
with 6 C atoms
Each base unit contains 6 carbon atoms (C). Hence the name PA66.
The polyamide PA66 has many properties which are highly
advantageous for HellermannTyton cable ties and fixings, such as:
• Highstrength,rigidityandhardness
• Highdimensionalstability,evenundertheeffectofheat
• Highabrasionresistance
Having a wide range of polyamides and additives allows for an
optimum adaptation of the properties of the finished product to suit
the respective requirements.
The following PA66 variants are used for HellermannTyton products:
• Polyamide6.6standard(PA66)fortemperatureconditionsofup
to +85 °C
• Polyamide6.6HeatStabilised(PA66HS)fortemperature
conditions of up to +105 °C
The inner structure of polyamide displays a partial order of polymer
chains, i.e. polyamides are partially crystalline. Due to the tighter
packing of the individual molecular chains polyamide only has limited
transparency to light. The plastic is therefore described as translucent
Polyamide is a hygroscopic material - this means that it absorbs and
releases water. The mechanical properties are significantly affected by
the water content – especially flexibility and minimum tensile strength.
In a standard atmosphere of 23 °C and 50% relative humidity,
the degree of water saturation of polyamide is around 2.5%. For
optimal processing of cable ties it is therefore important that the
polyamide has a water content of approximately 2.5% in a state
of equilibrium.
The quality and functionality of the products are thus affected by
the water content, therefore the correct storage of our products is
crucial. Please read our separate instructions on storage.
Since humidity is so critical to the quality of the tie, the
question arises: What happens if the tie is installed and the
water content in the tie alters?
The water content determines the flexibility and strength of a
tie. At a water content of approximately 2.5% the tie has the
ideal flexibility for installation. When the strap is being threaded
through the head of the tie, the pawl must be flexible enough
to 'see-saw' over the serration of the strap without breaking. On
the other hand, there must also be adequate material rigidity for
the serrations of the pawl to engage with the serrations of the
strap during the tying process so that a 'positive locking' action is
achieved. After achieving the positive locking action the tie is in a
static condition. Changes in the mechanical properties of the tie
as a function of water content are insignificant during this status.
• Polyamide6.6UVStabilised(PA66W)forexterioruse
• Polyamide6.6HeatStabilisedandUVStabilised(PA66HSW)for
exterior use up to +105 °C
• Polyamide6.6ImpactResistant(PA66HIR)forhigh
elasticity requirements
• Polyamide6.6ImpactResistantandHeatStabilised(PA66HIRHS)
for high elasticity requirements and temperatures up to +105 °C
20
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a20
Date of issue: January 2014
• Polyamide6.6V0forhighstandardsoffireprotection
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Technical Information
Properties of UV-stabilised polyamide (PA66W)
The question constantly arises as to whether a black cable tie is
suitable for use outside. This is dependant on the application of the
tie, but in general the following statements can be made:
A black cable tie made of polyamide 6.6 standard (PA66) is only
coloured black with a low proportion of carbon black. This is not
sufficient to protect the material from damage caused by
UV-radiation in the long term.
Products made from UV-stabilised polyamide PA66W are produced in
accordance with ASTM standard D6779 with a higher carbon black
percentage of approx. 2%. So they resist UV-radiation in the
European area for a considerably longer period than standard PA66.
This is clearly illustrated by the comparison of the two images:
After 500 hours of UV- radiation exposure
Polyamide 6.6 standard (PA66) dyed black:
Polyamide 6.6 UV-stabilised (PA66W) with approx. 2% carbon black:
The joint has been damaged throughout by UV-radiation.
The joint has only been altered at isolated points by the UV-radiation.
For outdoor use, therefore, we recommend our range of
products made from UV-stabilised polyamide (PA66W).
Properties of polyamide PA12
Properties of polyamide PA46
Apart from PA66, there are polyamides which are less hygroscopic.
These include PA12, which has a molecular chain made of a base
unit with 12 carbon atoms:
Polyamide PA66, despite the use of additives, is not suitable for
long-term use in temperatures of +105 °C. Due to considerably
better heat resistance, polyamide PA46 is more suitable for
temperatures of up to and exceeding 150 ºC (depending on the
length of time of operation).
The molecular chain of PA46 is composed of two base units:
PA12 has the following advantages over PA66:
• Lesshygroscopic-saturationat23°Cand50%relativehumidity
is approximately 1%
• Betterimpactperformance
• Goodweatherresistance,evenwithoutaspecialadditive
These three properties make PA12 ideal for use outdoors, in
particularly when requirements may include impact resistance.
The water absorption of PA12 is not only less than that of PA66
but also slower. This is the requirement where the mechanical
properties need to remain relatively unaffected by changing
environmental conditions
1st base unit with
4 C atoms
2nd base unit
with 6 C atoms
Advantages of PA46 over PA66:
• Greaterrigidity,evenathighertemperatures
• Higheroperatingtemperaturerangesofupto+150ºC
(5,000 hours)
• Greaterformstabilityathighertemperatures
• Excellentchemicalresistance
Date of issue: January 2014
A simple practical test: 'the hammer test'
You can quickly determine whether or not a cable tie is UV stabilised. Strike with a hammer the tail of the strap on the tie. Hold up this
flattened end to the light. Cable ties with a carbon black content of about 2% allow no light through and look black throughout.
Standard black ties, however, are transparent on the flattened end.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a21
21
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Material Information
Materi
a
Propert l
ies*
ability
Flamm
Colour*
*
Opera
tin
Tempe g
rature
ut
Shortc
Materi
al
Material Specification Overview
Aluminium-alloy
AL
-40 °C to +180 °C
Natural
(NA)
•Corrosion resistant
•Antimagnetic
Chloroprene
CR
-20 °C to +80 °C
Black
(BK)
•Weather-resistant
•High yield strength
Ethylenterafluorineethylen
E/TFE
-80 °C to +170 °C
Blue (BU)
UL94 V0
•Resistance to radioactivity
•UV- resistant, not moisture sentitive
•Good chemical resistance to:
•acids, bases, oxidizing agents
Polyacetal
POM
-40 °C to +90 °C,
(+110 °C, 500 h)
Natural
(NA)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Flexible at low temperature
•Not moisture sensitive
•Robust on impacts
Polyamide 11
PA11
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Bio-plastic, derived from vegetable oil
•Strong impact resistance at low temperature
•Very low moisture absorption
•Weather-resistant
•Good chemical resistance
Polyamide 12
PA12
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Good chemical resistance to:
•acids, bases, oxidizing agents
•UV- resistant
Polyamide 4.6
PA46
-40 °C to +150 °C
(5000 h), +195 °C
(500 h)
Natural
(NA),
Grey
(GY)
UL94 V2
•Resistance to high temperatures
•Very moisture sensitive
•Low smoke sensitive
Polyamide 6
PA6
-40 °C to +80 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 V2
•High yield strength
Polyamide 6.6
PA66
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK),
Natural
(NA)
UL94 V2
•High yield strength
Polyamide 6.6,
Glassfibre reinforced
PA66GF13,
PA66GF15
-40 °C to +105 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Good resistance to: lubricants, vehicle fuel, salt
water and many solvents
Polyamide 6.6
heat and UV stabilised
PA66HSW
-40 °C to +105 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 V2
•High yield strength
•Modified elevated max. temperature
•UV-resistant
Polyamide 6.6
Heat Stabilised
PA66HS
-40 °C to +105 °C
Black
(BK),
Natural
(NA)
UL94 V2
•High yield strength
•Modified elevated max. temperature
Polyamide 6.6
High Imp. Mod.,
Heat Stab.
PA66HIRHS
-40 °C to +105 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Higher flexibility at low temperature
•Modified elevated max. temperature
Polyamide 6.6
High Imp. Mod.
scan black
PA66HIR(S)
-40 °C to +80 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Higher flexibility at low temperature
Polyamide 6.6
High Impact Modified
PA66HIR
-40 °C to +80 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Higher flexibility at low temperature
Tefzel® is a registered trademark of DuPont.
General linguistic usage for cable ties made from raw material E/TFE is Tefzel®-Tie. In additon to Tefzel® from
DuPont HellermannTyton is also using equivalent E/TFE raw material from other suppliers.
**More colours on request.
*These details are only rough guide values. They should be regarded as a material specification and are no
substitute for a suitability test. Please see our datasheets for further details.
22
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a22
Date of issue: January 2014
= Minimum Tensile Strength
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Material Information
Materi
a
Propert l
ies*
ability
Flamm
Colour*
*
Opera
tin
Tempe g
rature
ut
Shortc
Materi
al
Material Specification Overview
Polyamide 6.6
high impact
modified, heat and
UV stabilised
PA66HIRHSW
-40 °C to +110 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Higher flexibility at low temperature
•Modified elevated max. temperature
•High yield strength, UV-resistant
Polyamide 6.6
UV Resistant
PA66W
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Black
(BK)
UL94 V2
•High yield strength
•UV-resistant
Polyamide 6.6 V0
PA66V0
-40 °C to +85 °C
White
(WH)
UL94 V0
•High yield strength
•Low smoke emission
Polyamide 6.6 V0
High Oxygen Index
PA66V0-HOI
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
White
(WH)
UL94 V0
•High yield strength
•Low smoke emissions
Polyamide 6.6
with metal particles
PA66MP
-40 °C to +85 °C,
(+105 °C, 500 h)
Blue (BU)
UL94 HB
•High yield strength
Polyamide 6
high impact modified
PA6HIR
-40 °C to +80 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Limited brittleness sensitivity
•Higher flexibility at low temperature
SP
-50 °C to +150 °C
Black
(BK)
PEEK
-55 °C to +240 °C
Beige
(BGE)
UL94 V0
•Resistance to radioactivity
•Not moisture sensitive
•Good chemical resistance to: acids, bases,
oxidizing agents
Polyethylene
PE
-40 °C to +50 °C
Black
(BK),
Grey
(GY)
UL94 HB
•Low moisture absorption
•Good chemical resistance to: most acids, alcohol
and oils
Polyolefin
PO
-40 °C to +90 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 V0
•Low smoke emissions
Polypropylene
PP
-40 °C to +115 °C
Black
(BK),
Natural
(NA)
UL94 HB
•Floats in water
•Moderate yield strength
•Good chemical resistance to: organic acids
Polypropylene,
Ethylene-Propylene-Dien-Terpolymere-rubber free
of Nitrosamine
PP, EPDM
-20 °C to +95 °C
Black
(BK)
UL94 HB
•Good resistance to high temperatures
•Good chemical and abrasion resistance
Polyvinylchloride
PVC
-10 °C to +70 °C
Black
(BK),
Natural
(NA)
UL94 V0
•Low moisture absorption
•Good chemical resistance to: acids, ethanol, oil
Polyester
Polyetheretherketone
•UV-resistant
•Good chemical resistance to: most acids, alkalis
and oils
Tefzel® is a registered trademark of DuPont.
General linguistic usage for cable ties made from raw material E/TFE is Tefzel®-Tie. In additon to Tefzel® from
DuPont HellermannTyton is also using equivalent E/TFE raw material from other suppliers.
**More colours on request.
Date of issue: January 2014
*These details are only rough guide values. They should be regarded as a material specification and are no
substitute for a suitability test. Please see our datasheets for further details.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a23
= Minimum Tensile Strength
23
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
One Step to the Web!
Date of issue: January 2014
Discover the HellermannTyton
product world on the web!
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Technical Information
Optimum storage conditions for cable ties made of polyamide (PA)
HellermannTyton cable ties, fastenings and fixings are manufactured
from high-quality polyamide (PA). This industrial synthetic material is
mainly processed using injection moulding, but can also be extruded.
Polyamide is a hygroscopic material. This means that the material
absorbs and loses moisture. For optimum handling of cable ties it is
important that the material is in a condition of equilibrium with a
water content of approximately 2.5%.
The packaging used by HellermannTyton ensures that the water
content in the material remains constant. Therefore, it is important
to store the products in their original packaging to preserve the
quality of the ties.
2. Always store ties in
the sealed plastic bag
made of polyethylene!
1. Once opened you should
use the ties as quickly
as possible.
3. Do not expose the product to
direct sunlight!
4. Do not store the product in sunlight;
for example, on the windowsill.
5. Store the product away
from direct sources of heat.
6. Avoid contact with heat: for example,
do not place on the radiators.
7. The ideal storage conditions are those of the central European standard climate:
23 °C
50% relative humidity
50%
40
50
❘❘❘
❘
❘❘
❙❘❘❘❘❙❘❘❘❘❙
❘❘❘❙
1 00
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a25
❙❘
Date of issue: January 2014
0
❙❘❘❘❘❙
10
30
❘❘❘❘
70 80
60 ❘ ❘ ❘ ❘ ❙ ❘ ❘ ❘ ❘ ❙ ❘ ❘ ❘
❘
❙
❘❘❙
90
20
25
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Product Selection
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
MK10-SB
MK20, MK21
MK3SP
MK3PNSP2
see page 306.
see page 306.
see page 307.
see page 307.
EVO7 / EVO7SP
MK7
MK7HT
MK7P
see page 308.
see page 309.
see page 309.
see page 310.
MK6
MK9
MK9HT
MK9P
see page 311.
see page 311.
see page 312.
see page 313.
MK9SST
MK9PSST
HDT16
KST-STG200.
see page 314.
see page 314.
see page 315.
see page 315.
MTT4
THT
see page 316.
see page 316.
26
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a26
Date of issue: January 2014
Processing Tools for Metal Ties
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Product Selection
Product Selection
Cable tie
Attributes
Tool
Page
MK10-SB
306
MK20
306
MK10-SB
306
MK21
306
MK3PNSP2
307
MK7P
310
MK9P
313
EVO7 / EVO7SP
308
MK3SP
307
MK7
309
MK7HT
309
MK6
311
MK9
311
MK9HT
312
4.8 mm
bandwidth
no
4.8 mm
4.8 mm
yes
standard
cable ties
bandwidth
tool must
have
automatic
cut-off
4.8 mm
yes
4.8 mm
pneumatic
no
bandwidth
4.8 mm
yes
Date of issue: January 2014
metal cable
ties
tool must
have
automatic
cut-off
no
yes
bandwidth
16.0 mm
MK9PSST
314
no
bandwidth
13.0 mm
MK9SST
314
16.0 mm
HDT16
315
12.3 mm
KST-STG200
315
12.0 mm
MTT4
316
7.9 mm
THT
316
pneumatic
bandwidth
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a27
27
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
• T-Series in PA66 natural
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Standard natural cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
T-Series.
T-Series
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
T18S
2.3
83.0
16.0
Article-No.
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
1,000
111-02809
T18R
2.5
100.0
T18I
2.5
145.0
22.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-01919
35.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-02319
T18L
2.5
205.0
T25L
2.8
240.0
55.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-02119
65.0
110
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-02519
T25LL
2.8
T30R
3.5
330.0
95.0
110
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-02619
150.0
35.0
135
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-03219
T30L
T30LL
3.5
198.0
50.0
135
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-03419
3.5
290.0
80.0
135
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-03529
T40R
4.0
175.0
40.0
180
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-03819
T50S
4.6
150.0
35.0
225
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05819
T50R
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05013
T50M
4.6
245.0
65.0
225
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-06201
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
225
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05219
T50L
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05409
T80R
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05019
T80I
4.7
300.0
85.0
355
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-08229
T80L
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-05419
T120S
7.6
225.0
55.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
111-12829
T120I
7.6
300.0
80.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-12219
T150R
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-14819
T120R(E)
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-12019
T120M
7.6
460.0
125.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-12619
T120XM
7.6
600.0
175.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
111-12704
T120L
7.6
760.0
225.0
535
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
111-12429
T150L
8.8
820.0
245.0
780
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-15419
T150M
8.9
530.0
150.0
780
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-15619
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
28
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a28
Date of issue: January 2014
Application tools
please see page 302.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
• T-Series in PA66 natural
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
T150XL
8.9
1,095.0
330.0
T150XLL
8.9
1,325.0
405.0
780
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-15519
780
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-15304
T250S
12.5
225.0
T250R
12.5
515.0
55.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-24705
125.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-24803
T250M
12.5
565.3
T250I
12.5
730.0
150.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-25002
203.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-25219
T250XL
12.5
1,030.0
305.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
111-00466
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Cable Ties for outdoor use (UV-resistant)
• T-Series in PA66W black
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing of
cables, pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Weather-resistant black cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold onto bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
• UV-resistant
T-Series.
T-Series
Material specification
please see page 22.
T250-series
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
T18R
2.5
100.0
22.0
T18I
2.5
145.0
35.0
T18L
2.5
205.0
55.0
TYPE
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-01960
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-02360
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-02160
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a29
29
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties for outdoor use (UV-resistant)
Application tools
please see page 302.
• T-Series in PA66W black
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
T25LL
2.8
330.0
95.0
T30R
3.5
150.0
35.0
110
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-02660
135
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-03260
T30L
3.5
198.0
T30LL
3.5
290.0
50.0
135
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-03460
80.0
135
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-03570
T40R
4.0
T50S
4.6
175.0
40.0
180
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-03860
150.0
35.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-05860
T50R
T50M
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-04889
4.6
245.0
65.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-06206
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-05260
T50L
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-05440
T50LL
4.6
445.0
130.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-06000
T80R
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-05060
T80I
4.7
300.0
85.0
355
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-08290
T80L
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-05460
T120S
7.6
225.0
55.0
535
PA66W
Black (BK)
50
111-12830
T120I
7.6
300.0
80.0
535
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-12230
T150R(H)
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-14860
T120R(E)
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-12060
T120M
7.6
460.0
125.0
535
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-12660
T120L
7.6
760.0
225.0
535
PA66W
Black (BK)
50
111-12430
T150L
8.8
820.0
245.0
780
PA66W
Black (BK)
25
111-15460
T150M
8.9
530.0
150.0
780
PA66W
Black (BK)
25
111-15660
T150XL
8.9
1,095.0
330.0
780
PA66W
Black (BK)
25
111-15502
T150XLL
8.9
1,325.0
405.0
780
PA66W
Black (BK)
25
111-15305
T250R
12.5
515.0
125.0
1,115
PA66HIRHSUV
Black (BK)
25
111-24805
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
30
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a30
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
• T-Series in PA66 black
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Standard black cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
T-Series.
Material specification
please see page 22.
T250-series
T-Series
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
T18R
2.5
100.0
22.0
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-01910
T18I
2.5
145.0
35.0
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-02370
T18L
2.5
205.0
55.0
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-02110
T25L
2.8
240.0
65.0
110
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-02500
T30R
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-03210
T30L
3.5
198.0
50.0
135
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-03410
T30LL
3.5
290.0
80.0
135
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-03500
T50S
4.6
150.0
35.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-05810
T50R
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-05000
T50M
4.6
245.0
65.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-06200
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-05210
T50L
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-05400
T50LL
4.6
445.0
130.0
225
PA66
Black (BK)
500
111-06002
T80R
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-08010
T80I
4.7
300.0
85.0
355
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-08210
T80L
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-05410
T120I
7.6
300.0
80.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-12210
T150R
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-14810
T120R(E)
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-12010
T120M
7.6
460.0
125.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-12610
T120XM
7.6
600.0
175.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
50
111-12701
T120L
7.6
760.0
225.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
50
111-12403
T150L
8.8
820.0
245.0
780
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-15405
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a31
31
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
• T-Series in PA66 black
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
T150M
8.9
530.0
150.0
780
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-00124
T150XL
8.9
1,095.0
330.0
780
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-15500
T150XLL
8.9
1,325.0
405.0
780
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-15300
T250X
12.5
370.0
100.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-25102
T250M
12.5
565.3
150.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-25001
T250L
12.5
880.0
254.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-24601
T250XL
12.5
1,030.0
305.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
25
111-25200
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
• T-Series in PA66 coloured
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Coloured cable ties available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
T-Series.
Application tools
please see page 302.
TYPE
T18R
T30R
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
2.5
100.0
22.0
Article-No.
80
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
116-01816
2.5
100.0
2.5
100.0
22.0
80
PA66
Green (GN)
100
116-01815
22.0
80
PA66
Red (RD)
100
116-01812
2.5
100.0
3.5
150.0
22.0
80
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
116-01814
35.0
135
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
111-03008
3.5
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66
Green (GN)
100
111-03014
150.0
35.0
135
PA66
Red (RD)
100
111-03004
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
111-03006
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
32
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a32
Date of issue: January 2014
T-Series
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties Polyamide 6.6 standard
Material specification
please see page 22.
• T-Series in PA66 coloured
TYPE
T50R
T50L
T80R
T80L
T150R(H)
T120R(E)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
111-04800
PA66
Green (GN)
100
111-04801
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66
Red (RD)
100
111-04804
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
111-04805
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
111-05404
PA66
Green (GN)
100
111-05402
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66
Red (RD)
100
111-05406
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
111-05428
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
116-08016
PA66
Green (GN)
100
116-08015
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66
Red (RD)
100
116-08012
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
116-08014
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
116-05416
PA66
Green (GN)
100
116-05415
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66
Red (RD)
100
116-05412
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
116-05414
7.6
365.0
100.0
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
116-15016
670
PA66
Red (RD)
100
116-15012
7.6
365.0
7.6
387.0
100.0
670
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
116-15014
100.0
535
PA66
Green (GN)
100
111-12001
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66
Red (RD)
100
111-12002
Material
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a33
33
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties for temperatures up to + 105°C
(heat stabilised)
• T-Series in PA66HS natural
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Heat stabilised cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
• Higher temperature resistance up to +105 °C
T-Series.
Application tools
please see page 302.
T-Series
TYPE
T18R
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.5
100.0
22.0
80
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-01959
T18I
2.5
145.0
35.0
80
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
1,000
111-02359
T18L
2.5
205.0
55.0
80
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-02159
T30R
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-03259
T30L
3.5
198.0
50.0
135
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-03459
T30LL
3.5
290.0
80.0
135
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-03569
T40R
4.0
175.0
40.0
180
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-03859
T50S
4.6
150.0
35.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-05859
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-05259
T50L
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-05436
T80R
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-05059
T80I
4.7
300.0
85.0
355
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-08259
T80L
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-05459
T120S
7.6
225.0
55.0
535
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
50
111-12824
T150R(H)
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-15069
T120R(E)
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-12059
T120XM
7.6
600.0
175.0
535
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
50
111-12719
T120L
7.6
760.0
225.0
535
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
50
111-12449
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
34
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a34
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties for temperatures up to + 105°C
(heat stabilised)
• T-Series in PA66HS black
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Heat stabilised black cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
• Higher temperature resistance up to +105 °C
T-Series.
Application tools
please see page 302.
T-Series
TYPE
T18R
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.5
100.0
22.0
80
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-01950
T18I
2.5
145.0
35.0
80
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-02358
T18L
2.5
205.0
55.0
80
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-02049
T30R
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-03050
T30L
3.5
198.0
50.0
135
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-03450
T30LL
3.5
290.0
80.0
135
PA66HS
Black (BK)
1,000
111-03660
T40R
4.0
175.0
40.0
180
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-03970
T50S
4.6
150.0
35.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-05850
T50R
4.6
200.0
50.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-04950
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-05250
T50L
4.6
390.0
110.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-05450
T80R
4.7
210.0
55.0
355
PA66HS
Black (BK)
1,000
117-08070
T80I
4.7
300.0
85.0
355
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-08250
T80L
4.7
390.0
110.0
355
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-00388
T120S
7.6
225.0
55.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
50
111-12850
T150R(H)
7.6
365.0
100.0
670
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-15050
T120R(E)
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-12050
T120M
7.6
460.0
125.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-00153
T120XM
7.6
600.0
175.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
50
111-12700
T120L
7.6
760.0
225.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
50
111-12440
T150L
8.8
820.0
245.0
780
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-15410
T150M
8.9
530.0
150.0
780
PA66HS
Black (BK)
25
111-15609
T150XL
8.9
1,095.0
330.0
780
PA66HS
Black (BK)
25
111-15510
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a35
35
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties for higher impact resistant Polyamide
6.6 ScanBlack
• T-Series in PA66HIR(S)
These cable ties are used for routing, bundling and securing cables,
pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Impact resistant black cable tie available in a wide range of sizes
• Made from 100% high quality plastic, allows for good recycling
• Inside serration for a strong hold around bundles
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
• Simple to insert due to the ergonomically bent tail
• Higher flexibility in cold environments
T-Series.
Material specification
please see page 22.
T-Series
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
T50R
4.6
200.0
50.0
T50I
4.6
300.0
85.0
T50L
4.6
390.0
T120I
7.6
300.0
T120R(E)
7.6
T120L
7.6
TYPE
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
225
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
100
111-04890
225
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
100
111-00222
110.0
225
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
100
111-05441
80.0
535
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
100
111-12203
387.0
100.0
535
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
100
111-12032
760.0
225.0
535
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
50
111-12402
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
36
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a36
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties in-between size to T-Series
• LK-Series
For routing, bundling and securing of cables, pipes and hoses.
Features and Benefits
• Wide range of materials and sizes
• Inside serrated ties for a strong hold around bundles
• High tensile strength with very low insertion force
• Simple and quick to install
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
LK-Series.
Material specification
please see page 22.
LK-Series
TYPE
LK2A
LK2
LK5
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
4.6
270.0
73.0
225
4.6
270.0
73.0
225
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-60110
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-60119
Material
4.6
270.0
73.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
111-60150
4.6
270.0
73.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
111-60159
4.6
270.0
73.0
225
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
111-60160
4.8
120.0
28.0
135
PA66
Natural (NA)
200
111-60219
13.2
535.0
150.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
50
111-60510
13.2
535.0
150.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
111-60519
13.2
535.0
150.0
1,115
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
50
111-60559
13.2
535.0
150.0
1,115
PA66W
Black (BK)
50
111-60560
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a37
37
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties for food industry, detectable
The Metal Content Tie is a cable tie specifically designed for use
in the food and pharmaceutical processing industries. A unique
manufacturing process, involving the inclusion of a metallic pigment,
enables even small ‚cut-off‘ sections of the tie to be detected by
standard metal-detecting equipment. Ideally suited for the
installation of cabling in and around the manufacturing process.
Features and Benefits
• Total metal dispersion throughout the tie
• Available in a wide range of sizes
• Usable as part of HACCP process*
• Unique blue colour for easy visual detection
• Greatly reduces risk of contamination
• Magnetic detectable
The MCT with metal content.
Application tools
please see page 302.
One Step to the Web!
MCT
A safe and contamination free production process with MCT.
• MCT-Series
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MCT18R
2.5
100.0
22.0
80
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-01225
MCT30R
3.5
150.0
35.0
135
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-00829
MCT50R
4.6
202.0
50.0
225
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-00830
MCT50L
4.7
380.0
110.0
225
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-00831
MCT120R
7.6
387.0
100.0
535
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-01136
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
TYPE
MCTRELK2M
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
4.6
250.0
65.0
225
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66MP
Blue (BU)
100
111-00937
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
*HACCP stands for Hazard Analysis Critical Control Points. It is a method of identifying and eliminating potential hazards in food production. Those hazards that
cannot be eliminated are controlled in such a way that the consumer is protected. These controls are known as Critical Control Points (CCPs). They are CRITICAL
because if they fail or are not carried out, the risk of the product harming the customer increases.
38
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a38
Date of issue: January 2014
• MCT-Series releasable
Be the fastest with HellermannTyton:
More than a 25% time saving with Q-series!
Extensive customer trials and speed tests fully
audited and approved by DEKRA.
Test our Q-series!
Date of issue: January 2014
More information on the world wide web.
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
One Step to the Web!
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties, Q-tie
Innovative – Effective – Safe!
The new Q-tie has not only an innovative but also a revolutionary
design. The open head of the cable tie enables a simple and quick
installation. Just insert the ergonomically bent tail into the open side
of the head and tighten the cable tie.
With Q-ties you can save time and money!
Q-ties in different colours are ideal for marking and bundling in one step.
Easy application for every situation!
Q-tie is the perfect product solution for applications under difficult
working conditions. It is designed for use in applications where
working with gloves is necessary or for blind applications with a
limited view of the work.
The new Q-tie allows a quick and simple installation even with work
gloves and restricted view.
Features for quick and easy application:
• Curvedandlargeribbedtail
• Openheadwitheasilydetectableslot
This saves time and trouble!
Even under difficult circumstances the Q-tie cable tie is very fast and easy to apply.
One Step to the Web!
Integrated Pre-Locking Functionality!
Due to several simultaneous working processes, it is not always
possible to install all cables and conduits in one single step. Thus,
working with standard cable ties means either destroying the cable
tie of the first installation or applying additional cable ties.
The integrated pre-locking function of the Q-tie offers both
temporary and final cable fastening solution.
This saves material and time!
40
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a40
Date of issue: January 2014
Without additional effort only Q-ties can be used for temporary and final
cable bundling.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Features of Q-ties:
1. Open lock head for quick and
easy insertion.
2. Two rails on the strap ensure perfect
guidance for the tracks in the head.
3. The locking device interacts safely with
the serration of the cable tie.
4. The tracks prevent a deformation of the
head under load.
5. The thin part of the cable tie can be
simply placed into the open lock head.
6. The large ribbed tail allows a safe and
ergonomic installation.
7. Integrated pre locking feature (starts with
type Q30).
Application Method:
Please find more Q-Series
products for your system
solution on page 77, 78
and 256.
1. Insert the thin part of the cable tie into the open
lock head.
2. Pull the tie through the head until the bundle
is fixed.
3. Cut off the remaining part of the tie with an
application tool.
Date of issue: January 2014
Pre-locking Function of the Q-tie:
1. Insert tail into the open head and push the tail
partly into the head.
2. To release the tie push tail end slightly out
of head.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a41
3.When the installation is complete, the Q-tie can
be tightened and cut off - either manually or with
an application tool.
41
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties with open head
• Q-ties, Polyamide 6.6 (PA66), natural and black
Material specification
please see page 22.
One Step to the Web!
Q-tie cable tie
TYPE
Q18R
Q18I
Q18L
Q30R
Q30L
Q30LR
Q50R
Q50I
Q50L
Q120I
Q120R
Q120M
Q-tie cable ties: choose from a wide product range in different materials.
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
2.6
105.0
24.0
Article-No.
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00030
2.6
105.0
2.6
155.0
24.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00001
40.0
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00033
2.6
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00004
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00036
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00007
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00039
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00010
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00041
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00012
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00043
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00014
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00047
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00018
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00049
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00020
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00051
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00022
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00053
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00024
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00055
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00026
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Black (BK)
100
109-00057
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
109-00028
42
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a42
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties with open head
• Q-ties, Polyamide 6.6 UV-resistant (PA66W), black
Application tools
please see page 302.
Please find more Q-Series products for your
system solution on page 77, 78 and 256.
Q-tie cable tie
Q-tie cable ties: choose from a wide product range in different sizes.
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Q18R
2.6
105.0
24.0
Article-No.
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00059
Q18I
2.6
155.0
Q18L
2.6
195.0
40.0
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00062
50.0
80
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00065
Q30R
3.6
Q30L
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00068
200.0
50.0
130
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00070
Q30LR
Q50R
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00072
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00076
Q50I
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00078
Q50L
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00080
Q120I
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00082
Q120R
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00084
Q120M
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
109-00086
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a43
43
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties with open head
• Q-ties, Polyamide 6.6 heat stabilised (PA66HS),
natural and black
Material specification
please see page 22.
Q-tie cable tie
TYPE
Q18R
Q18I
Q18L
Q30R
Q30L
Q30LR
Q50R
Q50I
Q50L
Q120I
Q120R
Q120M
Q-tie cable ties: choose from a wide product range in different materials.
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00088
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00117
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00091
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00120
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00094
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00123
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00097
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00126
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00099
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00128
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00101
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00130
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00105
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00134
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00107
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00136
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00109
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00138
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00111
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00140
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00113
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00142
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
109-00115
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
109-00144
44
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a44
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties with open head
• Q-ties, Polyamide 6.6 (PA66), coloured
Application tools
please see page 302.
Please find more Q-Series products for your
system solution on page 77, 78 and 256.
Q-tie cable tie
TYPE
Q18R
Q18I
Q18L
Q30R
Q30L
Q-ties in different colours are ideal for marking and bundling in one step.
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00147
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00146
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00148
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00149
2.6
105.0
24.0
80
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00150
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00152
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00151
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00153
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00154
2.6
155.0
40.0
80
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00155
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00157
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00156
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00158
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00159
2.6
195.0
50.0
80
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00160
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00162
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00161
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00163
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00164
3.6
160.0
38.0
130
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00165
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00167
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00166
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00168
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00169
3.6
200.0
50.0
130
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00170
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a45
45
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.1
Cable Ties Inside Serrated
Cable Ties with open head
Material specification
please see page 22.
• Q-ties, Polyamide 6.6 (PA66), coloured
TYPE
Q30LR
Q50R
Q50I
Q50L
Q120I
Q120R
Q120M
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00172
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00171
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00173
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00174
3.6
250.0
65.0
130
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00175
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00182
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00181
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00183
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00184
4.7
210.0
50.0
220
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00185
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00187
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00186
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00188
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00189
4.7
290.0
75.0
220
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00190
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00192
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00191
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00193
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00194
4.7
410.0
110.0
220
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00195
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00197
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00196
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00198
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00199
7.7
300.0
70.0
530
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00200
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00202
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00201
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00203
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00204
7.7
420.0
110.0
530
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00205
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Blue (BU)
100
109-00207
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Brown (BN)
100
109-00206
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Green (GN)
100
109-00208
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Red (RD)
100
109-00209
7.7
520.0
130.0
530
PA66
Yellow (YE)
100
109-00210
46
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a46
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.2
Cable Ties Outside Serrated
Cable Ties for thin-walled bundles
• OS-Series
OS-Series cable ties are used in many areas where thin-walled or soft
insulation wires and cable are being installed, e. g. automotive and
aircraft industry. OS ties made from PA66V0 material are suitable for
applications where safety regulations are required, e.g. reduction of
smoke and dangerous gases.
Features and Benefits
• Outside serrated cable tie with smooth surface to the bundle
• Tie follows the contours of the cable bundle perfectly
• Takes up less space due to curved head
• Easy insertion and high tensile strength
• For higher temperature or Limited Fire Hazard demand: Material
PA46 or PA66V0
• Easy application either manually or with a processing tool
The contoured head needs less installation space, provides low insertion force
and offers high strength.
The new head design of
the OS Series
Application tools
please see page 302.
OS-Series
TYPE
T18ROS
T30ROS
T30LOS
T50SOS
T50ROS
T50MOS
T50LOS
T120ROS
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
2.5
100.0
1.6
20.0
80
PA66HS
2.5
100.0
1.6
20.0
80
PA66HS
Black (BK)
500
118-04701
Natural (NA)
1.000
118-00035
3.4
145.0
1.6
35.0
135
PA66HS
3.4
145.0
1.6
35.0
135
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
118-00064
Black (BK)
100
118-04800
3.4
200.0
1.6
50.0
135
3.4
200.0
1.6
50.0
135
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
118-00044
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
118-04900
4.6
150.0
1.6
35.0
4.6
200.0
1.6
50.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
118-05850
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
500
118-05040
4.6
200.0
1.6
4.6
245.0
1.6
50.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
118-05059
66.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
118-00018
4.6
245.0
4.6
384.0
1.6
66.0
225
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
118-00055
1.6
110.0
225
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
118-05900
7.6
7.6
385.0
5.0
105.0
535
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
118-00066
385.0
5.0
105.0
535
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
100
118-00067
Material
Colour
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a47
47
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.2
Cable Ties Outside Serrated
Cable ties with low profile head
Designed primarily for use within the electrical supply industry these
ties are particularly useful in areas with limited space. Due to their low
profile head the coloured cable ties are ideal for securing foam padding
to playground equipment. This ensures that there are no sharp edges
and ultimate safety.
Features and Benefits
• Outside serrated cable tie with a smooth surface to the bundle
• Protects against damage to insulation
• Broad contact area with cable, minimising risk of damage
• PE/RPE-range partly approved by E.R.D.F. (French Electricity Board)
• Low profile head for use in restricted areas
• Parallel bundling for secure applications
RPE, PE Series.
PE-Series
Material specification
please see page 22.
RPE-Series
• PE-Series
TYPE
PE400
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
400.0
400.0
400.0
400.0
116.0
116.0
116.0
116.0
445
445
445
445
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66
PA66
PA66
PA66
Blue (BU)
Green (GN)
Red (RD)
Yellow (YE)
100
100
100
100
112-18101
112-18100
112-18102
112-18103
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• PE-Series E.R.D.F. approved
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
PE180
PE530
9.0
9.0
180.0
535.0
42.0
146.0
445
445
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66HSW
PA66HSW
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
100
100
112-18060
112-53060
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• RPE-Series releasable E.R.D.F. approved
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
RPE275
RPE350
9.0
9.0
275.0
350.0
69.0
92.0
445
445
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66HSW
PA66HSW
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
100
100
112-27560
112-35060
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
48
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a48
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.2
Cable Ties Outside Serrated
Cable ties with low profile head
• LPH-Series
Designed primarily for use within the electrical supply industry, these
ties are particularly useful in areas with limited space due to their
low profile head.
Features and Benefits
• Outside serrated cable tie with a smooth surface to the bundle
• Protects against damage to insulation
• Broad contact area with cable, minimising risk of damage
• Low profile head for use in restricted areas
• Parallel bundling for secure applications
LPH-Series.
Application tools
please see page 302.
LPH175
LPH275, LPH350
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
LPH175
9.0
175.0
40.0
LPH275
9.0
265.0
62.0
LPH350
9.0
355.0
92.0
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
310
PA66
Black (BK)
100
112-00203
480
PA66
Black (BK)
100
112-00303
480
PA66
Black (BK)
100
112-00403
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a49
49
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.2
Cable Ties Outside Serrated
Cable ties with low profile head
• Robusto-Series
Robusto cable ties have many technical features which make them
suitable for use in many applications for fixing and supporting cables,
pipes and other elements. The polyamide 11 used to manufacture
these ties offers excellent resistance to chemicals in even the most
challenging environments such as offshore, oil rigs, construction
vehicles, trucks and trailers.
These cable ties have excellent UV resistance as well as being highly
resistant to chemicals like chlorides: recommended for use on
galvanised steel, especially on solar panel installations.
In addition, the material has a high impact resistance to low
temperatures which enables Robusto ties to be used in areas where
it is cold, for example at high altitudes or Nordic countries.
Low profile head cable tie, Robusto-Series.
Features and Benefits
• Made of polyamide 11, a completely sustainable bioplastic derived
from vegetable oil
• Outside serrated with a round, innovative head and one or two
flexible stop pawls
• Low insertion force for manual, tool-free application
• High tensile strength
• Soft material for easy handling without damaging cables
• High UV resistance for long-term outdoor application
• Stable technical performance even at very low temperatures
• High resistance to chemicals, including chlorides
• Low water absorption rate for consistent technical performance
and high durability
• Pre-locking feature
One Step to the Web!
Material specification
please see page 22.
LPH942
LPH962/LPH992
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
LPH942
9.0
180.0
42.0
Article-No.
360
PA11
Black (BK)
100
112-00011
LPH962
9.0
260.0
LPH992
9.0
355.0
62.0
530
PA11
Black (BK)
100
112-00012
92.0
530
PA11
Black (BK)
100
112-00013
50
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a50
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.3
Cable Ties Without Serration
Endless cable ties with separate head and spacer
• EL-TY-Series
These robust cable ties are particularly suitable for use with larger
diameter cables, pipes and hoses. Designed originally for securing
overhead catenary cables (when used with the spacers) they are now
used in many industries from the building sector, through to the
chemical industry, to the installation of signs for traffic management.
Features and Benefits
• Made of very strong Acetal (POM)
• Continuous strap, spacers and heads (with stainless steel pawls)
• Very secure fixing and good resistance to ageing and sunlight
• Suits any bundle diameter and reduces inventory
The EL-Ty can be cut to suit any bundle.
Opening for
EL-TY Strap
Spacer.
Head (Plain View)
Head (Side View)
Application tools
please see page 302.
Head (Front View)
Strap
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
TELS1
12.7
15.2 m
TELSH
20.3
15.8
TELS-SPK2
30.5
53.3
Material
Colour
Content
Proposal
Article-No.
1,112
POM
Black (BK)
15m strap, 30 heads
111-30000
-
POM
Black (BK)
25 Heads
111-31000
-
PP
Black (BK)
50 Spacer
111-32000
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a51
51
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties inside serrated
Used in a wide range of industries, these releasable and reusable
ties are ideal where temporary installation or the addition or removal
of cables is required, e. g. theatres, outdoor events or prototype
harness work.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable and reusable cable tie available in black and
natural colours
• Extended trigger for simple and quick release of ties
• Inside serration for a strong hold around the bundle
• Available in various lengths
The RELK and RLT cable ties can be re-opened and re-used.
Material specification
please see page 22.
RELK-, RLT-Series
• RELK-Series up to 200 N loop tensile strength
Width
(W)
TYPE
RELK2R
RELK2M
RELK2I
RELK2L
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
4.6
200.0
50.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
115-02202
4.6
250.0
65.0
200
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-02000
4.6
250.0
65.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
115-06729
4.6
300.0
81.0
200
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-06760
4.6
300.0
81.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
115-02101
4.6
350.0
95.0
200
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-02300
4.6
350.0
95.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
115-06919
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
• RLT-Series up to 670 N loop tensile strength
TYPE
RLT120
RLT150
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
7.6
340.0
90.0
535
7.6
340.0
90.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
100
111-70361
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
111-70319
8.9
770.0
225.0
670
8.9
770.0
225.0
670
PA66
Black (BK)
50
111-70110
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
111-70119
8.9
770.0
225.0
8.9
770.0
225.0
670
PA66HS
Natural (NA)
50
111-70159
670
PA66W
Black (BK)
50
111-70160
Material
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to
the Appendix.
52
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a52
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties inside serrated with tuckaway
• RT250-Series
Used in a wide range of industries, these releasable and reusable ties
are ideal where temporary installation or the addition or removal of
cables is required, e.g. theatres, outdoor events or harness work.
Features and Benefits
• Extended trigger for simple and quick release of ties
• Eyelet allows excess tail to be tucked neatly away
• Trigger protected from accidental release
Ideal for larger or heavier bundles these ties can be opened and reused.
T250-Series
TYPE
RT250M
RT250XL
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
12.5
565.3
150.0
1,115
12.5
565.3
150.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
25
131-75610
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
131-75619
12.5
565.3
150.0
12.5
1,030.0
305.0
1,115
PA66W
Black (BK)
25
131-75620
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
25
131-75510
12.5
1,030.0
305.0
1,115
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
131-75519
Material
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the
Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a53
53
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties inside serrated with kickdown lever
• REL-Series
Ideal for use where there is the need to repeatedly open and close
the tie.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable and reusable cable tie available in black and natural
colours (including UV-resistant)
• Simple and effective release mechanism
• Can be opened quickly and easily with one hand
• Inside serrated cable tie
Releasable and reusable cable tie, REL-Series.
Material specification
please see page 22.
REL-Series
TYPE
REL180
REL100
REL140
REL250
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
6.5
180.0
46.0
150
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-00027
6.7
100.0
21.0
180
PA66
Black (BK)
100
131-21010
6.7
100.0
21.0
180
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
131-21019
7.6
150.0
35.0
200
PA66
Black (BK)
100
131-21410
7.6
150.0
35.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
131-21419
7.6
250.0
68.0
200
PA66
Black (BK)
100
131-22510
7.6
250.0
68.0
200
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
131-22519
7.6
250.0
68.0
200
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
131-22560
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
REL250S, REL250X
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
REL250S
12.2
230.0
50.0
1,115
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
50
111-00074
REL250X
12.2
385.0
100.0
1,115
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
50
111-00075
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
54
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a54
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties outside serrated for marking
• LR55-Series
These releasable and reusable ties are ideal where temporary
installation or the addition or removal of cables is required, e.g.
logistic identification (colour coding), packaging industries or cable
harness manufacturing.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable and reusable cable tie available in various colours
• Extended trigger for quick and easy release of ties
• Various colours ideal for applications that require colour coding
• Outside serration, minimising the risk of cable insulation damage
The LR55 cable ties are reuseable and ideal for colour coding.
Material specification
please see page 22.
LR55 Series
TYPE
LR55R
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66
Blue (BU)
25
115-00006
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66
Green (GN)
25
115-00005
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66
Natural (NA)
25
115-00008
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66
Red (RD)
25
115-00003
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66
Yellow (YE)
25
115-00004
4.7
195.0
50.0
245
PA66HS
Black (BK)
25
115-00002
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a55
55
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties without serration in flexible TPU
The soft, flexible material makes these ties particularly suitable for
use on sensitive wires, e.g. fibre-optic cables.
Features and Benefits
• Elastic and flexible cable ties with rounded and smooth edges
• Releasable and reusable
• Double slotted head with fixing pawl
• Flexibility ensures steady and evenly distributed pressure
• Tight fixation even in a vertical position: prevents sliding or
loose bundles
• Suitable for moving elements and vibrating applications such as
windmills, machines, robotics, pulsating tubing and conduits
• Ideal for temporarily fixings suitable for presentations, concerts,
theatres and exhibitions
• Long lifetime when used indoors
• Remains flexible even at cold temperatures (-20°C)
The elasticity of the SOFTIX ties makes them suitable for use in many applications.
With 2nd loop to run
bundles in parallel!
One Step to the Web!
SOFTFIX ties available in small quantities.
SRT Series
• SRT-Series for industry quantities
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
SRT1807
7.0
180.0
45.0
57
TPU
Black (BK)
50
115-07189
SRT2607
7.0
260.0
79.0
57
TPU
Black (BK)
50
115-07269
SRT26011
11.0
260.0
55.0
123
TPU
Black (BK)
50
115-11269
SRT34011
11.0
340.0
90.0
123
TPU
Black (BK)
50
115-11349
SRT58028
28.0
580.0
150.0
360
TPU
Black (BK)
10
115-28589
SRT88028
28.0
880.0
240.0
360
TPU
Black (BK)
180
115-28889
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
SOFTFIX XS
7.0
180.0
45.0
SOFTFIX S
7.0
260.0
79.0
SOFTFIX M
11.0
260.0
SOFTFIX L
11.0
340.0
SOFTFIX XL
28.0
580.0
TYPE
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
57
TPU
Black (BK)
16
115-07190
57
TPU
Black (BK)
12
115-07270
55.0
123
TPU
Black (BK)
8
115-11270
90.0
123
TPU
Black (BK)
6
115-11350
150.0
360
TPU
Black (BK)
3
115-28590
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
56
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a56
Date of issue: January 2014
• SOFTFIX-Family
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Ties inside serrated with one-hand
release mechanism
• REZ-Series
Perfect for use in the packaging industry for tying up bags that may
need to be reopened and resealed again, e.g. milk powder in the
catering industry.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable and reusable cable tie
• Patented head design for simple and rapid use
• Quick-release mechanism for one-hand operation, even
under tension
• Inside serrated
• Can be opened with gloves
REZ ties have a simple one-hand release mechanism.
REZ-Series
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
REZ200
4.7
200.0
50.0
135
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-40200
REZ300
4.7
305.0
80.0
135
PA66
Black (BK)
100
115-40300
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a57
57
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Cable Tie with quick release mechanism
Speedy-Click
• SpeedyTie
The versatility of the SpeedyTie means that it is suitable for a
multitude of applications, such as electrical installations, heating and
ventilation, construction, exhibitions and trade fairs. Whether it is
used for permanent or temporary solutions, the SpeedyTie provides
a helping hand in every situation.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable cable tie
• Removable, patented 'Speedy-Click' rapid closure
• Bears loads of up to 888 N (approx. 90 kg)
• 750 mm long for use in a wide variety of applications
• Easy to handle when wearing protective gloves
• Available in signal yellow and black
Patented quick release mechanism for quick and easy application.
SpeedyTie® - Quick and easy.
Excess Tails can be neatly tucked away.
Material specification
please see page 22.
SpeedyTie® is particularly suited for
temporary but safe bundling or fixing.
SpeedyTie
TYPE
RTT750HR
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
13.0
752.0
210.0
888
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PA66
Yellow (YE), Red (RD)
5
115-00001
13.0
752.0
210.0
888
PA66
Yellow (YE), Red (RD)
25
115-00000
13.0
752.0
210.0
888
PA66HIR(S)
Black (BK)
5
115-00030
58
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a58
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.4
Cable Ties, Releasable
Hook and Loop Ties
• TEXTIE-Series
As cables use thinner and softer insulation, and as fibre optic cables
become more common, there is a need for a 'soft' method of
bundling. TEXTIEs are ideal for use on telephone cables, optical fibre
and network cables. In addition, they are perfect for use in
temporary installations such as theatre stage construction or the
manufacture of prototype cable harnesses.
TEXTIEs can also be used in many domestic and office applications, too.
Features and Benefits
• Quick and simple to use without tools
• No waste
• Resistant to ageing with no corrosion
• Re-usable up to 400 times
• Various colours for easy identification of multiple cable runs
Due to the functional cable tie design the TEXTIE is fixed on the cable and
can‘t get lost.
One Step to the Web!
The TEXTIE-Series is available in different colours and lengths.
TEXTIE-Series
TYPE
TEXTIE S
TEXTIE M
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Loop
Material
Hook
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
12.5
150.0
45.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Black (BK)
10
130-00012
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Black (BK)
10
130-00013
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Blue (BU)
10
130-00018
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Green (GN)
10
130-00017
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Red (RD)
10
130-00014
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
White (WH)
10
130-00021
12.5
200.0
60.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Yellow (YE)
10
130-00016
TEXTIE L
12.5
330.0
100.0
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Black (BK)
10
130-00019
TEXTIE 5M
12.5
5,000.0
-
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Black (BK)
1
130-00020
TEXTIE 25M
13.0
25,000.0
-
Polyamide (PA)
Polypropylene (PP)
Black (BK)
1
130-00022
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a59
59
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Ball-Lock
• MBT-Series
Metal ties are ideal for all applications that require high strength,
reliability and fire resistance. The MBT range of stainless steel cable
ties can be used in chemical industries and on oil platforms as well
as in mass transit, shipbuilding and mining industries. MBT ties are
also suitable for machine building, apparatus construction and in the
outside area of radio technology. Additionally, MBT ties are ideal for
securing lighting in theatres and exhibition halls.
MBT_SS, MBT_HS.
MBT_XHS.
Features and Benefits
• MBT cable ties made from stainless steel 304
• Patented non-releasable locking feature
• Corrosion resistant
• Weather resistant
• Outstanding chemical resistance
• Antimagnetic
• High temperature resistance
• Non-burning
Material specification
please see page 22.
MBT_SS, MBT_HS
MBT_XHS
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
MBT5SS
4.6
127.0
25.0
Article-No.
900
SS304
100
111-93058
MBT8SS
4.6
201.0
MBT14SS
4.6
362.0
50.0
900
SS304
100
111-93088
102.0
900
SS304
100
111-93148
MBT20SS
4.6
521.0
MBT27SS
4.6
685.0
152.0
900
SS304
100
111-93208
203.0
900
SS304
100
111-93278
MBT33SS
4.6
838.0
MBT8HS
7.9
201.0
254.0
900
SS304
100
111-93338
50.0
2,000
SS304
50
111-94088
MBT14HS
7.9
MBT20HS
7.9
362.0
102.0
2,000
SS304
50
111-94148
521.0
152.0
2,000
SS304
50
111-94208
MBT27HS
MBT33HS
7.9
685.0
203.0
2,000
SS304
50
111-94278
7.9
838.0
254.0
2,000
SS304
50
111-94338
MBT14XHS
12.3
362.0
102.0
2,700
SS304
50
111-95148
MBT20XHS
12.3
521.0
152.0
2,700
SS304
50
111-95208
MBT27XHS
12.3
681.0
203.0
2,700
SS304
50
111-95278
MBT33XHS
12.3
838.0
254.0
2,700
SS304
50
111-95338
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
60
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a60
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
MBT-Kit
The MBT range of stainless steel cable ties can be used in the most
arduous of conditions or where the additional security, strength
and fire resistance of a metal fixing is required. Used in all industries
from mass transit and ship building to automotive and high
temperature applications.
Features and Benefits
• Handy kit for on-site installations in harsh environments
• MBT-kit consists of:
• A carry case
• An assortment of five sizes of MBT ties (SS304)
• THT application tool
MBT-Kit, an assortment of different sizes of MBT cable ties.
Application tools
please see page 302.
TYPE
Material specification
please see page 22.
Content
Length
(L)
Width
(W)
Bundle
Ø max.
Article-No.
MBT-KIT-304-BASIC
Page
111-01422
Content
THT Tool
1
MBT8SS
20
201.0
4.6
50.0
900.0
111-93088
MBT8HS
20
201.0
7.9
50.0
2,000.0
111-94088
MBT5SS
20
127.0
4.6
25.0
900.0
111-93058
MBT14SS
30
362.0
4.6
102.0
900.0
111-93148
MBT14HS
30
362.0
7.9
102.0
2,000.0
111-94148
110-09970
60
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a61
61
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Ball-Lock
• MBT-Series
Metal ties are ideal for all applications that require high strength,
reliability and fire resistance. The MBT range of stainless steel cable
ties can be used in chemical industries and on oil platforms as well
as in mass transit, shipbuilding and mining industries. MBT ties are
also suitable for machine building, apparatus construction and in the
outside area of radio technology. Additionally, MBT ties are ideal for
securing lighting in theatres and exhibition halls.
MBT_S, MBT_H.
Features and Benefits
• MBT cable ties made from stainless steel 316
• Patented non-releasable locking feature
• Corrosion resistant
• Weather resistant
• Outstanding chemical resistance
• Antimagnetic
• High temperature resistance
• Non-burning
MBT_XH.
MBTUH.
MBT_S, MBT_H
MBT_UH
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
MBT5S
4.6
127.0
25.0
Article-No.
900
SS316
100
111-93059
MBT8S
4.6
201.0
MBT14S
4.6
362.0
50.0
900
SS316
100
111-93089
102.0
900
SS316
100
MBT20S
4.6
521.0
111-93149
152.0
900
SS316
100
111-93209
MBT27S
4.6
MBT33S
4.6
685.0
203.0
900
SS316
100
111-93279
838.0
254.0
900
SS316
100
MBT8H
111-93339
7.9
201.0
50.0
2,000
SS316
50
111-94089
MBT14H
7.9
362.0
102.0
2,000
SS316
50
111-94149
MBT20H
7.9
521.0
152.0
2,000
SS316
50
111-94209
MBT27H
7.9
685.0
203.0
2,000
SS316
50
111-94279
MBT33H
7.9
838.0
254.0
2,000
SS316
50
111-94339
MBT14XH
12.3
362.0
102.0
2,700
SS316
50
111-95149
MBT20XH
12.3
521.0
152.0
2,700
SS316
50
111-95209
MBT27XH
12.3
681.0
203.0
2,700
SS316
50
111-95279
MBT33XH
12.3
838.0
254.0
2,700
SS316
50
111-95339
MBT14UH
16.0
362.0
102.0
4,100
SS316
50
111-01301
MBT20UH
16.0
521.0
152.0
4,100
SS316
50
111-01302
MBT27UH
16.0
681.0
203.0
4,100
SS316
50
111-01303
MBT33UH
16.0
838.0
254.0
4,100
SS316
50
111-01304
MBT43UH
16.0
1,092.0
330.0
4,100
SS316
25
111-01305
MBT49UH
16.0
1,245.0
380.0
4,100
SS316
25
111-01306
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
62
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a62
Date of issue: January 2014
MBT_XH
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Ball-Lock and Coating
• MBT-FC-Series
Features and Benefits
• Fully coated MBT, made from type 316 stainless steel with
polyester coating
• Patented non-releasable locking feature
• Coated cable tie with smooth edges
• Comfortable handling and installation
• Eliminates contact corrosion between dissimilar materials
during application
MBT_XHFC.
MBT_SFC, MBT_HFC.
MBT_XHFC
MBT_SFC, MBT_HFC
Application tools
please see page 302.
MBT_UHFC
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MBT5SFC
4.6
127.0
25.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00288
MBT8SFC
4.6
201.0
50.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00289
MBT14SFC
4.6
362.0
102.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00290
MBT20SFC
4.6
521.0
152.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00291
MBT27SFC
4.6
681.0
203.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00292
MBT33SFC
4.6
838.0
254.0
540
SS316, SP
100
111-00293
MBT8HFC
7.9
201.0
50.0
1,020
SS316, SP
50
111-00294
MBT14HFC
7.9
362.0
102.0
1,020
SS316, SP
50
111-00295
MBT20HFC
7.9
521.0
152.0
1,020
SS316, SP
50
111-00296
MBT27HFC
7.9
681.0
203.0
1,020
SS316, SP
50
111-00297
MBT33HFC
7.9
838.0
254.0
1,020
SS316, SP
50
111-00298
MBT14XHFC
12.3
362.0
102.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-00299
MBT17XHFC
12.3
434.0
125.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-01500
MBT20XHFC
12.3
521.0
152.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-00300
MBT23XHFC
12.3
575.0
168.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-01501
MBT27XHFC
12.3
681.0
203.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-00301
MBT30XHFC
12.3
754.0
225.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-01502
MBT33XHFC
12.3
838.0
254.0
1,620
SS316, SP
50
111-00302
MBT43XHFC
12.3
1,092.0
330.0
1,620
SS316, SP
25
111-01503
MBT49XHFC
12.3
1,245.0
380.0
1,620
SS316, SP
25
111-01504
MBT14UHFC
16.0
362.0
102.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01512
MBT17UHFC
16.0
434.0
125.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01513
MBT20UHFC
16.0
521.0
152.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01514
MBT23UHFC
16.0
575.0
168.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01515
MBT27UHFC
16.0
681.0
203.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01516
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a63
63
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Ball-Lock and Coating
• MBT-FC-Series
Width
(W)
TYPE
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MBT30UHFC
16.0
754.0
225.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01517
MBT33UHFC
16.0
838.0
254.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01518
MBT43UHFC
16.0
1,092.0
330.0
2,500
SS316, SP
25
111-01519
MBT49UHFC
16.0
1,245.0
380.0
2,500
SS316, SP
25
111-01520
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Double Wrap Cable Ties with Ball-Lock
• MBTXHD- / MBTUHD-Series
The double wrap ties of the MBT-series are used in applications
where a fixing requires an extraordinary high tensile strength.
Features and Benefits
• Stainless steel MBT ties with double wrap operation
• Wraps around the bundle and passes through the head twice
• Very high tensile strength to carry enormous applied loads
• Head with two locking balls
• Resistant to arduous conditions and environments
MBT_UHD.
MBT_XHD
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
MBT27XHD
12.3
681.0
100.0
Article-No.
5,000
SS316
50
111-01307
MBT33XHD
12.3
838.0
MBT43XHD
12.3
1,092.0
120.0
5,000
SS316
50
111-01308
160.0
5,000
SS316
25
111-01309
MBT49XHD
12.3
MBT60XHD
12.3
1,245.0
180.0
5,000
SS316
25
111-01310
1,524.0
230.0
5,000
SS316
25
111-01311
MBT27UHD
MBT33UHD
16.0
681.0
100.0
7,000
SS316
50
111-01312
16.0
838.0
120.0
7,000
SS316
50
111-01313
MBT43UHD
16.0
1,092.0
160.0
7,000
SS316
25
111-01314
MBT49UHD
16.0
1,245.0
180.0
7,000
SS316
25
111-01315
MBT60UHD
16.0
1,524.0
230.0
7,000
SS316
25
111-01316
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
64
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a64
Date of issue: January 2014
MBT_UHD Double Band.
MBT_UHD
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Double Wrap Cable Ties with Ball-Lock
and Coating
• MBTXHDFC- / MBTUHDFC-Series
The MBT range of stainless steel cable ties can be used in the most
arduous of conditions or where the additional security, strength and
fire resistance of a metal fixing is required. Used in all industries from
mass transit, ship building, oil rigs, mining and chemical industry,
theatres and exhibition halls. In the event of a fire, cables will remain
securely held in place and will not fall to block emergency exits.
Features and Benefits
• MBT cable ties, made from stainless steel SS316 with a
polyester coating
• Patented non-releasable locking feature
• Double wrap operation
• Corrosion resistant
• Weather resistant
• Outstanding chemical resistance
• Antimagnetic
• High temperature resistant
• Non-burning
MBT_UHDFC.
Material specification
please see page 22.
MBT_XHDFC
Application tools
please see page 302.
MBT_UHDFC
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MBT27XHDFC
12.3
681.0
100.0
MBT33XHDFC
12.3
838.0
120.0
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01505
2,500
SS316, SP
50
111-01506
MBT43XHDFC
12.3
1,092.0
MBT49XHDFC
12.3
1,245.0
160.0
2,500
SS316, SP
25
111-01507
180.0
2,500
SS316, SP
25
111-01508
MBT60XHDFC
12.3
MBT27UHDFC
16.0
1,524.0
230.0
2,500
SS316, SP
25
111-01509
681.0
100.0
5,000
SS316, SP
50
111-01521
MBT33UHDFC
MBT43UHDFC
16.0
838.0
120.0
5,000
SS316, SP
50
111-01522
16.0
1,092.0
160.0
5,000
SS316, SP
25
111-01523
MBT49UHDFC
16.0
1,245.0
180.0
5,000
SS316, SP
25
111-01524
MBT60UHDFC
16.0
1,524.0
230.0
5,000
SS316, SP
25
111-01525
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a65
65
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Fold Locking
The MLT range of stainless steel cable ties can be used in the most
arduous of conditions or where the additional security, strength and
fire resistance of a metal fixing is required. Used in all industries from
mass transit, ship building, oil rigs, mining and chemical industry,
theatres and exhibition halls. In the event of a fire, cables will remain
securely held in place and will not fall to block emergency exits.
Features and Benefits
• Releasable stainless steel buckle tie, MLT-series
• Heavy-duty type 316 stainless steel
• Can be re-opened and re-used
• Available also with polyester coating which prevents corrosion
between dissimilar materials
These Metal ties are availiable with and without coating.
Material specification
please see page 22.
MLT-Series
• MLT-Series
TYPE
MLT8SS5
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
5.0
230.0
60.0
420
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
SS316
100
111-94080
MLT12SS5
5.0
330.0
90.0
420
SS316
100
111-94120
MLT16SS5
5.0
430.0
120.0
420
SS316
100
111-94161
MLT24SS5
5.0
630.0
180.0
420
SS316
100
111-91400
MLT8SS10
10.0
230.0
60.0
850
SS316
100
111-95080
MLT12SS10
10.0
330.0
90.0
850
SS316
100
111-95120
MLT16SS10
10.0
430.0
120.0
850
SS316
100
111-91300
MLT24SS10
10.0
630.0
180.0
850
SS316
100
111-95241
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
SS316, SP
100
111-91000
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
TYPE
MLT8SSC5
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
5.3
230.0
60.0
420
MLT12SSC5
5.3
330.0
90.0
420
SS316, SP
100
111-91121
MLT16SSC5
5.3
430.0
120.0
420
SS316, SP
100
111-91161
MLT24SSC5
5.3
630.0
180.0
420
SS316, SP
100
111-91180
MLT8SSC10
10.3
230.0
60.0
850
SS316, SP
100
111-91001
MLT12SSC10
10.3
330.0
90.0
850
SS316, SP
100
111-91123
MLT16SSC10
10.3
430.0
120.0
850
SS316, SP
100
111-91163
MLT24SSC10
10.3
630.0
180.0
850
SS316, SP
100
111-91181
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
66
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a66
Date of issue: January 2014
• MLT-C-Series coated
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Cable Ties with Raster Locking
The MAT range of stainless steel cable ties can be used in the most
arduous of conditions or where the additional security, strength and
fire resistance of a metal fixing is required. Used in all industries from
mass transit, ship building, oil rigs, mining and chemical industry,
theatres and exhibition halls. In the event of a fire, cables will remain
securely held in place and will not fall to block emergency exits.
Features and Benefits
• Stainless steel ladderstyle cable tie, MAT-series
• Similar to conventional 'plastic' cable ties
• Works on a ratchet system
• Type 316 stainless steel
• Available also with polyester coating which prevents corrosion
between dissimilar materials
Stainless Steel Cable Ties can be used at temperatures up to 538° C.
Application tools
please see page 302.
MAT-Series
• MAT-Series
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
MAT8SS7
7.0
230.0
60.0
MAT12SS7
7.0
330.0
MAT16SS7
7.0
430.0
MAT24SS7
7.0
630.0
180.0
TYPE
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
445
SS316
100
111-92080
90.0
445
SS316
100
111-92120
120.0
445
SS316
100
111-92160
445
SS316
100
111-92240
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• MAT-C-Series coated
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
MAT8SSC7
7.0
230.0
60.0
445
SS316, SP
100
111-92004
MAT12SSC7
7.0
330.0
90.0
445
SS316, SP
100
111-96120
MAT16SSC7
7.0
430.0
120.0
445
SS316, SP
100
111-92162
MAT24SSC7
7.0
630.0
180.0
445
SS316, SP
100
111-92200
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a67
67
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.5
Cable Ties, Stainless Steel
Protective Channel for Stainless Steel Ties
• LFPC
When used in conjunction with the MBT range of stainless steel
cable ties this channel gives the cable protection against chafing,
vibration and shock. Ideal for use in arduous conditions such as
those found on board ships, oil rigs or in nuclear power stations.
Features and Benefits
• LFPC channel, manufactured from Polyolefin
• Works with MBT- and AMT-Series
• Smooth surface protects bundle against chafing caused by
vibrations and shocks
• Can be cut from roll (50 m) to any length
• Halogenfree
• Flame retardant
The fire protection properties of the material
relate to the test performed on defined test
samples. This is a test under laboratory
conditions and not directly transferable to the
product made from this material.
Cable tie MBTXH with LFPC Protective Channel.
Material specification
please see page 22.
LFPC
TYPE
Width
(W)
For Ties
Material
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
LFPC70
LFPC83
7.0
MBTS
PO
25 m
111-93000
8.3
MBTH
PO
25 m
111-00257
LFPC103
LFPC129
10.3
MBTH
PO
25 m
111-94000
12.9
MBTXH
PO
50 m
111-00253
LFPC132
13.2
MBTXH
PO
25 m
111-00254
LFPC150
15.0
MBTXH
PO
25 m
111-95000
LFPC163
16.3
AMT, MBTUH
PO
50 m
111-00255
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
68
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a68
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.6
Cable Ties With Fixing Elements
1-Piece Fixing Ties for Weld Studs in the strap
Features and Benefits
• For 5 mm studs or 5 mm ISO threaded studs
• Soft-push versions for easy assembly, without tool
• Eyelet allows excess tail to be tucked neatly away
With the RT50RS5 and the SB14/172 you can mount pipes or cables to a
weld stud.
T50RS5, RT50RS
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H2)
Bundle
Ø max.
T50RS5
4.6
190.0
14.5
40.0
222
Material
Colour
Article-No.
PA66
Black (BK)
111-07110
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
1-Piece Fixing Ties with Mounting Head for Screws
This range of one piece cable ties have a built in mounting hole and
once fastened around the cables it can be simply secured to the
panel with a screw or bolt.
The tie is first fitted to the panel and then the cables can be added.
Features and Benefits
• One-piece bundling and fixing tie
• Quick and easy installation
The mounting head ties can be easily screwed onto a panel.
TYPE
T18MR
T30MR9
T50MS
T50MR
Date of issue: January 2014
T50ML
T120MR
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.5
110.0
20.0
80
Hole Ø
(FH)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
3.1
PA66
Black (BK)
113-01810
2.5
110.0
20.0
80
3.1
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-01819
3.5
160.0
32.0
135
4.3
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-03019
3.5
160.0
32.0
135
4.3
PA66HS
Black (BK)
113-03010
4.6
165.0
32.0
225
5.3
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-05819
4.6
165.0
32.0
225
5.3
PA66
Black (BK)
113-05820
4.7
215.0
45.0
225
5.4
PA66W
Black (BK)
113-05060
4.7
215.0
45.0
225
5.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-05019
4.7
215.0
45.0
225
5.4
PA66
Black (BK)
113-05010
4.7
390.0
100.0
225
5.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-05419
7.6
395.0
102.0
535
6.5
PA66HIRHSUV
Black (BK)
113-12060
7.6
395.0
102.0
535
6.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
113-12020
7.6
395.0
102.0
535
6.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
113-12029
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a69
69
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.6
Cable Ties With Fixing Elements
Cable Ties outside serrated for parallel routing
• TAS-Series
Designed for use with catenary wire the TAS system is simple to use
and an effective method of installing cables. Typical applications are
the suspension of cables between buildings, the support of satellite
cables and installation of railway signalling cables.
Features and Benefits
• Halogen-free
• Suitable for installation in public areas, road or railway tunnels
• Built-in spacer for easy and quick installation
• Easy to re-open and re-use
The TAS-range is used for supporting antenna cables.
Application tools
please see page 302.
Material specification
please see page 22.
Tunnels a common application.
TAS-series
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Article-No.
TAS100RWS
12.7
210.8
44.5
445
PA66HIRHSUV, PP
Black (BK)
111-98501
TAS100MWS
12.7
271.8
69.9
445
PA66HIRHSUV, PP
Black (BK)
111-98500
TAS100LWS
12.7
421.6
114.3
445
PA66HIRHSUV, PP
Black (BK)
111-98502
70
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a70
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.6
Cable Ties With Fixing Elements
Cable Ties inside serrated for cable tray
• CTF-Series
The CTF Fixing Ties are designed specifically for use with cable tray.
Features and Benefits
• Usable with common styles of cable tray
• Meets rated break point to provide easy installation
• No pulling of cable tie underneath cable harness
Cable tray ties.
Application tools
please see page 302.
Cable tray ties in application.
CTF with unique footing for use with
cable tray.
CTF120, CTF250
CTF12090
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
CTF120
7.6
320.0
CTF12090
7.6
CTF250
13.0
Material
Colour
Article-No.
535
PA66
Black (BK)
111-98121
320.0
535
PA66
Black (BK)
111-98100
355.0
1,115
PA66
Black (BK)
111-98160
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
CTF12090 = 90° Angle
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a71
71
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.6
Cable Ties With Fixing Elements
1-Piece Fixing Ties with rivet, releasable
Simply drill an 8 mm hole and knock in the peg. Used to fasten
cables, pipes or hoses in place.
Features and Benefits
• One-piece for fixing to brick, cement or wood
• Practical for the construction industry
• Time saving and versatile
• Depth of drill hole: 13.0 mm
Wall plug tie in application.
WPT230
TYPE
WPT230
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Hole Ø
(FH)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
8.0
230.0
59.0
8.0
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
126-00020
Material
Colour
Article-No.
PA66
Natural (NA)
148-00001
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
1-Piece Fixing Tie with Self Adhesive Socket
Features and Benefits
• Bundling and fixing solution
• Ideal combination of materials and design
• Different positions of the fixing anchor are available to fit
installation space
T18RSA
TYPE
T18RSA
Material specification
please see page 22.
T18RSA
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
2.5
100.0
16.0
80
72
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a72
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Technical Information
Information and installation instructions for
self-adhesive mounting bases
HellermannTyton uses two different types of adhesives for selfadhesive bases: acrylate and synthetic rubber. These differ in the
operating temperature range and the ‚pull off‘ force of the adhesive.
Synthetic rubber has an excellent initial grip, allowing for almost
immediate use. Acrylate adhesive has less initial grip, so there is a
need to wait for a few hours before use, but has a higher ‚pull off‘
force than synthetic rubber.This enables a permanent fixing lasting
months or even years. To use these adhesives the surface must be
dry, and free of dust, oil, oxides, parting agents and other impurities.
For this the use of isopropane/water (50/50) is recommended. After
cleaning allow the surface to dry completely. Peel off the protective
backing on the self-adhesive base, ensuring the adhesive is not
touched. Apply the part to the surface and press down firmly for
several seconds.
Adhesive Operating
Temperature
ADHESIVE
Synthetic rubber
with base of
polyethylene foam
Synthetic
rubber
-20 °C to +50 °C
Acrylate with base of
polyurethane foam
Acrylate
to +105 °C
Acrylate with base of
acrylic foam
mod.
Acrylate
-40 °C to +90 °C
-40 °C to +60 °C
Instructions for use
1. The surface must be dry, free from
dust, oil, oxides, parting agents and
other impurities. The surface to be
glued should be cleaned using a
clean cloth and isopropanol /water
(50/50). When using other
appropriate cleaning agents, ensure
that they do not attack the surface
nor leave any residues.
2. After cleaning allow the surface
to air-dry completely.
3. Peel off protective backing
and ensure the adhesive area is
not touched.
4. Press down firmly on the base with
the thumbs for several seconds.
Date of issue: January 2014
5. Depending on the type of adhesive,
wait for several minutes (synthetic
rubber) or hours (acrylate) so that
the adhesive can bond completely
with the surface.
We will be happy to send you on request an
up-to-date technical datasheet for whichever
adhesive you are using.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a73
73
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Fixing Parts with Special Adhesive
• SolidTack-Series
These products work on varnished and powder coated surfaces as
used in the railway, aviation or automotive industry. They can also
be used on plastic covers, cases and parts as used in a variety of
other industries.
Features and Benefits
• MB mounts with homogeneous system of acrylic adhesive
• Very good initial adhesion, increases with time
• High cohesive strength combined with good weathering resistance
• Innovative fixing solution for low energy surfaces like PP, PE or
painted / varnished surfaces
• Protective, easy peel backing
SolidTack products work on varnished and powder coated surfaces.
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
Material specification
please see page 22.
One Step to the Web!
Cable Tie Mounts MB3, MB4, MB5
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole
Ø
(FH)
Strap
Width
max. (G)
For
Cable
Width
max.
Material
Colour
Adhesive
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
100
151-00432
19.0
19.0
3.8
3.1
4.1
-
PA66
Black (BK)
mod.
Acrylate
19.0
19.0
3.8
3.1
4.1
-
PA66
Natural (NA)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00514
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
-
PA66
Black (BK)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00433
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
-
PA66
Natural (NA)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00587
MB5APT
38.0
38.0
6.4
4.7
10.0
-
PA66
Black (BK)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00434
FKH50AVHB
25.0
56.5
-
3.1
-
50.0
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00312
FKH80AVHB
25.0
86.0
-
3.1
-
80.0
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
mod.
Acrylate
100
151-00313
MB3APT
MB4APT
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
74
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a74
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Flat Ribbon Cables FKH Series
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Self Adhesive, Screw Fixing Cable Tie Mounts
Where speed, simplicity and a firm fixing base are required these
self adhesive clips are ideal. Particularly suitable for use in control
cabinets, telecoms equipment or domestic appliances where the use
of holes, screws or nuts and bolts are impractical or undesirable.
Features and Benefits
• Screw or self-adhesive versions
• Simple to install with a screw or bolt
• Excellent security, particularly in areas of high vibration
• Maximum adhesive surface area to achieve high pull-off force
• 4-way entry for cable tie for quicker and more flexible installation
Cable Tie Mounts MB and TY.
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
Cable Tie Mounts MB2A
Cable Tie Mounts MB3-5(A)
Cable Tie Mounts MB4CA
Cable Tie Mounts MB3A
• MB-Series Square-Cut, self adhesive, screwable
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Adhesive
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MB2A
13.0
13.0
4.1
-
2.7
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-01802
MB3A
MB4A3
MB4A
19.0
19.0
3.8
3.1
4.1
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28320
19.0
19.0
3.8
3.1
4.1
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28349
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
PA66
Black (BK)
Acrylate
100
151-28430
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28412
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28469
MB4CAS
29.0
29.0
5.7
4.2
5.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28449
MB4CA
29.0
29.0
5.7
4.2
5.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28459
MB5A
37.7
37.7
7.1
4.8
8.9
PA66
White (WH)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-28529
MB5A3
38.0
38.0
6.4
4.7
10.0
PA66
Black (BK)
Acrylate
100
151-28530
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• MB-Series Square-Cut, screwable
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MB3
19.0
19.0
3.8
3.1
4.1
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-28359
MB4
28.0
28.0
4.7
4.0
5.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-28479
MB5
37.7
37.7
6.2
4.8
8.9
PA66
White (WH)
100
151-00324
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a75
75
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Self Adhesive, Screw Fixing Cable Tie Mounts
Material specification
please see page 22.
Features and Benefits
• Screwable or self-adhesive versions
• Concave design to support larger diameter cables and bundles
• 2-way mounting base for safe guiding of cables and conduits
• Suitable for applications with minimal space
• Mounted before cable installation
• Usable with standard cable ties
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
Cable Tie Mounts TY3G1 (S)
Cable Tie Mounts TY8G1 (S)
• TY-Series Rectangle Design, screwable
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
TY3G1
14.0
20.0
3.7
2.2
4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-21319
TY8G1
25.0
32.0
5.2
3.2
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-21819
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• TY-Series Rectangle Design, self adhesive, screwable
TYPE
TY3G1S
TY8G1S
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Adhesive
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
14.0
20.0
3.7
2.2
14.0
20.0
3.7
2.2
4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
Acrylate
100
151-11319
4.0
PA66W
Black (BK)
Acrylate
100
151-11310
25.0
32.0
5.2
3.2
25.0
32.0
5.2
3.2
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
Acrylate
100
151-11819
8.0
PA66W
Black (BK)
Acrylate
100
151-11810
76
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a76
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Q-Series
Features and Benefits
• Screw or self adhesive versions
• Perfect for combination with Q-ties
• 4-way entry for Q-tie
• Adhesive with high pull-off force
• Q-Mount base secures the Q-tie in a vertical position, leaving the
hands free to apply cables
Please find more Q-Series products for
your system solution on page 78 and 256.
Mounting Base Q-mount
Q-mount QM, 4-way entry, adhesive, screwable.
The Q-mount base locks the Q-tie in
vertical position, leaving the hands
free to apply the cables.
Mounting Base Q-mount
One Step to the Web!
• Q-mount Series QMA, self adhesive, screwable
TYPE
QM20A
QM30A
QM40A
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Adhesive
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
20.0
20.0
3.7
3.1
4.0
20.0
20.0
3.7
3.1
4.0
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-10914
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-10904
30.0
30.0
4.5
4.1
5.1
30.0
30.0
4.5
4.1
5.1
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-10915
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
100
151-10905
40.0
40.0
5.5
4.1
8.4
40.0
40.0
5.5
4.1
8.4
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
50
151-10916
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
50
151-10906
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
• Q-mount Series QM, screwable
TYPE
QM20
Date of issue: January 2014
QM30
QM40
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
20.0
20.0
3.7
3.1
4.0
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-10911
20.0
20.0
3.7
3.1
4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-10901
30.0
30.0
4.5
4.1
5.1
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-10912
30.0
30.0
4.5
4.1
5.1
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-10902
40.0
40.0
5.5
4.1
8.4
PA66
Natural (NA)
50
151-10903
40.0
40.0
5.5
4.1
8.4
PA66
Black (BK)
50
151-10913
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a77
77
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Cable Tie Mounts CTQM
• Q-Mount Series CTQM
Features and Benefits
• 2-way mounting base for safe guiding of cables and conduits
• For cable ties up to 5 mm wide
• Uses screw with countersunk head (max. ø of head: 8.0 mm)
• Perfect for combination with Q-ties
• Pre-assembly feature
• Provides a secure hold with Q-ties, particularly in difficult
situations such as vertical mounting positions
Material specification
please see page 22.
Q-mount, CTQM 2-way entry, screwable.
Please find more Q-Series products for
your system solution on page 77 and 256.
Mounting base CTQM
TYPE
CTQM5
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
9.5
21.0
6.7
4.5
5.0
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-10930
9.5
21.0
6.7
4.5
5.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-10920
78
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a78
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Paste Adhesive Mount
• PMB5
The PMB5 mount offers a fixing solution for applications where a
screw fixing is not possible. Due to a larger diameter the mount
can even be installed onto uneven surfaces. PMB5 mounts are used
in the railway industry as well as in the renewable energy industry.
Further applications can be seen in the ship building and electrical
industries and the production of switching cabinets.
Features and Benefits
• PMB5 paste adhesive mount for fixings with paste / liquid adhesive
• Mount geometry offers a good form closure with cured adhesive
• Can even be installed onto uneven surfaces due to large diameter
• Can also be applied in combination with hot-melt adhesive, as
mount is made of heat resistant PA66
PMB5 mount with paste adhesive.
PMB5
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PMB5
36.0
36.0
10.7
4.8
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
151-00498
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a79
79
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Mounts
• LKC with overlapping curved design
Designed specifically for holding heavier cable bundles these
mounting bases can be used in many industries from agriculture to
truck manufacture. They offer a very secure fixing and can be used
with a wide variety of heavy duty cable ties up to 13mm wide.
Features and Benefits
• Curved design for additional cable support
• Simple to install with a screw or bolt
• Excellent security, particularly in areas of high vibration
Material specification
please see page 22.
Cable Tie Mounts LKC Series.
NY3256
Wall fastening
TYPE
LKC
LKCSF1
NY3256
Drawing
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
17.0
25.0
13.5
5.5
8.0
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-27010
17.0
25.0
13.5
5.5
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-27019
19.0
40.0
16.8
6.0
13.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-27219
19.0
40.0
16.8
6.0
13.0
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-27202
12.0
13.5
7.8
3.0
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
1,000
151-25219
80
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a80
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Mounts
• with curved design
Designed specifically for holding heavier cable bundles these
mounting bases can be used in many industries from agriculture to
truck manufacture. They offer a very secure fixing and can be used
with a wide variety of heavy duty cable ties up to 7.6mm wide.
Features and Benefits
• Curved design for additional cable support
• Simple to install with a screw or bolt
• Excellent security, particularly in areas of high vibration
Cable Tie Mounts KR6G5, KR8G5 and CTM.
Cable Tie Mounts KR6G5, KR8G5 and CTM
TYPE
KR6G5
KR8G5
CTM3
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
12.0
18.0
9.0
4.5
6.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24619
12.0
18.0
9.0
4.5
6.0
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
151-24660
14.5
25.0
12.0
6.5
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24819
14.5
25.0
12.0
6.5
8.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
100
151-24850
15.5
21.8
9.4
5.1
7.9
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-30600
15.5
21.8
9.4
5.1
7.9
PA66
White (WH)
100
151-30605
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a81
81
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Mounts
• For applications where space is limited
Each of these products offer particular benefits, but all are
designed for simple, yet robust, installation in a wide variety of
applications. Particularly used in telecoms equipment, switchgear
and control cabinets.
Features and Benefits
• Suitable for applications with minimal space
• Mounted before cable installation and in line with cable
• CTAM has 4-way entry design for use in line or at 90° angle to
cable run
Cable Tie Mounts CTAM.
Material specification
please see page 22.
Cable Tie Mounts CTAM1/CTAM2
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
CTAM1
10.2
20.4
5.1
4.3
5.0
PA66
White (WH)
100
151-31103
CTAM2
10.2
20.4
5.1
5.2
5.0
PA66
White (WH)
100
151-31203
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
82
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a82
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Mounts for Screw Fixing
• MB-, TY- Series Curved Design, screwable
These products are designed for simple, yet robust, installation in a
wide variety of applications - particularly used in telecoms equipment,
switchgear and control cabinets.
Features and Benefits
• Simple to install with a screw or bolt
• Excellent security, particularly in areas of high vibration
• Single hole fixing with two-way entry for cable tie
Screw fix cable tie mounts MB1.
Cable Tie Mounts MB1/MB2
Cable Tie Mounts TY3/TY8
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
8.0
12.5
3.5
2.9
2.6
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-28119
TY3F1
8.0
19.0
7.2
3.5
5.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
1,000
151-23319
TY8F1
10.0
22.4
7.2
4.5
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
1,000
151-23819
12.5
20.5
3.3
5.0
5.0
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-28210
12.5
20.5
3.3
5.0
5.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-28219
TYPE
MB1
MB2
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a83
83
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Mounts
• LKM / CL / FH with curved design for sideways fixing
In areas with limited space these mounting bases allow the cable to
be offset from the fixing hole, and can be installed in the equipment
prior to the cable installation. A major cost saving can be made by
using these products as many different sizes of standard cable ties
can be used, reducing the need to stock a wide range of specific
fixing ties.
LKM/CL8 Cable Tie Mounts.
FH Cable Tie Mounts.
LKM/CL8 Cable Tie Mounts.
FH cable tie mount.
Features and Benefits
• Screw mounts for fixing cable sideways
• Ideal for securing large, heavier bundles
• Suitable for cable ties up to 8 mm wide
Material specification
please see page 22.
LKM/CL8 Cable Tie Mounts
FH Cable Tie Mounts
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
FH18
7.1
13.3
4.0
-
3.7
2.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
500
151-61119
FH30
9.5
17.9
4.7
-
5.5
3.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
500
151-61319
FH50
LKM
CL8
11.3
22.2
6.2
-
7.1
4.6
PA66
Natural (NA)
500
151-61519
12.0
27.0
16.0
5.0
6.0
7.6
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-26304
12.0
27.0
16.0
5.0
6.0
7.6
PA66
Black (BK)
100
151-26301
12.5
27.3
16.0
5.0
6.5
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-26819
12.5
27.3
16.0
5.0
6.5
8.0
PA66W
Black (BK)
100
151-26860
84
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a84
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Screw Fixing Mounts
• Stainless Steel 316 mounts for MBT Ties
Suitable for the secure fixing of cables, tubing, conduits and pipes
within the most arduous of environments. Providing a complete
fastening and fixing solution when used in conjunction with the
stainless steel MBT-S and MBT-H ties, they are ideal for use within
shipbuilding, oil and gas (offshore), industrial machinery & vehicles,
food & beverage, power, renewable energy and process industries.
Features and Benefits
• 2-way fixing for MBT-S and MBT-H ties
• High performance stainless steel 316 material
• 10mm slot width
• Single 4mm, 5mm or 6mm fixing hole
• Heavy duty design
• Robust and durable solution
• Resistant to a range of materials and conditions
• Quick and easy to install
• Safe and secure solution for cables, tubing, conduits and pipes
• Ideal for a range of industries and applications
Stainless Steel P-mount SSPC.
Material specification
please see page 22.
One Step to the Web!
The SSPC-Mounts can ideally
be combined with the MBT
cable ties on page 60.
SSPC-Series
TYPE
Length
(L)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
SSPC4
23.0
10.2
4.5
4.2
SS316
Metal (ML)
100
151-00837
SSPC5
23.0
10.2
4.5
5.3
SS316
Metal (ML)
100
151-00838
SSPC6
23.0
10.2
4.5
6.3
SS316
Metal (ML)
100
151-00839
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a85
85
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.7
Cable Tie Mounts
Mounting Plates for Screw Fixing
• MP-Series
• MSMP-Series
Many applications require each cable run to be firmly held in place
but separately from adjacent cable runs (example - control cabinets,
machinery and military systems). The MP series of mounts helps to
achieve this.
Features and Benefits
• Allow multiple cables to be run in parallel
• Simple to fix with two screws
• Cables are fixed by using a cable tie through any combination of
the available slots
Mounting plates types MP and MSMP.
Material specification
please see page 22.
Mounting Plates Types MP and MSMP
Mounting Plates Types MP and MSMP
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
No. of
bundles
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
MP2M3
12.7
76.2
3.2
3.7
5.2
2
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24219
MP3M3
12.7
108.0
3.2
3.7
5.2
3
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24319
MP4M3
12.7
139.8
3.2
3.7
5.2
4
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24419
MP5M3
12.7
171.6
3.2
3.7
5.2
5
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-24519
MSMP5/10
15.8
204.5
5.3
5.1
7.6
5
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-25519
MSMP6/6
15.8
244.0
5.3
3.8
7.6
6
PA66
Natural (NA)
100
151-25619
MSMP4
15.9
167.0
5.2
5.1
8.2
4
PA66
Natural (NA)
500
150-83499
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
86
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a86
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content. Other packaging options may also be available.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8
Fixing Elements
Cable Fixing Cradle
• TM1SF for cable ties width up to 5.2 mm
Offering simple and easy methods of securing cables or pipes
these fixing accessories have many applications within a wide range
of industries.
Features and Benefits
• Ideal mount for space-saving applications with restricted access
• Arrowhead for very secure fixing
TM1SF Fixing Base for pre-drilled or pre-punched holes.
TM1SF Fixing Base
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Panel
Thickness
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
TM1SF
10.2
15.8
4.6
4.6
6.35
3.4 - 3.3
5.0
PA66
White (WH)
151-40119
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Arrowhead Cradle
• SFC
Offering simple and easy methods of securing cables or pipes
these fixing accessories have many applications within a wide range
of industries.
Features and Benefits
• Arrowhead fixing for use in pre-drilled or punched holes
• SFC and SFC2 for ties up to 5.3 mm wide
• SFC3 for ties up to 8.6 mm wide
Securely fix and route cables and pipes with SFC3.
SFC
SFC2
SFC3
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Panel
Thickness
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
SFC2
6.0
14.5
6.0
0.8 - 1.0
5.3
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-02000
SFC
11.0
18.0
6.0
3.0 - 3.2
5.3
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-01600
22.0
15.5
6.3
0.8 - 1.8
8.6
PA66
Black (BK)
151-01906
22.0
15.5
6.3
0.8 - 1.8
8.6
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-01909
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
SFC3
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a87
87
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8
Fixing Elements
Fixing Elements for Corrugated Tubing, with Fir Tree
• CTC-Series
CTC clamps are used in the automotive, harness making and
electrical industries and wherever corrugated tubing has to be
quickly and firmly fixed.
Features and Benefits
• Available for a variety of nominal diameters
• Fir tree foot part can be used for a variety of panel thicknesses
• Suitable for use within threaded holes
• Tube is guided accurately, clipping into place
• Movement is prevented by the inside profile of the clamp
The tubing clips into the CTC clamp and is held firmly.
Material specification
please see page 22.
CTC10FT6LG
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Nominal
Ø
Disc
Ø
Hole Ø
(FH)
Panel
Thickness
Material
Colour
Article-No.
CTC7.5FT6LG
8.0
18.6
11.1
7.5
16.0
6.5 - 7.0
0.8 - 6.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
151-14313
CTC7.5FT9
8.0
19.9
12.2
7.5
23.0
8.7 - 9.0
3.0 - 5.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
155-31602
CTC10FT6LG
8.0
21.4
11.1
10.0
16.0
6.5 - 7.0
0.8 - 6.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
151-00018
CTC10FT9
8.0
22.7
12.2
10.0
23.0
8.7 - 9.0
3.0 - 5.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
155-17801
CTC13FT6
8.0
25.2
7.5
13.0
16.0
6.5 - 7.0
0.8 - 3.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
151-14312
CTC13FT6LG
8.0
25.2
11.1
13.0
16.0
6.5 - 7.0
0.8 - 6.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
151-00019
TYPE
CTC22FT9
8.0
37.7
12.2
22.0
23.0
8.7 - 9.0
3.0 - 5.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
155-25201
CTC4.5FT6LG
10.0
16.1
11.1
4.5
16.0
6.5 - 7.0
0.8 - 6.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
151-14314
88
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a88
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8
Fixing Elements
Fixing Elements for Weld Studs
• SB-Series
Many industries (but specifically the automotive market) use ‚weld
studs‘ as the standard method of attaching components. Simply
hammered onto the stud, these parts provide ideal fixing bases for
attaching cables, pipes or hoses. The use of weld studs avoids the
problems associated with ‚holes‘ (ingress of moisture, corrosion etc).
Features and Benefits
• Simple and quick method of fixing
• SBH types simply hammered onto the stud
• SBH1 and SBH3 allow cables to run across the panel
• SBH2 allow cables to run at 90° to the panel
Material specification
please see page 22.
SBH1, SBH3
Cable tie base SBH1,3
SBH1, SBH3
SBH2
Cable tie base SBH2
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Length
(L2)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Stud
Ø
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
SBH1
12.5
26.8
9.0
13.9
15.9
5.0
8.5
PA66
Black (BK)
151-26150
SBH2
12.5
26.8
9.0
14.0
12.5
5.0
8.5
PA66
Black (BK)
151-26250
SBH3
12.5
26.8
9.0
18.0
15.9
5.0
8.5
PA66
Black (BK)
150-18900
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a89
89
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8
Fixing Elements
Fixing Base
• LOK-Series
The LOK mounts, in conjunction with a cable tie, can be used either
indoors or outdoors for a diverse range of applications from holding
climbing plants, to securing cables running between buildings.
Features and Benefits
• LOK01 - LOK05 usable with any cable ties up to 9 mm wide
• Suitable for wide range of materials, including concrete, brick,
block and wood
• Installed by knocking into 7 mm or 8 mm diameter hole
• LOK01B is designed for soft brickwork and 6 mm holes
• Elongated head of LOK05 for setting bundles at a distance
from brickwork
LOK01, LOK01B, LOK01S fixing bases.
The LOK fixing bases can
ideally be combined with
the PE-, RPE-, and LPH-cable
ties, see pages and . 48 - 50.
LOK01, LOK01B, LOK01S Fixing Base
LOK05 Fixing Base
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Length
(L2)
Length
(L3)
ØD
Strap Width
max. (G)
LOK01B
12.0
30.0
6.5
2.5
7.2
9.0
6.0
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
151-80500
LOK01S
12.0
34.0
6.5
2.5
9.2
9.0
7.0 - 8.0
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
151-80600
LOK01
12.0
44.0
6.5
2.5
9.2
9.0
7.0 - 8.0
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
151-80110
LOK05
12.0
49.0
12.5
2.5
9.2
9.0
7.0 - 8.0
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
151-80700
TYPE
Hole Ø
(FH)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
90
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a90
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.8
Fixing Elements
Fixing Base
• LOK04
LOK04
LOK04 - for parallel routing.
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L3)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
LOK04
16.0
4.0
9.0
PA66
Black (BK)
151-80400
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
• LOK02
Material specification
please see page 22.
LOK02 Fixing Base
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
LOK02
14.0
21.0
18.0
5.1
9.0
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
151-80210
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Plastic Nuts
• KM
KM plastic nuts can be used in virtually all applications where metal
nuts may have been used. Offering benefits in speed of application,
weight saving and corrosion resistance they also offer a secure
fixing when subject to vibration. Typical applications can be found
in a wide variety of industries from automotive to white goods
(domestic appliances).
Date of issue: January 2014
Features and Benefits
• Faster assembly than traditional metal hexagonal nuts
• Simply pushed onto bolt by hand
• Easily opened at any time using a standard spanner
• Available for both 5 mm and 6 mm ISO threaded bolts
Plastic Nuts KM5, 6
TYPE
ØD
Height
(H)
Nut Size
(NS)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
KM5
17.5
9.5
10.0
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
150-51910
KM6
17.5
9.6
10.0
PA66
Black (BK)
150-61910
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a91
91
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Self Adhesive / Screw Clips
• TY8H1(S) with flat design
Ideal for holding ribbon cables in computer equipment, gaming
machines or domestic appliances.
Features and Benefits
• Designed to hold cables, tubes or conduits without cable tie
• Simply screwed or stuck (TY8H1S) onto panel
• Side gripping fingers exert firm hold but allow for easy cable removal
Fixing clip TY8H1(S) - screw fix or
self adhesive.
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
Fixing clip TY8H1(S)
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Bundle
Ø max.
Adhesive
Material
Colour
Article-No.
TY8H1
23.0
26.0
6.5
3.2
3.0
-
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-22819
TY8H1S
23.0
26.0
6.5
3.2
3.0
Acrylate
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-12819
92
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a92
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Self Adhesive Clips
These clips are ideal for use in applications which are difficult to
access, or for areas where self adhesive is the only possible fixing
method (for example where fixing ‚holes‘ would be unacceptable).
Features and Benefits
• One-piece self-adhesive fixing clips for quick and easy installation
• Designed to hold wires, cables or hoses without cable tie
• Different sizes for various bundle diameters
One piece fixing clips Type RA quick and easy installation.
• RA-Series with round design
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
RA3-18 Self Adhesve Clip
TYPE
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Bundle
Ø max.
Adhesive
Material
Colour
Article-No.
RA3
13.0
5.0
13.0
5.0
3.0
Synthetic rubber
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-13018
RA6
19.0
5.0
19.0
9.0
6.0
Synthetic rubber
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-13019
RA9
19.0
7.5
19.0
12.5
9.0
Synthetic rubber
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-13020
RA13
25.0
10.0
25.0
16.5
13.0
Synthetic rubber
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-13021
RA18
28.5
10.0
28.5
23.0
18.0
Synthetic rubber
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-13119
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
• RB-Series with flat design
Material specification
please see page 22.
RB5-14 Self Adhesive Clip
TYPE
RB5
RB8
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
19.0
9.7
19.0
6.0
5.0
19.0
9.7
19.0
6.0
5.0
25.0
12.7
25.0
11.5
8.0
25.0
12.7
25.0
11.5
8.0
Colour
Adhesive
Article-No.
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
151-14000
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
151-14059
PA66
Black (BK)
Synthetic rubber
151-13601
PA66
Natural (NA)
Synthetic rubber
151-13606
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a93
93
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Self Adhesive Clips
• SAC with flexible flat design
These clips are ideal for use in applications which are difficult to
access, or for areas where self adhesive is the only possible fixing
method (for example 'holes' would be unacceptable). Typically
applications include domestic appliances and trailers.
Features and Benefits
• Bendable metal ‚tongue‘ for any shape or configuration of wires
or cables
• Cost effective with easy application on smooth, clean surfaces
Malleable tongue allows for a variety
of sizes per clip.
Material specification
please see page 22.
SAC-Series Self Adhesive Clip
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Bundle
Ø max.
Adhesive
Material
Colour
Article-No.
SAC0
15.0
20.0
3.0
Acrylate
ST
White (WH)
151-00033
SAC1
20.0
30.0
4.0
Acrylate
ST
White (WH)
151-00100
SAC2
25.0
35.0
8.0
Acrylate
ST
White (WH)
151-00200
SAC3
31.0
43.0
12.0
Acrylate
ST
White (WH)
151-00300
SAC4
38.0
51.0
16.0
Acrylate
ST
White (WH)
151-00400
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
• 130100 for Flat Ribbon Cables
Features and Benefits
• Self-adhesive clip with integrated clamp for holding flat cables
• Manufactured from PVC
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Adhesive
Material
Colour
Article-No.
130100
25.0
25.0
9.1
Acrylate
PVC
White (WH)
154-01119
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
94
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a94
Date of issue: January 2014
130100 Self Adhesive Clip
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Flat Ribbon Cables Self Adhesive / Screw Fixing
• FKH-Series
These clips are ideal for use in applications which are difficult to
access, or for areas where self adhesive is the only possible fixing
method (for example 'holes' would be unacceptable). The FKH clips
are designed to retain flat ribbon cables - ideal for use in computer
equipment, gaming machines and domestic appliances. Available in
self-adhesive mount or screw mount.
Features and Benefits
• One-piece fixing clips for flat ribbon cables
• Quick and easy installation
• Easily releasable and re-usable
Based on extremely soft wings any flat cable is gently fastened.
For more information on the types
of adhesive please see page 73.
The flat ribbon cables are available in 4 different sizes.
Date of issue: January 2014
Fixation can be realised with M3 screws or acrylic adhesive backing
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Width
(W2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Adhesive
Material
Colour
Article-No.
FKH25
25.0
31.0
22.0
3.1
-
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-16250
FKH25A
25.0
31.0
22.0
3.1
Acrylate
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-15250
FKH30
25.0
35.0
22.0
3.1
-
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-16300
FKH30A
25.0
35.0
22.0
3.1
Acrylate
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-15300
FKH50
25.0
56.5
22.0
3.1
-
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-16500
FKH50A
25.0
56.5
22.0
3.1
Acrylate
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-15500
FKH80
25.0
86.0
22.0
3.1
-
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-16800
FKH80A
25.0
86.0
22.0
3.1
Acrylate
PA66HIR
Black (BK)
151-15800
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a95
95
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Wire Push In Clips
• WPC
With the increased complexity of electronic and electrical installations
the use of the WPC clips enable cables to be installed using the
minimum amount of space. Typical applications can be seen in the
frames/rails of control cabinets.
Features and Benefits
• Accepts single or multiple wires
• Simply push wires into place
• Self-locking to prevent accidental removal
• Arrowhead design for simple and secure installation
• Access to panel from one side
WPC - Wire Push In Clip.
WPC Wire Push In Clip
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Panel
Thickness
Material
Colour
Article-No.
WPC5
5.3
15.0
12.7
4.7
0.8 - 4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-75059
WPC10
5.3
15.0
17.7
4.7
0.8 - 4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-75109
WPC15
5.3
15.0
22.7
4.7
0.8 - 4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-75159
WPC20
5.3
15.0
27.7
4.7
0.8 - 4.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
151-75209
96
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a96
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Plastic Rivets
• TY
These simple to use plastic rivets are ideal for improving productivity
in the working environment, saving time and money over more
conventional jointing methods. Ideal for joining panels, or
components to panels in a wide range of industries from automotive
to panel building.
Features and Benefits
• One Piece
• Simply push pin into body of rivet
• TY3P1 and TY8P1 pins inserted using rivet placement tool
• TY8P2 has 'mushroom' head so pin is simply hammered in
• TY8P2 consists of two unattached parts
Plastic Rivets TY8P1.
Material specification
please see page 22.
Plastic Rivets TY3P1/8P1
Plastic Rivets TY8P2
TYPE
TY3P1
TY8P1
TY8P2
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Height
(H3)
ØD
Ø
D2
Ø
D3
Ø
D4
Material
Colour
7.5
6.0
5.3
6.0
3.0
1.7
-
PA66
Natural (NA)
241-11319
7.5
6.0
5.3
6.0
3.0
1.7
-
PA66
Black (BK)
241-11310
10.0
8.0
7.5
8.0
4.0
2.6
-
PA66
Black (BK)
241-11810
10.0
8.0
7.5
8.0
4.0
2.6
-
PA66
Natural (NA)
241-11819
10.0
8.0
11.5
8.0
4.0
2.6
8.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
241-11829
10.0
8.0
11.5
8.0
4.0
2.6
8.0
PA66
Black (BK)
241-11820
Article-No.
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a97
97
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Aluminium P-Clips
• ALU-P-Clip with / without chloroprene Insert
Manufactured from a high quality aluminium these P-Clips provide
flexibility and yet give a permanent fixing in the most arduous of
environments. The addition of a Chloroprene insert provides the
cable or pipe bundle with a high degree of protection against
vibration, reduces noise and also offers electrical isolation.
Features and Benefits
• Simple, secure pipe or cable fixing (e. g. caravan construction)
• Combine with chloprene insert for vibration resistance (e. g. retain
capacitors on PCB)
• Ideal for use in high temperatures
• Suitable for applications needing strength of metal components
Material specification
please see page 22.
L2
L2
Aluminium P Clips
P-Clips manufactured in polyamide, aluminium or aluminium with a
chloroprene insert.
Aluminium P Clips with a
Chloroprene insert
TYPE
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Wall
(WT)
Wall
(WT2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Bundle
Ø max.
Fixing Hole
Centres
(F2)
Radius
(R)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
ALU4
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
6.4
11.6
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10040
ALU5
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
8.0
12.6
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10050
ALU6
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
9.5
13.4
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10060
ALU7
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
11.1
14.2
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10070
ALU8
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
12.7
15.0
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10080
ALU10
12.7
-
0.80
-
5.2
15.9
16.6
1.6
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10100
ALU11
12.7
-
1.30
-
5.2
17.5
19.1
2.8
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10110
ALU12
12.7
-
1.30
-
5.2
19.1
19.9
2.8
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10120
ALU13
12.7
-
1.30
-
5.2
20.6
20.7
2.8
AL
Natural (NA)
211-10130
ALU4C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
3.2
11.6
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15040
ALU5C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
4.8
12.6
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15050
ALU6C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
6.4
13.4
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15060
ALU7C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
8.0
14.2
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15070
ALU8C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
9.5
15.0
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15080
ALU9C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
11.1
15.8
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15090
ALU10C
16.3
12.7
3.70
0.8
5.2
12.7
16.6
1.6
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15100
98
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a98
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Aluminium P-Clips
• ALU-P-Clip with / without chloroprene Insert
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Wall
(WT)
Wall
(WT2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Bundle
Ø max.
Fixing Hole
Centres
(F2)
Radius
(R)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
ALU11C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
14.3
19.1
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15110
ALU12C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
15.9
19.9
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15120
ALU13C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
17.5
20.7
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15130
ALU14C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
19.1
21.5
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15140
ALU15C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
20.6
22.3
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15150
ALU16C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
22.2
23.1
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15160
ALU17C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
23.8
23.9
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15170
ALU18C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
25.4
24.6
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15180
ALU19C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.3
5.2
27.0
25.5
2.8
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15190
ALU20C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
28.6
27.0
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15200
ALU22C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
31.8
28.6
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15220
ALU23C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
33.3
29.4
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15230
ALU25C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
36.5
30.8
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15250
ALU26C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
38.1
31.7
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15260
ALU28C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
41.3
33.3
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15280
ALU29C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
42.9
34.1
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15290
ALU30C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
44.5
34.9
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15300
ALU34C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
50.8
38.1
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15340
ALU24C
16.3
12.7
4.50
1.6
5.2
34.9
30.2
3.2
AL, CR
Black (BK)
211-15240
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a99
99
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Plastic P-Clips
• HP-Series
For permanent or semi-permanent cable fixings, this range of P-Clips
can be used in a variety of industries. Their light weight makes
them particularly suitable for use in the aerospace industry where
minimising weight, but retaining a strong fixing is vitally important.
Features and Benefits
• Manufactured from Polyamide
• Good temperature resistance and high strength
• Wide range of sizes for every application
P-Clip HP.
TYPE
H1P
H2P
H3P
H4P
H5P
H6P
H7P
H8P
H9P
H10P
Width
(W)
Wall
(WT)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Bundle
Ø max.
Fixing Hole
Centres (F)
Radius
(R)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
10.0
0.80
4.2
3.2
8.5
0.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60019
10.0
0.80
4.2
3.2
8.5
0.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60000
10.0
1.00
4.2
5.0
9.5
1.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60029
10.0
1.00
4.2
5.0
9.5
1.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60001
10.0
1.00
4.2
6.5
10.0
1.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60039
10.0
1.00
4.2
6.5
10.0
1.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60002
10.0
1.20
4.2
8.0
10.0
1.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60049
10.0
1.20
4.2
8.0
10.0
1.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60003
10.0
1.20
4.2
9.5
11.0
1.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60059
10.0
1.20
4.2
9.5
11.0
1.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60004
10.0
1.20
4.2
11.0
13.0
1.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60069
10.0
1.20
4.2
11.0
13.0
1.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60005
10.0
1.20
4.2
12.5
14.0
1.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60079
10.0
1.20
4.2
12.5
14.0
1.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60006
10.0
1.50
4.2
14.0
15.0
1.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60089
10.0
1.50
4.2
14.0
15.0
1.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60007
10.0
1.50
4.2
16.0
16.0
1.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60099
10.0
1.50
4.2
16.0
16.0
1.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60008
10.0
1.50
4.2
17.5
17.0
1.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60109
10.0
1.50
4.2
17.5
17.0
1.5
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60009
10.0
1.50
4.2
19.0
18.0
2.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60119
10.0
1.50
4.2
19.0
18.0
2.0
PA66HS
Black (BK)
211-60120
H12P
10.0
1.50
4.2
20.5
19.0
2.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60129
H13P
12.0
1.50
5.2
22.0
20.5
2.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60139
H14P
12.0
1.50
5.2
24.0
21.5
2.0
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60149
H15P
12.0
1.50
5.2
25.5
23.0
2.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60159
H16P
12.0
1.50
5.2
28.5
24.0
2.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60169
H17P
12.0
1.50
5.2
31.5
26.0
2.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60179
H18P
12.0
1.50
5.2
35.0
27.5
2.5
PA66
Natural (NA)
211-60189
H11P
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
100
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a100
Date of issue: January 2014
P-Clip H1P - H18P
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Clips with elasticated loop
• Cradle Clip
Features and Benefits
• 2-piece fixing part
• Suitable for pre-assembly and prototyping
• Useful for applications requiring addition or removal of cables
• Simply stretch loop over clip for simple and quick cable containment
C3-N66-BK.
Cradle Clip C1 - 3
TYPE
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Radius
(R)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
12.7
25.0
14.0
6.3
4.8
PA66
Black (BK)
201-10010
C1
C2
12.7
35.0
18.0
11.0
4.8
PA66
Black (BK)
201-10020
C3
12.7
48.0
25.0
17.5
4.8
PA66
Black (BK)
201-10030
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Material specification
please see page 22.
Retaining Ring R1 - 3
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Length
(L2)
Height
(H)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
R1
23.8
16.0
22.0
3.2
PVC
Black (BK)
201-20010
R2
23.8
22.0
29.0
3.2
PVC
Black (BK)
201-20020
R3
23.8
33.0
39.0
3.2
PVC
Black (BK)
201-20030
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a101
101
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Strain Relief Clips
• Klam-Klip (KK)
Features and Benefits
• Simple 1-screw fixing to guide and secure leads
• Two halves of the clip are linked to ensure no loss of parts during
re-wiring
• Anti-rotation pin prevents leads from twisting
Material specification
please see page 22.
Klam-Klip KK1-4.
Klam-Klip Cable Restraints
Klam-Klip KK1 - 4.
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Hole Ø
(FH)
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Material
Colour
Article-No.
KK1
8.8
22.0
14.0
3.5
5.0
4.5
5.7
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
234-10100
KK2
8.8
22.0
14.0
3.5
5.0
5.5
6.7
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
234-10200
KK3
8.8
22.0
14.0
3.5
5.0
6.5
7.7
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
234-10300
KK4
8.8
22.0
14.0
3.5
5.0
7.5
8.5
PA6HIR
Black (BK)
234-10400
TYPE
102
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a102
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Ties and Fixings
1.9
Clips, Clamps and Plugs
Maintenance Kit
• BMS-100
Ideal for use by electrical installers, maintenance engineers
or laboratories.
Features and Benefits
• Practical 195-piece kit with snapper hose clips, aluminium and
plastic P-Clips
• Variety of cable tie mounting bases and self adhesive clips
195-piece fixings kit, BMS-100.
Description
Type
Content
Article-No.
Maintenance Kit
BMS-100
-
151-00000
Aluminium P-Clips
ALU8C
5
211-15080
98
C1
8
201-10010
101
Clips with elasicticated loop
Page
R2
8
201-20020
101
Plastic P-Clips
H8P
7
211-60007
100
Rivet Mount
TY5K2
10
152-11209
-
CL8
10
151-26860
84
CTAM2
40
151-31203
82
KR6G5
20
151-24660
81
LKC
10
151-27019
80
MB3A
10
151-28349
73
Screw Fixing Mounts
Self Adhesive, Screw Fixing Cable Tie Mounts
MB4CA
7
151-28459
75
TY8G1S
10
151-11819
76
Self Adhesive / Screw Clips
TY8H1S
10
151-12819
92
Self Adhesive Clips
RA13
5
151-13021
93
Snapper Hose Clips for Tubes and Harnesses
SNP10(E)
10
191-10100
-
Strain Relief Clips
KK2
10
234-10200
102
Wire Push In Clips
WPC15
15
151-75159
96
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a103
103
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Insulation
2
2.1 Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Thin walled with adhesive liner
Product Selection
ShrinKit 321-A Basic, 3:1, adhesive lined cut pieces in compact kit
136
Size Overview
108
Shrinkit 321-A, 3:1, cut pieces in large size reusable kit
137
Heatshrinkable Tubing Overview
110
HIS-A, 3:1, tubing in dispenser pack
138
Thin walled
TA32, 3:1, 1.2 m lenghts
139
LVR, 2:1, PVC
112
TA42, 4:1, 1.2 m lenghts
139
TCN20, 2:1, self extinguishing
113
Medium walled
TCN20 overexpanded, 3:1, self extinguishing
114
MU47, 4:1, 1 m lenghts
ShrinKit 321 Basic - black, 3:1, cut pieces in compact kit
116
Medium walled with adhesive liner
ShrinKit 321 Universal Basic, 3:1, coloured pieces in compact kit
117
TREDUX MA47, 4:1, 1 m lenghts
142
ShrinKit 321 Universal, 3:1,
coloured pieces in large size reusable kit
MA47, 4:1, 1 m lenghts
140
118
RMS, Cable Repair Sleeves
143
TREDUX-Display
119
Thick walled
TREDUX, 1 m lengths
120
HU47, 3:1, 1 m lenghts
HIS Service Station, bundles
122
Thick walled with adhesive liner
HIS-PACK, 2:1, mini-reel in dispenser pack
122
TREDUX HA47, 3,5:1, 1 m lengths
144
HIS-3, 3:1, mini-reel in dispenser pack
124
HA47, 3,5:1, 1 m lenghts
145
HIS-3 BAG, 3:1, pre-cut pieces in blister bag
126
HA67, 6:1, 1.2 m length
147
TF21, 2:1, flexible and coloured
128
TF24, 2:1, flexible and transparent; VG
131
TF31, 3:1, flexible and coloured
132
TF34, 3:1, flexible and transparent, VG
135
145
Date of issue: January 2014
106
140
2
Insulation
2.2 Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Special Moulded Shapes Catalogue
2.3 Non Shrinkable Tubing
148
Material Information
Rubber Tubing, Chloroprene
Helsyn H
157
Material Specifications
149
HS - tubing
158
Adhesive Specifications
149
HT - grommets
158
Product Selection
Rubber Tubing, Silicone
Bulbous Boots Product Overview
150
Bulbous Boots and Transitions
Helsyn SLP
160
Installation aid for tubing and grommets
2-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 200 Series,
in line, low voltage
151
Hellerine
3-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 300 Series,
in line, low voltage
151
4-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 400 Series,
in line, low voltage
152
5-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 500 Series,
in line, low voltage
152
6-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 600 Series,
in line, low voltage
153
Helashrink PEC Series,
pinched
154
Helashrink
1600 Series
155
161
End Caps
Low voltage
Adhesives for Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Date of issue: January 2014
Hot Melt Tape
HMT200A
156
107
Insulation
2.1
Product Selection
Overview of applications for Heat Shrink Tubing
When selecting the correct heat shrink tubing size, it is important
to bear in mind the 80:20 rule. The heat shrink tubing must shrink
by at least 20% and not more than 80% of its complete shrinkage
capacity to achieve the right result. In our overview of applications
you will find the best heat shrink tube for every cable diameter. The
80:20 rule has of course been taken into account in the table.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing with a shrink ratio of 2:1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing with a shrinkage ratio of 3:1
HIS-Pack, LVR, TF21, TF24, TCN20, TREDUX
With the optimal shrinkage ratio of 3:1, you can cover a wide range
of applications with just a few sizes. This leads to reduced stock
expenditure and requires less space. 3:1 heat shrink tubes: HIS-3,
HIS-A, TREDUX, TF34, TF31, TCN20 overexpanded; HIS-3 BAG,
ShrinKits 321,TA32
Shrink ratio 2:1
Size mm
Cable/Wire Diameter
0.7 mm
1.2/0.6
Shrink ratio 3:1
Size mm
0.7 mm
1.5/0.5
1.1 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
2.4/1.2
2.2 mm
2.8 mm
5.2 mm
3.8 mm
5.6 mm
4.3 mm
6.4/3.2
12/4
5.7 mm
11.2 mm
7.7 mm
12.7/6.4
15.6 mm
24/8
8.6 mm
11.4 mm
19.1/9.5
8.4 mm
10.4 mm
18/6
5.8 mm
9.5/4.7
25.4/12.7
2.6 mm
6/2
2.9 mm
4.8/2.4
1.4 mm
3/1
1.9 mm
3.2/1.6
Cable/Wire Diameter
18.4 mm
40/13
20.8 mm
15.2 mm
34.6 mm
17.2 mm
22.9 mm
38.1/19.1
50.8/25.4
30.5 mm
34.3 mm
45.7 mm
76.2/38.1
101.6/50.8
61.0 mm
68.6 mm
91.4 mm
Inch
108
1/32“
3/64“
1/16“
5/64“
3/32“
1/8“
3/16“
1/4“
3/8“
mm
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
3.2
4.8
6.4
9.5
Inch
1/2“
5/8“
3/4“
1“
1 1/4“
1 1/2“
2“
3“
4“
mm
12.7
15.9
19.1
25.4
31.8
38.1
50.8
76.2
101.6
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a108
Date of issue: January 2014
Conversion from imperial to metric
Insulation
2.1
Product Selection
The right Heat Shrink Tube
The 80:20 rule means that a heat shrink tube should shrink by a
maximum of 80% and a minimum of 20%.
For example:
A cable with a diameter of 5mm is to be wrapped in heat shrink
tubing. In theory both sizes 6/2 and 12/4 would be suitable, since
the required diameter of 5mm lies within the shrink range of both
tube sizes.
Size 12/4
Size 6/2
Maximum shrink (100%)
Maximum shrink (100%)
Maximum shrinkage = 4 mm
Maximum shrinkage = 8 mm
Optimum shrinkage max. (80%)
Optimum shrinkage max. (80%)
Shrinkage of 3.2 mm
Shrinkage of 6.4 mm
Optimum shrinkage min. (20%)
Optimum shrinkage min. (20%)
Shrinkage of 0.8 mm
Shrinkage of 1.6 mm
Size 6/2 has a range of application of between 2.8mm and 5.2mm
and is therefore suitable for the cable diameter of 5mm.
The smallest application diameter of size 12/4 is 5.6mm. This size is
therefore unsuitable for a cable diameter of 5mm.
Calculator tool for Heat Shrink Tubing
The calculator tool for heat shrink tubing is a selection guide for shrink tubing sizes based on the object to be covered.
Fill in your specification and the calculator presents the right tubing size according to the 80:20 rule. Find more information under
http://www.hellermanntyton.co.uk/heatshrink-calculator!
Date of issue: January 2014
The calculator tool also checks if the heat shrink tubing you have chosen is suitable for your application. For example you can find the
heat shrink tubing with the Product Search on the HellermannTyton website.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a109
109
Insulation
2.1
Product Selection
Heatshrinkable Tubing Overview
Material
Shrink
Operating Dimension HalogenRatio Temperature
(mm)
free
Page
PVC
2:1
-30 °C to
+105 °C
2.4 - 25.4
Black
11, 12
112
TCN20
PO-X
2:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
1.2 - 50.8
Black
2. 11, 12
113
TCN20
overexpanded
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
2.4 - 38.0
Black
2, 11, 12
114
TREDUX
PO-X
2:1, 3:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.5 - 101.6
Black (BK),
Green-Yellow
2, 10, 11,
12
120
2:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
1.2 - 25.4
Black (BK),
Blue (BU),
Green-Yellow
10, 11, 12
(GNYE), Red (RD),
Transparent
122
3:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.5 - 24.0
Black (BK), Blue
(BU), Green-Yellow 2, 10, 11,
(GNYE), Red (RD),
12
Transparent
124
1.5 - 12.0
Black (BK),
Blue (BU), Brown
(BN), Green-Yellow
10, 11, 12
(GNYE), Grey
(GY), Red (RD),
Transparent
126
Black (BK),
Blue (BU),
Green-Yellow
2, 6, 9,
(GNYE), Red (RD), 10, 11, 12
White (WH),
Yellow
128
HIS-3
PO-X
PO-X
Thin-Wall
HIS-3 BAG
110
Specification
LVR
HIS-Pack
Thin-Wall
Hot melt
adhesive
Colour
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
TF21
PO-X
2:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.2 - 101.6
TF24
PO-X
2:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.2 - 101.6
Transparent
3, 10, 13
131
2, 11, 12
132
TF31
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.5 - 40.0
Black (BK),
Blue (BU),
Green (GN),
Green-Yellow
(GNYE), Red (RD),
White (WH),
Yellow
TF34
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+135 °C
1.5 - 40.0
Transparent
HIS-A
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
3.0 - 24.0
Black (BK), Transparent
2, 10
138
TA32
PO-X
3:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
3.2 - 40.0
Black
2, 10, 11,
12
139
TA42
PO-X
4:1
-55 °C to
+125 °C
4.0 - 52.0
Black
10, 11, 12
139
135
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a110
Date of issue: January 2014
Type
Insulation
2.1
Product Selection
Heatshrinkable Tubing Overview
Medium-Wall
Medium-Wall
Hot melt
adhesive
Thick-Wall
Thick-Wall
Hot melt
adhesive
Shrink
Operating Dimension HalogenRatio Temperature
(mm)
free
Specification
Type
Material
MU47
PO-X
up to 4:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
12.0 - 140.0
Black
140
MA47
PO-X
up to 4:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
12.0 - 140.0
Black
140
TREDUX
MA47
PO-X
up to 4:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
12.0 - 95.0
Black
142
RMS
PO-X
up to
4.5:1
-40 °C to
+120 °C
43 - 185
Black
143
HU47
PO-X
up to
3.5:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
9.0 - 180.0
Black
145
TREDUX
HA47
PO-X
up to
3.5:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
13.0 - 85.0
Black
144
HA47
PO-X
up to
3.5:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
9.0 - 180.0
Black
145
HA67
PO-X
6:1
-55 °C to
+110 °C
19.0 - 235.0
Black
147
Colour
Page
Specification
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
7
Date of issue: January 2014
Please refer to the Approvals Overview
for further information, see page: 330, 331
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a111
111
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 - PVC
• LVR
LVR can be used for cable joints, low voltage bus bars and batteries.
Features and Benefits
• PVC heat shrinkable tubing
• Self-extinguishing
• Good chemical resistance and mechanical protection
LVR used for mechanical protection.
MATERIAL
Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride, cadmium
free (PVC)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +105 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+135 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-10% max
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to IEC 243
Shelf life
12 Months max.
Stocking Temperature
+25 °C max.
Flammability
ASTM D2671
Specifications
UL224 105 °C 600V
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
LVR-2.4/1.2
2.4
1.2
0.40
250 m
Black (BK)
344-00240
LVR-3.2/1.6
3.2
1.6
0.40
250 m
Black (BK)
344-00320
LVR-4.8/2.4
4.8
2.4
0.50
250 m
Black (BK)
344-00480
LVR-6.4/3.2
6.4
3.2
0.60
250 m
Black (BK)
344-00640
LVR-9.5/4.8
9.5
4.8
0.60
125 m
Black (BK)
344-00950
LVR-12.7/6.4
12.7
6.4
0.70
75 m
Black (BK)
344-01270
LVR-19.1/9.5
19.0
9.5
0.80
100 m
Black (BK)
344-01900
LVR-25.4/12.7
25.4
12.7
1.00
100 m
Black (BK)
344-02540
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
112
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a112
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Low-Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
• TCN20 - self extinguishing
TCN20 is suitable for a wide range of applications such as electrical
insulation, mechanical protection and cable bundling.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled general purpose polyolefin tubing
• Highly flame-retardant, UL224 VW-1 , CSA
• Fast shrinking
• Low shrink temperature
Heat Shrink Tubing TCN20.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +125 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5%
Dielectric Strength
20kV/mm according to ASTM D2671
Flammability
Self extinguishing
Specifications
CSA, UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
TYPE
TCN20-1.2/0.6
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
1.2
0.6
0.30
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73010
TCN20-1.6/0.8
1.6
0.8
0.35
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73020
TCN20-2.4/1.2
2.4
1.2
0.45
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73030
TCN20-3.2/1.6
3.2
1.6
0.45
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73040
TCN20-4.8/2.4
4.8
2.4
0.50
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73050
TCN20-6.4/3.2
6.4
3.2
0.55
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73060
TCN20-9.5/4.8
9.5
4.8
0.55
100 m
Black (BK)
300-73070
TCN20-12.7/6.4
12.7
6.4
0.65
100 m
Black (BK)
300-73080
TCN20-19.1/9.5
19.1
9.5
0.80
60 m
Black (BK)
300-73090
TCN20-25.4/12.7
25.4
12.7
0.90
60 m
Black (BK)
300-73100
TCN20-38.1/19.1
38.1
19.1
1.02
30 m
Black (BK)
300-73110
TCN20-50.8/25.4
50.8
25.4
1.15
30 m
Black (BK)
300-73120
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a113
113
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 - Self extinguishing
• TCN20 overexpanded
Mechanical, electrical and corrosion protection applications for parts
with high diameter variances. This fast shrinking tubing makes it
suitable for high volume production.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled overexpanded polyolefin tubing
• Inch size tubing with 3:1 shrink ratio
• Very fast shrinking and low shrink temperature
• Highly flame-retardant, UL224 VW-1
Heat shrink tubing TCN20 overexpanded.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +125 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5%
Dielectric Strength
20kV/mm according to ASTM D2671
Flammability
Self extinguishing
Specifications
CSA, UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
Due to its thin wall TCN20 overexpanded is suitable for insulation of antennas.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
TCN20-2.4/0.8
2.4
0.8
0.40
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73130
TCN20-3.2/1.2
3.2
1.2
0.50
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73140
TCN20-4.8/1.6
4.8
1.6
0.50
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73150
TCN20-6.6/2.4
6.6
2.4
0.55
300 m
Black (BK)
300-73160
TCN20-9.5/3.2
9.5
3.2
0.65
100 m
Black (BK)
300-73170
TCN20-12.7/4.8
12.7
4.8
0.75
100 m
Black (BK)
300-73180
TCN20-19.0/6.4
19.0
6.4
0.75
60 m
Black (BK)
300-73190
TCN20-25.4/9.5
25.4
9.5
0.79
60 m
Black (BK)
300-73200
TCN20-38.0/12.7
38.0
12.7
0.95
30 m
Black (BK)
300-73210
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
114
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a114
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Ideal for all on site installations:
Our ShrinKit 321 family!
ShrinKit 321 Universal Basic.
Page 117
Date of issue: January 2014
ShrinKit 321-A Basic. Page 137
ShrinKit 321-A. Page 136
ShrinKit 321 Universal.
Page 118
ShrinKit 321 Basic. Page 116
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in a Kit
• ShrinKit 321 Basic - black
The compact and handy kit belongs to the basic equipment for
every assembler. Its ideal shrink ratio of 3:1 replaces many differently
sized tubing.
Features and Benefits
• Compact and handy kit
• Black tubing
• Application range from 1mm to 16 mm
• 220 precut pieces in five sizes
ShrinKit 321 Basic.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+90 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+5%/-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 2671
Flammability
Self extinguishing
Insulation Class
B (VDE 0530)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
COMP.
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
Colour
Content
(pcs.)
1
1.5
0.5
35.0
0.45
Black (BK)
50
2
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
30
3
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
Black (BK)
25
4
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
15
5
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
15
6
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
Black (BK)
25
7
8
1.5
0.5
35.0
0.45
Black (BK)
50
12.0
4.0
80.0
0.70
Black (BK)
5
18.0
6.0
80.0
0.80
Black (BK)
5
Article-No.
380-03001
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
116
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a116
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in a Kit
• ShrinKit 321 Universal Basic
With ShrinKit 321 HellermannTyton has set a new standard in heat
shrink tubing: ShrinKit tubings cover many applications with their ideal
shrink ratio of 3:1.
Features and Benefits
• Compact and handy kit
• Black and coloured tubing
• Application range from 1 mm up to 16 mm
ShrinKit 321 Universal Basic.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+90 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+5%/-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 2671
Flammability
Self extinguishing
Insulation Class
B (VDE 0530)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
Colour
Content
(pcs.)
12.0
4.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
12
6.0
2.0
80.0
0.70
Blue (BU)
5
6.0
2.0
80.0
0.70
Red (RD)
5
6.0
2.0
80.0
0.70
White (WH)
5
12.0
4.0
80.0
0.70
Black (BK)
2
12.0
4.0
80.0
0.70
Blue (BU)
2
12.0
4.0
80.0
0.70
Red (RD)
2
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Blue (BU)
10
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Red (RD)
10
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
White (WH)
10
4
9.0
3.0
35.0
0.70
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
15
5
9.0
3.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
20
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
Black (BK)
10
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
Blue (BU)
10
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
Red (RD)
10
3.0
1.0
35.0
0.55
White (WH)
10
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Black (BK)
20
6.0
2.0
35.0
0.70
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
10
18.0
6.0
160.0
0.80
Black (BK)
3
18.0
6.0
160.0
0.80
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
3
18.0
6.0
160.0
0.80
White (WH)
3
COMP.
1
2
3
6
7
Date of issue: January 2014
8
Article-No.
380-03005
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a117
117
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in a Kit
• ShrinKit 321 Universal
With ShrinKit 321 HellermannTyton has set a new standard in heat
shrink tubing: ShrinKit tubings cover many applications with their ideal
shrink ratio of 3:1.
Features and Benefits
• Attractive and reusable kit
• Wide range of sizes, colours and lengths
• For insulation, bend protection and identification
• Case can be re-used for storing nails, screws, nuts, fish hooks, etc.
• Size of compartments changeable by simply moving yellow
space dividers
ShrinKit 321 Universal.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+90 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+5%/-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 2671
Flammability
self-extinguishing
(except for transparent)
Insulation Class
B (VDE 0530)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1
(colours), SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5
Class 2 (clear)
COMP.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Supplied Ø D min. Recov. Ø d max.
6.0
12.0
24.0
6.0
3.0
3.0
12.0
12.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
1.5
6.0
6.0
6.0
12.0
12.0
2.0
4.0
8.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.0
4.0
Length (L)
Wall (WT)
Colour
Content (pcs.)
Article-No.
60.0
100.0
200.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
100.0
100.0
50.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
170.0
170.0
0.70
0.70
1.00
0.70
0.55
0.55
0.70
0.70
0.55
0.55
0.55
0.45
0.45
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
Transparent (CL)
Black (BK)
Transparent (CL)
Red (RD)
Red (RD)
Blue (BU)
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
Black (BK)
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
Blue (BU)
Red (RD)
Transparent (CL)
Green/Yellow (GNYE)
Blue (BU)
50
15
10
50
100
100
15
15
100
100
100
75
75
50
50
50
10
10
380-03002
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
118
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a118
Date of issue: January 2014
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Point of Sale Display for TREDUX
• TREDUX-Display
With TREDUX HellermannTyton has set a new standard in heat
shrink tubing.
TREDUX offers a complete range of thin, medium and thick wall
tubing cut into 1 meter length.
All tubing are labled with an EAN barcode securely packed in
display boxes.
They can be removed individually for occasional use in
smaller quantities.
With the practical, valuable metal point of sale display is an optimal
product presentation guaranteed.
The following table is a proposed content for a TREDUX-Display.
Features and Benefits
• Complete range of thin, medium- and thick wall heatshrink
tubing in one display
• All tubings can be sold in single 1 meter length or entire carton
• Pick of single tube possible allowing job specific purchasing
• Optimised stock based on usage based display content
• Holder for end user brochures available attached to display
Content
Proposal
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
The TREDUX display.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
One Step to the Web!
Colour
Article-No.
TREDUX thin wall
TREDUX-1.5/0.5
1
1.5
0.5
0.50
20 pcs.
Black (BK)
319-00150
TREDUX-3/1-GNYE
1
3.0
1.0
0.60
20 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
319-00307
TREDUX-3/1
2
3.0
1.0
0.60
20 pcs.
Black (BK)
319-00300
TREDUX-6/2-GNYE
1
6.0
2.0
0.70
15 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
319-00607
TREDUX-6/2
2
6.0
2.0
0.70
15 pcs.
Black (BK)
319-00600
TREDUX-12/4-GNYE
1
12.0
4.0
0.85
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
319-01207
TREDUX-12/4
4
12.0
4.0
0.85
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
319-01200
TREDUX-24/8
1
24.0
8.0
1.20
5 pcs.
Black (BK)
319-02400
3.0
2.00
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50120
TREDUX MA47 medium wall - with adhesive liner
TREDUX-MA47-12/3
2
12.0
TREDUX-MA47-19/6
1
19.0
6.0
2.50
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50190
TREDUX-MA47-30/8
2
30.0
8.0
2.50
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50300
TREDUX-MA47-40/12
1
40.0
12.0
2.50
4 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50400
TREDUX HA47 thick wall - with adhesive liner
TREDUX-HA47-13/4
2
13.0
4.0
2.40
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50130
TREDUX-HA47-19/6
1
19.0
6.0
2.70
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50190
TREDUX-HA47-33/8
1
33.0
8.0
3.20
5 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50330
TREDUX-HA47-45/12
1
45.0
12.0
4.10
4 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50450
-
-
-
-
1 pcs.
Blue (BU)
319-30000
TREDUX-Display
TREDUX-Display
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a119
119
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 3:1 - 1 m lengths
• TREDUX thin wall
TREDUX thin wall heat shrink tubing is used for general electrical
insulation and mechanical protection of cables and wires.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled, flexible, cross-linked polyolefin tubing
• 1m shrink tubing lengths delivered in handy display carton
• 9 sizes from 1.5 mm to 101.6 mm
• Colours: black and yellow/green
TREDUX shrinks a maximum of 3:1.
More colours on request.
Please contact us!
One Step to the Web!
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 150
Flammability
UL224 VW-1
Specifications
CSA, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1
and 3, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class
2 (clear), UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
3:1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
TREDUX-1.5/0.5
1.5
0.5
0.50
1.0 m
TREDUX-1.5/0.5-GNYE
1.5
0.5
0.50
1.0 m
TREDUX-3/1
3.0
1.0
0.60
1.0 m
TREDUX-3/1-GNYE
3.0
1.0
0.60
1.0 m
TREDUX-6/2
6.0
2.0
0.70
1.0 m
TREDUX-6/2-GNYE
6.0
2.0
0.70
1.0 m
TREDUX-12/4
12.0
4.0
0.85
1.0 m
TREDUX-12/4-GNYE
12.0
4.0
0.85
1.0 m
TREDUX-24/8
24.0
8.0
1.20
1.0 m
TREDUX-24/8-GNYE
24.0
8.0
1.20
1.0 m
TREDUX-38.1/19.1
38.1
19.1
1.02
1.0 m
TREDUX-38.1/19.1-GNYE
38.1
19.1
1.02
1.0 m
TREDUX-50.8/25.4
50.8
25.4
1.14
TREDUX-76.2/38.1
76.2
38.1
1.27
TREDUX-101.6/50.8
101.6
50.8
1.40
TYPE
Colour
Shrink
Ratio
Article-No.
20 pcs.
Black (BK)
3:1
319-00150
20 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
3:1
319-00157
20 pcs.
Black (BK)
3:1
319-00300
20 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
3:1
319-00307
15 pcs.
Black (BK)
3:1
319-00600
15 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
3:1
319-00607
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
3:1
319-01200
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
3:1
319-01207
5 pcs.
Black (BK)
3:1
319-02400
5 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
3:1
319-02407
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
2:1
319-03800
6 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
2:1
319-03807
1.0 m
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
2:1
319-05100
1.0 m
3 pcs.
Black (BK)
2:1
319-07600
1.0 m
2 pcs.
Black (BK)
2:1
319-10200
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
120
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a120
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Our handy HIS family at a glance!
Date of issue: January 2014
Find more information on
pages 122, 124 and 138.
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Storage Rack for HIS-Boxes
• HIS-Service Station
HIS general purpose heat shrink tubing provides a reliable insulation
and protects against corrosion and mechanical influences. The handy
dispenser is ideal for small and medium size projects on-site. The
sturdy metal HIS Service Station comes with a cutter and can store all
sizes and colours. The Service Station can be mounted to the wall in
the work shop or service-van.
Features and Benefits
• Contains up to 5 dispenser boxes
• Place on bench or mount to wall
• Special cutter included for easily cutting tubing length to size
TYPE
HIS Service
Station
HIS-Service Station contains 5 dispensers and a special cutter.
Description
Article-No.
HIS-Service Station incl. cutter, contents: 5 dispensers HIS-3 (shrink ratio: 3:1), black,
sizes are as follows: HIS-3/1, HIS-6/2, HIS-12/4 (2 pcs.), HIS-24/8
365-30100
HIS-Service Station incl. cutter, contents: 5 dispensers HIS-Pack (shrink ratio: 2:1), black,
sizes are as follows: HIS-1/8, HIS-3/16, HIS-1/4, HIS-3/8, HIS 1/2 and one RiteOn Starter Pack
365-20000
HIS-Service Station incl. cutter, empty
300-30000
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 on a Reel
• HIS-PACK
• General purpose electrical insulation
• Protection against corrosion and mechanical abrasion
Features and Benefits
• Cross-linked Polyolefin, thin-wall and flexible
• Handy dispenser box including table showing application
size range
• Available in black, red, blue, transparent and yellow/green
• 10 sizes from 1.2 mm to 25.4 mm
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +125 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5%
Dielectric Strength
20kV/mm according to ASTM D2671
Flammability
UL224 VW-1 (except clear)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1 and
3, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 2
(clear), UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this
approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
122
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a122
Date of issue: January 2014
HIS-Pack.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 on a Reel
• HIS-PACK
TYPE
HIS-PACK-1.2/0.6
HIS-PACK-1.6/0.8
HIS-PACK-2.4/1.2
HIS-PACK-3.2/1.6
HIS-PACK-4.8/2.4
HIS-PACK-6.4/3.2
HIS-PACK-9.5/4.7
HIS-PACK-12.7/6.4
Date of issue: January 2014
HIS-PACK-19.1/9.5
HIS-PACK-25.4/12.7
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
1.2
0.6
0.40
10 m
Black (BK)
300-30120
1.2
0.6
0.40
10 m
Blue (BU)
300-30126
1.2
0.6
0.40
10 m
Red (RD)
300-30122
1.2
0.6
0.40
10 m
Transparent (CL)
300-30123
1.6
0.8
0.40
10 m
Black (BK)
300-30160
1.6
0.8
0.40
10 m
Blue (BU)
300-30166
1.6
0.8
0.40
10 m
Red (RD)
300-30162
1.6
0.8
0.40
10 m
Transparent (CL)
300-30163
2.4
1.2
0.50
10 m
Black (BK)
300-30240
2.4
1.2
0.50
10 m
Blue (BU)
300-30246
2.4
1.2
0.50
10 m
Red (RD)
300-30242
2.4
1.2
0.50
10 m
Transparent (CL)
300-30243
3.2
1.6
0.50
10 m
Black (BK)
300-30320
3.2
1.6
0.50
10 m
Blue (BU)
300-30326
3.2
1.6
0.50
10 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-30327
3.2
1.6
0.50
10 m
Red (RD)
300-30322
3.2
1.6
0.50
10 m
Transparent (CL)
300-30323
4.8
2.4
0.50
10 m
Black (BK)
300-30480
4.8
2.4
0.50
10 m
Blue (BU)
300-30486
4.8
2.4
0.50
10 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-30487
4.8
2.4
0.50
10 m
Red (RD)
300-30482
4.8
2.4
0.50
10 m
Transparent (CL)
300-30483
6.4
3.2
0.60
5m
Black (BK)
300-30640
6.4
3.2
0.60
5m
Blue (BU)
300-30646
6.4
3.2
0.60
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-30647
6.4
3.2
0.60
5m
Red (RD)
300-30642
6.4
3.2
0.60
5m
Transparent (CL)
300-30643
9.5
4.7
0.60
5m
Black (BK)
300-30950
9.5
4.7
0.60
5m
Blue (BU)
300-30956
9.5
4.7
0.60
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-30957
9.5
4.7
0.60
5m
Red (RD)
300-30952
9.5
4.7
0.60
5m
Transparent (CL)
300-30953
12.7
6.4
0.60
5m
Black (BK)
300-31270
12.7
6.4
0.60
5m
Blue (BU)
300-31276
12.7
6.4
0.60
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-31277
12.7
6.4
0.60
5m
Red (RD)
300-31272
12.7
6.4
0.60
5m
Transparent (CL)
300-31273
19.1
9.5
0.80
5m
Black (BK)
300-31900
19.1
9.5
0.80
5m
Blue (BU)
300-31906
19.1
9.5
0.80
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-31907
19.1
9.5
0.80
5m
Red (RD)
300-31902
19.1
9.5
0.80
5m
Transparent (CL)
300-31903
25.4
12.7
0.90
5m
Black (BK)
300-32540
25.4
12.7
0.90
5m
Blue (BU)
300-32546
25.4
12.7
0.90
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
300-32547
25.4
12.7
0.90
5m
Red (RD)
300-32542
25.4
12.7
0.90
5m
Transparent (CL)
300-32543
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a123
123
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 on a Reel
• HIS-3
• General purpose electrical insulation
• Coloured Identification
• Protection against corrosion and mechanical abrasion
Features and Benefits
• Unlined tubing in handly dispenser packs
• High shrink ratio (3:1) tubing
• Fits highly variable substrate dimensions
• Only 6 sizes for application diameter range of 1 mm up to 20 mm,
reduce inventory by half
HIS-3 can fit highly variable substrate dimensions.
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-5% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 150
Flammability
UL224 VW-1 (except clear)
Insulation Class
B (VDE 0530)
Specifications
CSA, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5
Class 1 and 3, SAE - AMS - DTL23053/5 Class 2 (clear), UL224 125 °C
600V VW-1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
HIS-3-1.5/0.5
HIS-3-3/1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
1.5
0.5
0.45
10 m
Black (BK)
308-30150
1.5
0.5
0.45
10 m
Blue (BU)
308-30156
1.5
0.5
0.45
10 m
Red (RD)
308-30152
1.5
0.5
0.45
10 m
Transparent (CL)
308-30153
3.0
1.0
0.55
10 m
Black (BK)
308-30300
3.0
1.0
0.55
10 m
Blue (BU)
308-30306
3.0
1.0
0.55
10 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30307
3.0
1.0
0.55
10 m
Red (RD)
308-30302
3.0
1.0
0.55
10 m
Transparent (CL)
308-30303
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
124
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a124
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 on a Reel
• HIS-3
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
HIS-3-6/2
HIS-3-9/3
HIS-3-12/4
HIS-3-18/6
HIS-3-24/8
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
6.0
2.0
0.65
5m
Black (BK)
308-30600
6.0
2.0
0.65
5m
Blue (BU)
308-30606
6.0
2.0
0.65
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30607
6.0
2.0
0.65
5m
Red (RD)
308-30602
6.0
2.0
0.65
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-30603
9.0
3.0
0.75
5m
Black (BK)
308-30900
9.0
3.0
0.75
5m
Blue (BU)
308-30906
9.0
3.0
0.75
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30907
9.0
3.0
0.75
5m
Red (RD)
308-30902
9.0
3.0
0.75
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-30903
12.0
4.0
0.80
5m
Black (BK)
308-31200
12.0
4.0
0.80
5m
Blue (BU)
308-31206
12.0
4.0
0.80
5m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-31207
12.0
4.0
0.80
5m
Red (RD)
308-31202
12.0
4.0
0.80
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-31203
18.0
6.0
0.90
4m
Black (BK)
308-31800
18.0
6.0
0.90
4m
Blue (BU)
308-31806
18.0
6.0
0.90
4m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-31807
18.0
6.0
0.90
4m
Red (RD)
308-31802
18.0
6.0
0.90
4m
Transparent (CL)
308-31803
24.0
8.0
1.20
3m
Black (BK)
308-32400
24.0
8.0
1.20
3m
Blue (BU)
308-32406
24.0
8.0
1.20
3m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-32407
24.0
8.0
1.20
3m
Red (RD)
308-32402
24.0
8.0
1.20
3m
Transparent (CL)
308-32403
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a125
125
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in blister bags
• HIS-3 BAG
HIS-3 BAG tubings are useable for insulation and protection of
cables and harnesses.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled and flexible tubing made of cross-linked Polyolefin
• High shrink ratio (3:1) tubing
• Handy, small packaging with 10 pre-cut pieces of 200 mm
HIS-3 BAG available in seven colours and four sizes.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-5% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm according to ASTM D 150
Flammability
UL224 VW-1 (except clear)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1
and 3, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5
Class 2 (clear), UL224 125 °C
600V VW-1
TYPE
HIS-3-BAG-1.5/0.5
HIS-3-BAG-3/1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
308-30151
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Blue (BU)
308-30161
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Brown (BN)
308-30163
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30165
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Grey (GY)
308-30162
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Red (RD)
308-30160
1.5
0.5
0.45
200.0
10 pcs.
Transparent (CL)
308-30164
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
308-30310
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Blue (BU)
308-30312
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Brown (BN)
308-30314
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30316
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Grey (GY)
308-30313
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Red (RD)
308-30311
3.0
1.0
0.55
200.0
10 pcs.
Transparent (CL)
308-30315
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
126
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a126
Date of issue: January 2014
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in blister bags
• HIS-3 BAG
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
HIS-3-BAG-6/2
HIS-3-BAG-12/4
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
308-30610
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Blue (BU)
308-30612
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Brown (BN)
308-30614
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Grey (GY)
308-30613
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Red (RD)
308-30611
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Transparent (CL)
308-30615
6.0
2.0
0.65
200.0
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-30617
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
308-31210
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Blue (BU)
308-31212
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Brown (BN)
308-31214
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Grey (GY)
308-31213
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Red (RD)
308-31211
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Transparent (CL)
308-31215
12.0
4.0
0.80
200.0
10 pcs.
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
308-31217
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a127
127
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 flexible and coloured
• TF21
Due to it‘s versatility TF21 is suitable for a wide range of applications
like electrical insulations, mechanical protection and marking.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled, flexible polyolefin tubing
• Fast shrinking and low shrink temperature
• Meets and exceeds lots of industrial standards
• Big variety of different colours and sizes
• Printable
• Flame retarded and UL224 VW1 listed
TF21 – available in a wide range of colours and sizes.
Detailed Information about
Heatguns please refer to
page 317/318.
One Step to the Web!
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+90 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5%
Dielectric Strength
37 kV/mm
Flammability
ASTM D876
Specifications
CSA, JAR/FAR 25.853, NF F 00-608,
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 1,
UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
TF21-1.2/0.6
TF21-1.6/0.8
TF21-2.4/1.2
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
1.2
0.6
0.41
100 m
Blue (BU)
309-20126
1.2
0.6
0.41
100 m
Red (RD)
309-20122
1.2
0.6
0.41
100 m
White (WH)
309-20129
1.2
0.6
0.41
100 m
Yellow (YE)
309-20124
1.2
0.6
0.41
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10120
1.6
0.8
0.43
100 m
Blue (BU)
309-20166
1.6
0.8
0.43
100 m
Red (RD)
309-20162
1.6
0.8
0.43
100 m
White (WH)
309-20169
1.6
0.8
0.43
100 m
Yellow (YE)
309-20164
1.6
0.8
0.43
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10160
2.4
1.2
0.51
100 m
Blue (BU)
309-20246
2.4
1.2
0.51
100 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-40247
2.4
1.2
0.51
100 m
Red (RD)
309-20242
2.4
1.2
0.51
100 m
White (WH)
309-20249
2.4
1.2
0.51
100 m
Yellow (YE)
309-20244
2.4
1.2
0.51
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10240
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this
approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
128
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a128
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 flexible and coloured
• TF21
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
TYPE
TF21-3.2/1.6
TF21-4.8/2.4
TF21-6.4/3.2
TF21-9.5/4.8
TF21-12.7/6.4
Date of issue: January 2014
TF21-19.0/9.5
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
Blue (BU)
309-20326
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-40327
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
Red (RD)
309-20322
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
White (WH)
309-20329
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
Yellow (YE)
309-20324
3.2
1.6
0.51
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10320
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
Blue (BU)
309-50486
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-50487
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
Red (RD)
309-50482
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
White (WH)
309-50489
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
Yellow (YE)
309-50484
4.8
2.4
0.51
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10480
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
Blue (BU)
309-50646
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-50647
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
Red (RD)
309-50642
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
White (WH)
309-50649
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
Yellow (YE)
309-50644
6.4
3.2
0.64
300 m
Black (BK)
309-10640
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
Blue (BU)
309-20956
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-50957
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
Red (RD)
309-20952
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
White (WH)
309-20959
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
Yellow (YE)
309-20954
9.5
4.8
0.64
150 m
Black (BK)
309-10950
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
Blue (BU)
309-21276
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-41277
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
Red (RD)
309-21272
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
White (WH)
309-21279
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
Yellow (YE)
309-21274
12.7
6.4
0.64
100 m
Black (BK)
309-11270
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Black (BK)
309-11900
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Blue (BU)
309-11906
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-11907
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Red (RD)
309-11902
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
White (WH)
309-11909
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Yellow (YE)
309-11904
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this
approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a129
129
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 flexible and coloured
• TF21
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
TYPE
TF21-25.4/12.7
TF21-38.0/19.0
TF21-50.8/25.4
TF21-76.0/38.0
TF21-101.6/50.8
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Black (BK)
309-12540
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Blue (BU)
309-12546
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-12547
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Red (RD)
309-12542
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
White (WH)
309-12549
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Yellow (YE)
309-12544
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Black (BK)
309-13810
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Blue (BU)
309-13816
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-13817
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Red (RD)
309-13812
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
White (WH)
309-13819
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Yellow (YE)
309-13814
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Black (BK)
309-15080
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Blue (BU)
309-15086
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
309-15087
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Red (RD)
309-15082
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
White (WH)
309-15089
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Yellow (YE)
309-15084
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
Black (BK)
309-17600
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
Blue (BU)
309-17606
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
Red (RD)
309-17602
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
White (WH)
309-17609
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
Yellow (YE)
309-17604
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
Black (BK)
309-11020
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
Blue (BU)
309-11026
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
Red (RD)
309-11022
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
White (WH)
309-11029
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
Yellow (YE)
309-11024
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this
approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
130
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a130
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1 flexible and transparent
• TF24
Protects wire and cable markers subject to abuse, while permitting
inspectability of each item covered. Protects electronic components
while permitting their identification and inspection.
Features and Benefits
• Transparent, flexible polyolefin tubing
• Protects identification marking perfect
• Halogen free
• Good mechanical and chemical resistance
• VG-approval and additional industrial approvals
TF24 transparent tubing with 2:1 shrink ratio.
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
2:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+/-5% max.
Dielectric Strength
≥ 30 kV/mm min. according to
ASTM D2171
Flammability
not flame retarded
Specifications
DEF STAN 59-97 Type 2B,
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/5 Class 2,
VG 95343
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 2:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Designation as per
VG-Norm
Article-No.
TF24-1.2/0.6
1.2
0.6
0.41
100 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B001M
309-40123
TF24-1.6/0.8
1.6
0.8
0.43
100 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B002M
309-40163
TF24-2.4/1.2
2.4
1.2
1.51
100 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B003M
309-40243
TF24-3.2/1.6
3.2
1.6
0.51
100 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B004M
309-40323
TF24-4.8/2.4
4.8
2.4
0.51
60 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B005M
309-50483
TF24-6.4/3.2
6.4
3.2
0.64
60 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B006M
309-50643
TF24-9.5/4.8
9.5
4.8
0.64
50 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B007M
309-40953
TF24-12.7/6.4
12.7
6.4
0.64
50 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B008M
309-41273
TF24-19.1/9.5
19.1
9.5
0.76
50 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B009M
309-31903
TF24-25.4/12.7
25.4
12.7
0.89
50 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B010M
309-32543
TF24-38.1/19.1
38.1
19.1
1.02
60 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B011M
309-33813
TF24-50.8/25.4
50.8
25.4
1.14
60 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B012M
309-35083
TF24-76.2/38.1
76.2
38.1
1.27
30 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B013M
309-37603
TF24-101.6/50.8
101.6
50.8
1.40
15 m
Transparent (CL)
VG95343T05B014M
309-31023
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a131
131
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 flexibile and coloured
• TF31
If higher fire protection is a requirement heat shrinkable tubing
TF31 is a good choice. It is used for protection insulation and
identification wires, cables and light duty harnesses.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled, very flexible polyolefin tubing
• Few sizes cover a wide range of diameters allowing
reduced inventory
• Fast shrinking and low shrink temperature
• Flame-retardant, UL224 VW1 listed
TF31 with 3:1 shrink ratio allowing for a wider range of application.
Detailed Information about
Heatguns please refer to
page 317/318.
One Step to the Web!
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+90 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+5%/-15%
Dielectric Strength
37 kV/mm
Flammability
ASTM D876
Specifications
CSA, UL224 125 °C 600V VW-1
TYPE
TF31-1.5/0.5
TF31-3/1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Black (BK)
333-30150
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-30156
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Green (GN)
333-30155
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-30157
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Red (RD)
333-30152
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
White (WH)
333-30159
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-30154
1.5
0.5
0.50
300 m
Black (BK)
333-20150
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Black (BK)
333-30300
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-30306
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Green (GN)
333-30305
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-30307
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Red (RD)
333-30302
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
White (WH)
333-30309
3.0
1.0
0.60
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-30304
3.0
1.0
0.60
150 m
Black (BK)
333-40300
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
132
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a132
Date of issue: January 2014
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 flexibile and coloured
• TF31
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
TF31-6/2
TF31-9/3
TF31-12/4
TF31-18/6
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Black (BK)
333-30600
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-30606
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Green (GN)
333-30605
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-30607
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Red (RD)
333-30602
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
White (WH)
333-30609
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-30604
6.0
2.0
0.70
150 m
Black (BK)
333-40600
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Black (BK)
333-30900
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-30906
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Green (GN)
333-30905
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-30907
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Red (RD)
333-30902
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
White (WH)
333-30909
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-30904
9.0
3.0
0.80
150 m
Black (BK)
333-20900
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Black (BK)
333-31200
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-31206
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Green (GN)
333-31205
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-31207
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Red (RD)
333-31202
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
White (WH)
333-31209
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-31204
12.0
4.0
0.85
100 m
Black (BK)
333-21200
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Black (BK)
333-31800
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-31806
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Green (GN)
333-31805
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-31807
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Red (RD)
333-31802
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
White (WH)
333-31809
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-31804
18.0
6.0
1.00
60 m
Black (BK)
333-41800
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a133
133
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 flexibile and coloured
• TF31
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
TYPE
TF31-24/8
TF31-40/13
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Black (BK)
333-32400
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-32406
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Green (GN)
333-32405
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-32407
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Red (RD)
333-32402
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
White (WH)
333-32409
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-32404
24.0
8.0
1.20
60 m
Black (BK)
333-42400
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Black (BK)
333-34000
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Blue (BU)
333-34006
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Green (GN)
333-34005
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
333-34007
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Red (RD)
333-34002
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
White (WH)
333-34009
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Yellow (YE)
333-34004
40.0
13.0
1.25
60 m
Black (BK)
333-24000
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
134
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a134
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 flexible and transparent
• TF34
Protects wire and cable markers subject to abuse, while permitting
inspectability of each item covered. Protects electronic components
while permitting their identification and inspection.
Features and Benefits
• Transparent, flexible polyolefin tubing
• Protects identification marking perfect
• Few sizes cover a wide range of diameters allowing
reduced inventory
• Halogen free
TF34 transparent tubing with 3:1 shrink ratio allowing for a wider range
of application.
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-5% max.
Dielectric Strength
46 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
TF34-1.5/0.5
1.5
0.5
0.50
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-30153
TF34-3/1
3.0
1.0
0.50
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-30303
TF34-6/2
6.0
2.0
0.70
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-30603
TF34-9/3
9.0
3.0
0.80
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-30903
TF34-12/4
12.0
4.0
0.85
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-31203
TF34-18/6
18.0
6.0
1.00
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-31803
TF34-24/8
24.0
8.0
1.20
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-32403
TF34-40/13
40.0
13.0
1.25
30 m
Transparent (CL)
333-34003
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a135
135
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in a Kit
• ShrinKit 321-A - with adhesive liner
The black tubing is mainly used for environmental sealing of splices and
connectors. The transparent tubing is typically used for protection of
cable markers.
Features and Benefits
• Adhesive lined heat shrink tubing
• Attractive and reusable kit ideal for assembling and identification
• Inner wall melts when heated and is forced into gaps
• Adhesive forms seal against moisture as tubing cools
• Black tubing mainly for the protection of connectors and splices
• Clear tubing ideal for protection of printed label markers
• Case can be re-used for storing nails, screws, nuts, fish hooks, etc.
• Compartment size changeable by simply moving yellow
space dividers
One Step to the Web!
ShrinKit 321-A.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+1%/-15% max.
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to IEC 60684 P2
Flammability
self-extinguishing outer wall
(black only)
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/4 Class 3
(except clear)
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 with adhesive
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
1
24.0
8.0
200.0
2.50
Black (BK)
5
2
12.0
4.0
65.0
1.70
Transparent (CL)
15
3
4
5
6
7
Colour
Content
(pcs.)
6.0
2.0
50.0
1.10
Black (BK)
20
6.0
2.0
50.0
1.10
Transparent (CL)
20
12.0
4.0
65.0
1.70
Black (BK)
15
3.0
1.0
50.0
1.00
Black (BK)
50
3.0
1.0
50.0
1.00
Transparent (CL)
50
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Black (BK)
30
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Transparent (CL)
30
24.0
8.0
200.0
2.50
Transparent (CL)
5
8
12.0
4.0
100.0
1.70
Black (BK)
15
9
12.0
4.0
100.0
1.70
Black (BK)
15
10
12.0
4.0
100.0
1.70
Transparent (CL)
15
3.0
1.0
40.0
1.00
Black (BK)
50
3.0
1.0
40.0
1.00
Transparent (CL)
50
11
Article-No.
380-03003
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
136
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a136
Date of issue: January 2014
Supplied
Ø D min.
COMP.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 in a Kit
• Shrinkit 321-A Basic - with adhesive liner
The black tubing is mainly used for environmental sealing of splices and
connectors. The transparent tubing is typically used for protection of
cable markers.
Features and Benefits
• Adhesive lined heat shrink tubing
• Attractive and reusable kit ideal for assembling and identification
• Inner wall melts when heated and is forced into gaps
• Adhesive forms seal against moisture as tubing cools
• Black tubes mainly for the protection of connectors and splices
• Clear tubing ideal for protection of printed label markers
• Case can be re-used for storing nails, screws, nuts, fish hooks, etc.
ShrinKit 321-A Basic.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
+1%/-15% max.
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to ASTM D2671
Flammability
self-extinguishing outer wall
(black only)
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Specifications
SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/4 Class 3
(except clear)
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 with adhesive
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
Colour
Content
(pcs.)
1
3.0
1.0
35.0
1.00
Black (BK)
25
2
12.0
4.0
35.0
1.70
Black (BK)
10
COMP.
3
3.0
1.0
35.0
1.00
Transparent (CL)
25
4
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Black (BK)
15
5
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Transparent (CL)
15
6
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Transparent (CL)
15
7
8
6.0
2.0
35.0
1.10
Black (BK)
15
12.0
4.0
80.0
1.70
Black (BK)
5
12.0
4.0
80.0
1.70
Transparent (CL)
5
Article-No.
380-03004
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a137
137
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 on a Reel
• HIS-A - with adhesive liner
HIS-A forms a seal against moisture and protect against corrosion
and mechanical abrasion.
Features and Benefits
• Adhesive lined heat shrink tubing
• Inner wall melts when heated and is forced into gaps
• Adhesive forms seal against moisture as tubing cools
• Protects components
• Available in black and transparent
• 6 sizes for wide range of applications
HIS-A - with adhesive liner
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +125 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+100 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to IEC 60684 P2
Flammability
UL224 VW-1 (except clear)
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Specifications
CSA, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053 / 4
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 with adhesive
TYPE
HIS-A-3/1
HIS-A-6/2
HIS-A-9/3
HIS-A-12/4
HIS-A-18/6
HIS-A-24/8
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Reel
Length
3.0
1.0
1.00
10 m
Black (BK)
308-10300
3.0
1.0
1.00
10 m
Transparent (CL)
308-10303
6.0
2.0
1.00
5m
Black (BK)
308-10600
6.0
2.0
1.00
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-10603
9.0
3.0
1.40
5m
Black (BK)
308-10900
9.0
3.0
1.40
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-10903
12.0
4.0
1.80
5m
Black (BK)
308-11200
12.0
4.0
1.80
5m
Transparent (CL)
308-11203
18.0
6.0
2.25
4m
Black (BK)
308-11800
18.0
6.0
2.25
4m
Transparent (CL)
308-11803
24.0
8.0
2.50
3m
Black (BK)
308-12400
24.0
8.0
2.50
3m
Transparent (CL)
308-12403
Colour
Article-No.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
138
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a138
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing adhesive lined 1.2 m lenghts
• TA32 - thin wall, 3:1 shrink ratio
• TA42 - thin wall, 4:1 shrink ratio
TA32/TA42 is designed for environmental sealing and electrical
insulation of wire splices, terminations and components.
Features and Benefits
• Thin walled adhesive-lined heat shrink tubing
• Highly flame retardant
• Outer wall conforms to UL224
TA32 and TA42 are UL224 listed adhesive lined tubing. Available in 3:1 and
4:1shrink ratio.
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +125 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+110 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-15% max.
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to IEC 60684 P2
Flammability
UL224
Specifications
CSA, SAE - AMS - DTL-23053/4
Class 3, UL224 125 °C 600V
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3:1 with adhesive
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Shrink
Ratio
Article-No.
TA32-3/1
3.2
0.6
0.95
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-30300
TA32 4.5/1.5
4.5
1.5
1.10
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-30450
TA32-6/2
6.0
2.0
1.20
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-30600
TA32-9/3
9.0
3.0
1.30
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-30900
TA32-12/4
12.0
4.0
1.40
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-31200
TA32-19/6
19.0
6.0
1.80
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-31900
TA32-24/8
24.0
8.0
2.50
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-32400
TA32-40/13
40.0
13.0
2.50
1.2 m
Black (BK)
3:1
318-34000
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a139
139
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing adhesive lined 1.2 m lenghts
• TA42 - thin wall, 4:1 shrink ratio
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 4:1 with adhesive
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Shrink
Ratio
Colour
Article-No.
TA42-4/1
4.0
1.0
1.00
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-40400
TA42-8/2
8.0
2.0
1.20
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-40800
TA42-12/3
12.0
3.0
1.40
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-41200
TA42-16/4
16.0
4.0
1.80
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-41600
TA42-24/6
24.0
6.0
2.25
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-42400
TA42-32/8
32.0
8.0
2.55
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-43200
TA42-52/13
52.0
13.0
2.55
1.2 m
Black (BK)
4:1
318-45200
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 4:1 - 1 m lengths
• MA47 - medium wall adhesive lined
• MU47 - medium wall unlined
Insulation and Protection of low voltage cable jonts and terminations
above and below ground.
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
140
MA47 and MU47 medium wall tubing - lined and unlined.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
up to 4:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a140
Date of issue: January 2014
Features and Benefits
• Medium walled tubing with robust insulation characteristics
• Shrink tubing for above and underground cable applications
• Protects cable joints and terminations in low voltage applications
• Coated inside with thermoplastic adhesive
• Protects against humidity and other environmental impacts
after shrinking
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 4:1 - 1 m lengths
• MA47 - medium wall adhesive lined
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 4:1 with adhesive
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
MA47-12/3
12.0
3.0
2.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20120
MA47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.50
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20190
MA47-30/8
30.0
8.0
2.50
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20300
MA47-40/12
40.0
12.0
2.50
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20400
MA47-50/16
50.0
16.0
2.70
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20500
MA47-63/19
63.0
19.0
2.80
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20630
MA47-75/22
75.0
22.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20750
MA47-95/30
95.0
30.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-20950
MA47-115/34
115.0
34.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-21150
MA47-140/42
140.0
42.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-21400
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
• MU47 - medium wall unlined
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 4:1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
MU47-12/3
12.0
3.0
2.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10120
MU47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.20
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10190
MU47-30/8
30.0
8.0
2.50
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10300
MU47-40/12
40.0
12.0
2.50
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10400
MU47-50/16
50.0
16.0
2.70
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10500
MU47-63/19
63.0
19.0
2.80
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10630
MU47-75/22
75.0
22.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10750
MU47-95/30
95.0
30.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-10950
MU47 115/34
115.0
34.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-11150
MU47-140/42
140.0
42.0
3.00
1.0 m
Black (BK)
323-11400
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a141
141
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 4:1 - 1 m lengths
• TREDUX MA47 medium wall - with adhesive liner
Suitable for insulation and protection of low voltage cable joints
and terminations.
Features and Benefits
• Medium walled heat shrink tubing
• Securely packed in display boxes for use in smaller quantities
• Supplied in lengths of 1 m
• Thermoplastic adhesive liner for protection from moisture
and weathering
MA47 and MU47 medium wall tubing - lined and unlined.
Detailed Information about
Heatguns please refer to page
317/318.
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
up to 4:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 4:1 with adhesive
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TREDUX-MA47-12/3
12.0
3.0
2.00
1.0 m
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50120
TREDUX-MA47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.50
1.0 m
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50190
TREDUX-MA47-30/8
30.0
8.0
2.50
1.0 m
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50300
TREDUX-MA47-40/12
40.0
12.0
2.50
1.0 m
4 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50400
TREDUX-MA47-50/16
50.0
16.0
2.70
1.0 m
2 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50500
TREDUX-MA47-63/19
63.0
19.0
2.80
1.0 m
2 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50630
TREDUX-MA47-75/22
75.0
22.0
3.00
1.0 m
2 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50750
TREDUX-MA47-95/30
95.0
30.0
3.00
1.0 m
1 pcs.
Black (BK)
323-50950
142
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a142
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Cable Repair Sleeves
• RMS
RMS wrap-around sleeves are easy to install.
Features and Benefits
• Fast, moisture proof and permanent repair of cable jackets
• Only 6 sizes for a wide range of cable diameters: from 10 mm
up to 160 mm
• Available in 4 standard lengths, custom lengths available
on request
• Each RMS kit is ready for use and
comes with instruction sheet,
abrasive strip and cleaning sachet
• Weather resistant and halogen free
• TCP (thermo-chromatic paint)
spots indicate the sleeve has
One Step to the Web!
been sufficiently heated
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, Chemically cross-linked
(PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
up to 4.5:1
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +120 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+110 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+105 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
12 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
RMS wrap-around sleeves for rapid and secure cable repair on site.
RMS: Repair sleeve, steel closure, abrasive strip, cleaning sachet,
instruction sheet.
Cable Repair Sleeve RMS with adhesive
TYPE
RMS 43-10
RMS 52-15
RMS 76-22
Date of issue: January 2014
RMS 100-30
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Suitable for
Cable Ø
from/to
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
43.0
10.0
2.30
15 - 35
250.0
Black (BK)
450-20000
43.0
10.0
2.30
15 - 35
500.0
Black (BK)
450-20001
43.0
10.0
2.30
15 - 35
750.0
Black (BK)
450-20004
43.0
10.0
2.30
15 - 35
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20002
52.0
15.0
2.30
20 - 45
250.0
Black (BK)
450-20010
52.0
15.0
2.30
20 - 45
500.0
Black (BK)
450-20011
52.0
15.0
2.30
20 - 45
750.0
Black (BK)
450-20014
52.0
15.0
2.30
20 - 45
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20012
76.0
22.0
2.50
28 - 65
500.0
Black (BK)
450-20021
76.0
22.0
2.50
28 - 65
750.0
Black (BK)
450-20024
76.0
22.0
2.50
28 - 65
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20022
100.0
30.0
2.54
35 - 85
500.0
Black (BK)
450-20030
100.0
30.0
2.54
35 - 85
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20031
RMS 139-38
139.0
38.0
2.77
45 - 120
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20041
RMS 185-55
185.0
55.0
2.74
65 - 160
1,000.0
Black (BK)
450-20050
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a143
143
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 3,5:1 - 1 m lengths
• TREDUX HA47 thick wall - with adhesive liner
The toughness and the weatherability of TREDUX thick wall
tubing makes it suitable for exposed applications and underground
cable joints.
Features and Benefits
• Thick walled polyolefin adhesive-lined tubing
• Standard 1m lengths
• Securely packed in display carton for use in smaller quantities
• For low and medium voltage power applications
TREDUX HA47 - application below ground.
Detailed Information about
Heatguns please refer to
page 317/318.
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
up to 3.5:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3.5:1 with adhesive
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
TREDUX-HA47-13/4
13.0
4.0
2.40
TREDUX-HA47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.70
TREDUX-HA47-33/8
33.0
8.0
TREDUX-HA47-45/12
45.0
12.0
TREDUX-HA47-51/16
51.0
TREDUX-HA47-68/22
68.0
TREDUX-HA47-85/25
85.0
TYPE
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
1.0 m
6 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50130
1.0 m
10 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50190
3.20
1.0 m
5 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50330
4.10
1.0 m
4 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50450
16.0
4.10
1.0 m
2 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50510
22.0
4.10
1.0 m
1 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50680
25.4
4.30
1.0 m
1 pcs.
Black (BK)
321-50850
144
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a144
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 3,5:1 - 1 m lengths
• HA47 - thick wall adhesive lined
• HU47 - thick wall unlined
The toughness and wheatherability makes it well suited for exposed
applications and underground cable joints and cable terminations.
Features and Benefits
• Thick walled polyolefin adhesive-lined sleeving
• Thermoplastic adhesive protects against moisture and weathering
• Used for low voltage power applications
HA47 – Heavy wall adhesive lined tubing.
Cut lengths available on
request. Please contact us!
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
up to 3.5:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20 kV/mm
Flammability
not flame retarded
Insulation Class
A (VDE 0530)
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3.5:1 with adhesive
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
HA47-9/3
9.0
3.0
1.80
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20090
HA47-13/4
13.0
4.0
2.40
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20130
HA47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.70
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20180
HA47-33/8
33.0
8.0
3.20
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20280
HA47-45/12
45.0
12.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20450
HA47-51/16
51.0
16.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20510
HA47-68/22
68.0
22.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20680
HA47-85/25
85.0
25.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20850
HA47-105/30
105.0
30.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-20900
HA47-130/36
130.0
36.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-21300
HA47-160/50
160.0
50.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-21600
HA47-180/50
180.0
50.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-21850
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a145
145
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing up to 3,5:1 - 1 m lengths
• HU47 - thick wall unlined
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 3.5:1
TYPE
HU47-9/3
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
9.0
3.0
1.80
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10090
HU47-13/4
13.0
4.0
2.40
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10130
HU47-19/6
19.0
6.0
2.70
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10180
HU47-33/8
33.0
8.0
3.20
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10280
HU47-45/12
45.0
12.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10450
HU47-51/16
51.0
16.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10510
HU47-68/22
68.0
22.0
4.10
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10680
HU47-85/25
85.0
25.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10850
HU47-105/30
105.0
30.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-10900
HU47-130/36
130.0
36.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-11300
HU47-160/50
160.0
50.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-11600
HU47-180/50
180.0
50.0
4.30
1.0 m
Black (BK)
321-11850
146
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a146
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.1
Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 6:1, adhesive lined in
1 m cuts
• HA67
Insulates, seals and protects large size differences between
connectors and cables.
Features and Benefits
• High shrink ratio, heavy-duty heat shrinkable tubing
• Thermoplastic adhesive-lined tubing
• Conforms well to highly variable substrate dimensions
• Simplifies cable repair
• Passes over large connectors and shrinks onto much smaller
cable jackets
• Environmental sealing and excellent insulation
• Resistant to impact and abrasion
One Step to the Web!
Due to the high shrink ratio HA67 is suitable for complex shapes
and dimensions.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Shrink Ratio
6:1
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +110 °C
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+85 °C
Longitudinal change
after shrinkage
-10% max.
Dielectric Strength
20kV/mm according to ASTM D2671
Flammability
not flame retarded
Heat Shrinkable Tubing 6:1 with adhesive
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
HA67-19.0/3.2
19.0
3.2
3.20
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30000
HA67-33.0/5.5
33.0
5.5
3.40
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30100
HA67-44.4/7.4
44.4
7.4
3.60
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30200
HA67-50.8/8.3
50.8
8.3
4.80
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30300
HA67-69.8/11.7
69.8
11.7
4.80
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30400
HA67-88.9/17.1
88.9
17.1
4.80
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30500
HA67-119.4/22.9
119.4
22.9
4.80
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30600
HA67-235.0/40.0
235.0
40.0
4.80
1,220.0
Black (BK)
321-30700
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a147
147
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
The moulded shapes catalogue offers a wide range of moulded parts. The extensive
product line includes low profile, bulbous and lipped types for use on circular and
D-type connectors as well as complex multiway transitions.
They can be sealed with our special adhesives and encapsulants to ensure the proper
degree of mechanical support, strain relief and environmental protection.
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Date of issue: January 2014
A range of specially formulated materials is available to meet a variety of
performance requirements.
Insulation
2.2
Material Information
A wider range of material / adhesive
combinations are available in
the moulded shapes catalogue.
Adhesive for Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Adhesive Specifications
W / W2
WM250
HMT200A
Adhesive
Hot melt adhesive
Hot melt adhesive
Hot melt adhesive tape
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +80 °C
-55 °C to +80 °C
-55 °C to +105 °C
Softening Point Adhesive
+95 °C
+95 °C
+110 °C
Supplied Form
pre-applied
pre-applied
tape
Shelf life
5 years
5 years
5 years
Solvent Resistance
Fair under splash conditions
Fair under splash conditions
Fair under splash conditions
Materials for Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Date of issue: January 2014
Material Specifications
B8
B7
Material
Semi-rigid flame retarded polyolefin
Semi-rigid flame retarted polyolefin
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +100 °C
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink Temperature
+135 °C
+135 °C
Specification
EA-TS 09-11
MIL-I-81765/1 Type 1, DEF STAN 59-97,
BSG198 Part 5
Tensile Strength
15 MPa
13 MPa
Elongation at break
500 %
500 %
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm
14 kV/mm
Flammability for Material
good
excellent
Features and Benefits
Good physical and reasonable chemical
resistance
Good physical and chemical resistance
Typical Application
Power/utility shapes
Military and general high performance
harnessing
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a149
149
Insulation
2.2
Product Selection
Order Example
Example:
Type:
XXX(X)-X(X)-XXXX(XX)
216-3-B8W
Adhesive
Adhesive W
Material
B8 Material
Size
Short version
Series
Series 200
Other product styles are available. Please
refer to Moulded Shapes catalogue.
Bulbous Boots
Product Overview
Page
2-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 200 Series, in line,
low voltage
Bulbous Boots
Product Overview
Page
6-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 600 Series, in line,
low voltage
153
3-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 300 Series, in line,
low voltage
Low voltage
Helashrink PEC Series, pinched
154
4-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 400 Series, in line,
low voltage
Low voltage
Helashrink 1600 Series
155
151
152
5-Way Outlet Shapes
Helashrink 500 Series, in line,
low voltage
150
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a150
Date of issue: January 2014
One Step to the Web!
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
2-Way Outlet Shapes, Breakout Boots
• Helashrink 200 Series, in line, low voltage
Features and Benefits
• Easy, time-saving insulation of cable branch point where it splits
into single wires
• Adhesive to relieve mechanical tension in cable harnesses
a: Expanded form (supplied)
223-2 supplied / fully recovered.
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
ØH
min. a
ØH
max. b
ØJ
min. a
ØJ
max. b
P±
10%
R±
10%
HW ±
20%
JW ±
20%
S
nom
Article-No.
216-3-B8W
21.0
9.4
9.0
2.8
76.5
20.0
1.6
1.6
14.0
402-16039
223-2-B8W
33.0
9.4
17.5
4.1
94.0
30.0
1.5
1.2
20.0
402-23058
218-2-B8W
49.0
22.9
20.0
7.6
119.0
34.0
3.2
3.2
30.0
402-18051
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
3-Way Outlet Shapes, Breakout Boots
• Helashrink 300 Series, in line, low voltage
Features and Benefits
• Easy, time-saving insulation of cable branch point where it splits
into single wires
• Adhesive to relieve mechanical tension in cable harnesses
a: Expanded form (supplied)
300 Series supplied / fully recovered.
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
ØH
min. a
ØH
max. b
ØJ
min. a
ØJ
max. b
P±
10%
R±
10%
HW ±
20%
JW ±
20%
354-1-B8W
45.0
10.0
16.0
4.0
100.0
25.0
3.0
320-1-B8W2
55.8
22.5
30.4
9.0
180.0
44.0
3.0
355-1-B8W2
100.0
28.0
40.0
13.0
210.0
50.0
3.5
342-1-B8W2
110.0
35.0
40.0
17.5
230.0
45.0
4.0
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
S
nom
Article-No.
2.0
-
403-54004
2.0
37.0
403-20014
2.5
-
403-55008
3.5
65.0
403-42006
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a151
151
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
4-Way Outlet Shapes, Breakout Boots
• Helashrink 400 Series, in line, low voltage
Features and Benefits
• Easy, time-saving insulation of cable branch point where it splits
into single wires
• Made of tough, cross-linked, Polyolefin
• Adhesive to relieve mechanical tension in cable harnesses
a: Expanded form (supplied)
400 series supplied / fully recovered.
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
ØH
min. a
TYPE
ØH
max. b
ØJ
min. a
ØJ
max. b
P±
10%
R±
10%
HW ±
20%
JW ±
20%
S
nom
Article-No.
442-1-B8WM250
28.0
9.0
9.0
1.8
78.0
17.0
2.7
2.0
20.0
404-42009
408-2-B8W2
35.0
12.0
15.0
3.0
95.0
24.0
2.5
2.0
22.0
404-08022
409-2-B8W2
47.4
22.9
21.5
6.4
165.0
38.1
4.1
3.3
38.1
404-09021
418-4-B8W2
60.0
22.9
30.0
6.4
202.0
38.1
4.1
3.3
38.1
404-18020
444-2-B8W2
95.0
35.6
35.6
12.5
240.0
55.0
4.0
3.5
50.8
404-44022
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
5-Way Outlet Shapes, Breakout Boots
• Helashrink 500 Series, in line, low voltage
Features and Benefits
• Cable breakout boots for insulating and sealing cable crotch or
conduit system
• Excellent resistance to abrasion and weathering
a: Expanded form (supplied)
500 Series supplied / fully recovered.
ØH
min. a
ØH
max. b
ØJ
min. a
ØJ
max. b
P±
10%
R±
10%
HW ±
20%
JW ±
20%
S
nom
Article-No.
508-3-B7W
89.0
24.5
33.0
7.5
180.0
30.0
3.5
3.0
48.0
405-08035
508-3-B7
89.0
24.5
33.0
7.5
180.0
30.0
3.5
3.0
48.0
405-08036
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
152
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a152
Date of issue: January 2014
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
6-Way Outlet Shapes, Breakout Boots
• Helashrink 600 Series, in line, low voltage
Features and Benefits
• Cable breakout boots for insulating and sealing cable crotch or
conduit system
• Excellent resistance to abrasion and weathering
600 Series supplied / fully recovered.
a: Expanded form (supplied)
For Material / Adhesive information
please refer to page 149.
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
ØH
min. a
ØH
max. b
ØJ
min. a
ØJ
max. b
P±
10%
R±
10%
HW ±
20%
JW ±
20%
S
nom
Article-No.
609-2-B7W
40.0
16.0
12.0
4.0
75.0
20.0
2.5
1.5
25.0
406-09027
609-2-B7
40.0
16.0
12.0
4.0
75.0
20.0
2.5
1.5
25.0
406-09023
608-2-B7W
61.0
37.0
21.0
9.0
152.0
56.0
3.2
3.2
46.0
406-08024
608-2-B7
61.0
37.0
21.0
9.0
152.0
56.0
3.2
3.2
46.0
406-08023
610-1-B8HW
114.3
35.0
45.7
14.0
241.3
50.8
4.0
2.3
101.6
406-10000
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a153
153
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Pinched End Caps
• Helashrink PEC Series, low voltage
Pinched End Caps can be used for mechanical and environmental
protection of stub splices in electrical harnesses. Due to the fast
and easy installation, these caps can be used for non-electrical
applications as well.
Features and Benefits
• Small size End Caps
• Fast and easy application
• With Inner adhesive layer for moisture sealing
• 3:1 shrink ratio
• Different diameters for wide application range
• Other lengths available on request
The appropriate end cap for every cable diameter, and cable types.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Colour
Black (BK)
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Minimum Shrink
Temperature
+120 °C
Operating Temperature
-45 °C to +125 °C
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm according to IEC 60684
P2
Flammability
self extinguishing in 30 seconds
according to SAE-AMS-DTL-23053/4
One Step to the Web!
L2
PEC-Series expanded.
PEC-Series recovered.
TYPE
PEC-3/1
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Length
(L2)
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
3.0
1.0
1.00
25.0
20.0
50 pcs.
416-00000
PEC-4.8/1.5
4.8
1.5
1.00
30.0
25.0
50 pcs.
416-00003
PEC-6/2
6.0
2.0
1.00
30.0
25.0
50 pcs.
416-00001
PEC-9/3
9.0
3.0
1.40
35.0
27.0
50 pcs.
416-00002
154
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a154
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
End Caps
• Helashrink 1600 Series, low voltage
End caps are suitable for use on both polymeric and paper insulated,
lead jacketed cables which may include aluminium or steel armouring.
Features and Benefits
• Seal cables during storage or transportation
• Insulating cap for live LV cables (0.6/1kV)
• Adhesive lining for excellent environmental seal
• High shrink ratio to minimise number of sizes needed
• Outer end seal marked with lightning flashes to indicate live circuit
• Can be fitted with air valves for pressurised cable applications
• High shrink ratio to minimise number of sizes needed
The appropriate end cap for every cable diameter, and cable types.
a: Expanded form (supplied)
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Colour
Black (BK)
Shrink Ratio
up to 3:1
Minimum Shrink Temperature
+135 °C
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +80 °C
Dielectric Strength
15 kV/mm
Flammability
ASTM D635
b: Fully recovered form (after heating)
TYPE
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
ØH
min. a
ØH
max. b
P±
10%
HW ±
20%
Article-No.
1612-1-B8W
4.0
8.0
10.0
4.0
33.5
2.0
416-12046
1613-1-B8W
6.5
16.0
20.0
6.0
55.3
2.3
416-13054
1601-1-B8W
10.0
19.0
23.8
9.4
89.0
2.0
416-01013
1602-1-B8W
10.0
20.0
23.0
9.4
64.0
2.0
416-02008
1620-1-B5W2
13.0
28.0
35.0
12.7
184.0
3.3
416-20028
1614-1-B8W2
16.0
32.0
40.0
15.0
90.0
3.0
416-14047
1615-1-B8W2
26.0
51.0
63.0
25.0
143.0
3.3
416-15035
1617-1-B8W2
32.0
61.0
76.0
30.0
158.0
4.0
416-17033
1616-1-B8W2
48.0
80.0
100.0
45.0
162.0
4.0
416-16053
1609-1-B5W2
65.0
110.0
120.0
60.0
150.0
4.0
416-09000
1610-1-B5W2
90.0
135.0
160.0
82.0
146.0
4.0
416-10000
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
For these moulded shapes a wide range of material / adhesive combinations are available. Please refer to the moulded shapes catalogue.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a155
155
Insulation
2.2
Heat Shrinkable Moulded Shapes
Hot Melt Tape for Heat Shrinkable Tubing
and Shapes
• HMT200A
Designed for use with heat shrink sleeving and mouldings.
Application Method
1. Clean and preheat the part to be protected.
2. Wrap the tape around the part and overlap.
3. Put the tubing or heat shrinkable shape over the tape and
shrink down.
Features and Benefits
• Hot melt tape flows when heated to seal against moisture
• For heat shrink tubing and mouldings
HMT200A-tape.
Adhesive tape HMT200A for sealing against humidity.
MATERIAL
Ethylenevinylacetate (EVA)
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +105 °C
Melting Point
Starting from +95 °C
Specifications
DEF Stan 59-97 Type W (w)
HMT200A
TYPE
HMT200A
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
0.25
25.0
Translucent (TT)
10 m
354-02260
0.25
25.0
Translucent (TT)
50 m
354-02259
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
156
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a156
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.3
Non Shrinkable Tubing
Rubber Tubing, Chloroprene
• Helsyn H
The chloroprene tubings (H) are ideally suited to rigorous
environments such as aerospace, mass transit and defence markets.
As the material is highly elastic, it’s original size can be expanded
500% on application and 200% in continuous use.
To save time and effort when fitting the tubing, try the
HellermannTyton K, S and SS three prong tools (see Chapter 6.3)
and the Hellerine lubricant (see Chapter 2.3), which are specially
designed for use with HellermannTyton chloroprene tubing.
Features and Benefits
• Highly elastic Chloroprene tubing
• Withstands up to 120°C intermittent temperature
• Covers many cable diameters with one size
• Available in cut lenghts
H rubber tubing is highly flexible and easy to apply.
MATERIAL
Chloroprene (CR)
Operating
Temperature
-65 °C to +95 °C, intermittent 120 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Specifications
BS-3858 Type 1,
BS-4G-198 Part 1 Type 1,
DEF STAN 59-15 D2, IEC 684-3-116
Chloroprene tubing
Supplied
Ø D min.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
H12
1.2
0.70
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-01520
H15
1.5
0.80
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-01600
H20
2.0
0.80
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-01700
H30
3.0
0.80
25.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-01841
H50
5.0
1.00
25.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-01982
H75
7.5
1.30
25.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-02063
H100
10.0
1.50
25.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-02105
H150
15.0
1.70
25.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-02155
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a157
157
Insulation
2.3
Non Shrinkable Tubing
Chloroprene tubing and grommets
• HS
• HT
For years, HellermannTyton tubing and grommets have been the
engineer’s preferred choice for electrical insulation and mechanical
protection in a diverse range of electronic and electrical industries.
To save time and effort when fitting the tubing, try the
HellermannTyton NA three pronged pliers (see Chapter 6.3) and the
Hellerine lubricant (see end of Chapter), which are specially designed
for use with HellermannTyton chloroprene tubing.
Features and Benefits
• Highly elastic Chloroprene tubing
• Easy to fit
• Very good insulating characteristics
• Availabe on reels
Chloroprene tubing.
MATERIAL
Chloroprene (CR)
Operating
Temperature
-25 °C to +100 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB and FMVSS-302
Elongation at break
min. 400%
Chloroprene tubing
Supplied
Ø D min.
Wall
(WT)
Bundle
Ø max.
Reel
Length
Colour
Article-No.
HS0
1.25
0.50
2.0
100 m
Black (BK)
608-00100
HS1
1.75
0.50
3.5
100 m
Black (BK)
608-00150
HS1K
2.50
0.90
4.0
100 m
Black (BK)
608-00200
HS2
3.00
0.60
6.0
100 m
Black (BK)
608-00250
HS2K
4.00
1.50
8.5
50 m
Black (BK)
608-00300
HS3
5.00
0.70
9.0
100 m
Black (BK)
608-00350
HS4
7.50
0.80
13.0
25 m
Black (BK)
608-00400
HS5
10.00
1.00
20.0
25 m
Black (BK)
608-00450
HS8
12.00
1.00
23.0
25 m
Black (BK)
608-00500
HS9
14.00
1.00
25.0
20 m
Black (BK)
608-00550
HS10
17.00
1.00
28.0
20 m
Black (BK)
608-00600
TYPE
158
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a158
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.3
Non Shrinkable Tubing
Chloroprene tubing and grommets
• HT
Chloroprene tubing
Supplied
Ø D min.
Wall
(WT)
Bundle
Ø max.
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
HT0
1.25
0.50
2.0
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-10200
HT1
1.75
0.50
3.5
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-15200
HT1K
2.50
0.90
4.0
25.0
500 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-20250
HT2
3.00
0.60
6.0
25.0
500 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-25250
HT2K
4.00
1.50
8.0
30.0
500 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-30300
HT3
5.00
0.70
9.0
25.0
500 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-35250
HT4
7.50
0.80
13.0
30.0
200 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-40300
HT5
10.00
1.00
20.0
35.0
200 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-45350
HT8
12.00
1.00
23.0
50.0
100 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-50500
HT9
14.00
1.00
25.0
50.0
100 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-55500
HT10
17.00
1.00
28.0
50.0
100 pcs.
Black (BK)
600-60500
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a159
159
Insulation
2.3
Non Shrinkable Tubing
Rubber Tubing, Silicone
• Helsyn SLP
The silicone sleeves (SLP) are halogen free and ideally suited
to rigorous environments such as aerospace, mass transit and
defence markets.
SLP can be used in areas where there will be large numbers of
people in confined areas and sensitive equipment is housed.
Sleeves are available in international resistor colour code, pink
and transparent
Features and Benefits
• Highly elastic rubber tubing made of Silicone
• Withstands up to +250°C intermittent temperature
• Covers many cable diameters with one size
• Available in cut lengths
SLP rubber tubing is highly flexible and easy to apply.
MATERIAL
Silicone (SI)
Operating
Temperature
-65 °C to +180 °C, intermittent 250 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Specifications
BS-2848 Type 5 Class 180T,
BS-3858 Type 5, BS-3G-198 Type 4
Silicone tubing
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Wall
(WT)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
SLP15
1.5
0.50
15.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
606-00381
SLP30
3.0
0.50
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
606-00471
SLP40
4.0
0.50
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
606-00493
SLP50
5.0
0.50
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
606-00714
SLP70
7.0
0.50
20.0
1,000 pcs.
Black (BK)
606-00523
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
160
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a160
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Insulation
2.3
Non Shrinkable Tubing
Installation aid for tubing and grommets
• Hellerine
Hellerine lubricant for tubing and grommets installations.
Features and Benefits
• Effective aid for affixing elastomer sleeves
• Universally employable
• Evaporates after installation
• Consists of 99% vegetable oils
• Discoloration-free
• Offered in 250 ml bottle or in cans of 5 lt or 20 lt
Hellerine lubricant in 284ml plastic bottle.
TYPE
Description
Article-No.
Hellerine assembly aid, 0.25 litre
625-00250
HELLERINE 5 LITER
Hellerine assembly aid, 5 litre
625-05000
HELLERINE 20 LITER
Hellerine assembly aid, 20 litre
625-06000
HELLERINE 0.25 LITER
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a161
161
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Cable Protection Systems
3
3.1 Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
3.2 Braided Sleeving
Helagaine Braided Sleeving
HWPP in polypropylene
168
HEGP standard polyester
175
HWClips
170
HEGPX high-expansion polyester
176
HWBase
170
HLB polyester, in dispenser boxes
177
HAT application tool
171
Twist-In self-closing polyester sleeving
178
Twist-In self-closing polyester sleeving in 5m length
178
HELAHOOK re-closable polyester sleeving with
hook-and-loop seal
179
HSG0 hot cutting tool
180
Spiral Binding
SBPE standard polyethylene
171
SBPA standard polyamide 6
173
Flexible Cable Support
Heladuct Flex
164
174
Date of issue: January 2014
Helawrap Cable Cover and Accessories
3
Cable Protection Systems
3.3 Edge Protection
3.4 Grommets
Grommet Strip
Push-on Caps
184
G51P in polyester
181
Bend Protection Grommets
186
G51N in polyamide 6
182
Strain Protection Grommets
188
Edge Protection Grommets
190
Hot Grommet Kit
192
Beading
Date of issue: January 2014
EdgeGuard PS1, SM1, RA1
183
165
HelaGuard Flexible Conduits and Fittings
Non-Metallic Conduit Systems
Date of issue: January 2014
Metallic Conduit Systems
Spiral-Reinforced Conduit Systems
Date of issue: January 2014
Find more information in our
Engineered Solutions Catalogue
in chapter 3.
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
One Step to the Web!
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Helawrap Cable Cover
• Helawrap HWPP
Helawrap is used to bundle and protect cables in the electrical
industry, panel building, machine, automotive and truck
manufacturing. Helawrap in 25m lengths is the time-saving solution
for industrial applications.
Helawrap in practical 2m lengths is designed for domestic and office
use. It puts an end to the cable chaos associated with PCs, TVs and
Hi-Fi systems.
Features and Benefits
• Ideal solution for bundling, protecting, mounting and
routing cables
• Quick and effortless to apply
• Good abrasion protection
• Special profile enables branching off cable at any point
• Can be removed and reapplied often
• Available in several colours and sizes
• Handy applicator tool included
MATERIAL
Polypropylene (PP)
Operating Temperature
-60 °C to +110 °C,
intermittent +140 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Complete cable management for home and office.
Helawrap, the fast and easy solution
to your cable chaos, available in 2
sizes and 3 colours!
Insert one or more cables into the
insertion slot of the applicator tool.
Place the applicator tool in one end
of the Helawrap cable cover.
Simply slide the applicator tool
through the Helawrap cover.
Helawrap made of flame-retardant
polyamide 6 can be found in the
Engineered Solutions Catalogue.
168
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a168
Date of issue: January 2014
One Step to the Web!
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Helawrap Cable Cover
• Helawrap HWPP
TYPE
HWPP8
HWPP16
HWPP20
HWPP25
HWPP30
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Application
Tool
Article-No.
9
Black (BK)
25 m
HAT8
161-64101
9
Grey (GY)
25 m
HAT8
161-64102
9
Silver (SR)
25 m
HAT8
161-64103
9
White (WH)
25 m
HAT8
161-64104
16
Black (BK)
25 m
HAT16
161-64201
16
Grey (GY)
25 m
HAT16
161-64202
16
Silver (SR)
25 m
HAT16
161-64203
16
White (WH)
25 m
HAT16
161-64207
21
Black (BK)
25 m
HAT20
161-64301
21
Grey (GY)
25 m
HAT20
161-64302
21
Silver (SR)
25 m
HAT20
161-64303
21
White (WH)
25 m
HAT20
161-64304
27
Black (BK)
25 m
HAT25
161-64401
27
Grey (GY)
25 m
HAT25
161-64402
27
Silver (SR)
25 m
HAT25
161-64403
27
White (WH)
25 m
HAT25
161-64407
32
Black (BK)
25 m
HAT30
161-64501
32
Grey (GY)
25 m
HAT30
161-64502
32
Silver (SR)
25 m
HAT30
161-64503
32
White (WH)
25 m
HAT30
161-64504
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
HWPP16L2
HWPP25L2
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Length
(L)
Application
Tool
Article-No.
16
Black (BK)
2m
HAT16
161-64204
16
Grey (GY)
2m
HAT16
161-64205
16
Silver (SR)
2m
HAT16
161-64206
27
Black (BK)
2m
HAT25
161-64404
27
Grey (GY)
2m
HAT25
161-64405
27
Silver (SR)
2m
HAT25
161-64406
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a169
169
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Acessories for retaining Helawrap Open Cable
Cover
• HWClips
Helawrap clips and mounting plates can be linked into chains to
bundle, protect and fix any number of cables on industrial machines.
They can also be used in wiring cabinets, particularly in the door
area where movement is a requirement. Helawrap accessories are
also used to manage cables in the office or home.
Features and Benefits
• Mounts and routes Helawrap cable cover flexibly and efficiently
• Fit snugly around the cable cover and holds it tight
• Each clip can be joined to mounting plate or other clips of any size
• Each clip rotates freely
• Easily released and re-used
• Mounting plates fixed with screws, cable ties or adhesive
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 High
Imp. Mod., Heat Stab.
(PA66HIRHS)
Flexible Polyvinyl
Chloride, cadmium free
(PVC)
Operating
Temperature
-40 °C to +105 °C
-35 °C to +85 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
UL94 V2
The Helawrap accessory set for bundling, fixing and protecting multiple cable runs.
Multiple clips can be joined. Clips
swivel freely.
For secure hold, R1 loop can be used
(for HWClip25 and HWClip30 only).
for Helawrap
size
Material
Colour
Article-No.
HWCLIP08
8
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
161-64002
HWCLIP16
16
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
161-64004
HWCLIP20
20
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
161-64006
HWCLIP25
25
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
161-64008
25, 30
PVC
Black (BK)
201-20010
30
PA66HIRHS
Black (BK)
161-64010
TYPE
R1
HWCLIP30
Subject to technical changes.
• HWBase
TYPE
Colour
Article-No.
HWBASEA
Black (BK)
161-64012
HWBASE
Black (BK)
161-64014
Helawrap HWBase/HWBaseA
170
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a170
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Application Tools for Helawrap Cable Cover
• HAT Tools
Features and Benefits
• Bundle cable rapidly and effortlessly
• Glides smoothly and securely through cover
• Easy insertion of cable
Applicator tools HAT are available for every Helawrap cover size.
TYPE
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
HAT8
Blue (BU)
10 pcs.
161-60001
HAT16
Blue (BU)
10 pcs.
161-60002
HAT20
Blue (BU)
10 pcs.
161-60003
HAT25
Blue (BU)
10 pcs.
161-60004
HAT30
Blue (BU)
10 pcs.
161-60005
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Standard Polyethylene Spiral Binding for general
applications
• SBPE
SBPE spiral binding is suitable for standard electrical applications and
panel building and plant engineering. Sizes 4 and 9 are also available
in practical 5 metre lengths.
Features and Benefits
• Organises and protects cables and hoses
• Suitable for retro-fitting
• Cables branch out at any point
• Wide range of diameters and colours
MATERIAL
Polyethylene (PE)
Operating Temperature
-60 °C to +90 °C, i
ntermittent +120 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Spiral binding SBPE.
Date of issue: January 2014
Spiral binding made of flame-retardant
polyethylene can be found in the Engineered
Solutions Catalogue.
SBPE spiral binding is also avaialble in practical 5m lengths.
One Step to the Web!
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a171
171
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Standard Polyethylene Spiral Binding for
general applications
• SBPE
TYPE
SBPE1.5
SBPE4
SBPE9
SBPE16
Nominal
Ø
Wall
(WT)
Pitch
(P)
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
1.5
0.8
6.0
1.6
8
Black (BK)
30 m
161-41001
1.5
0.8
6.0
1.6
8
Grey (GY)
30 m
161-41002
1.5
0.8
6.0
1.6
8
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-41000
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Black (BK)
30 m
161-41101
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Grey (GY)
30 m
161-41102
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-41100
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Black (BK)
30 m
161-41201
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Grey (GY)
30 m
161-41202
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-41200
16
1.6
16.0
20
150
Black (BK)
30 m
161-41301
16
1.6
16.0
20
150
Grey (GY)
30 m
161-41302
16
1.6
16.0
20
150
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-41300
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
SBPE4D
SBPE9D
Nominal
Ø
Wall
(WT)
Pitch
(P)
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Black (BK)
5m
161-41104
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Grey (GY)
5m
161-41105
4
1.0
7.8
5
20
Natural (NA)
5m
161-41103
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Black (BK)
5m
161-41204
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Grey (GY)
5m
161-41205
9
1.4
12.5
10
100
Natural (NA)
5m
161-41203
172
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a172
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Polyamide Spiral Binding for added strength and
protection against abrasion
• SBPA
SBPA spiral binding is used for cable harnesses in the automobile
industry and for many demanding industrial applications.
Features and Benefits
• Organises and protects cables and hoses
• Very good protection agains abrasion
• Suitable for retro-fitting
• Cables branch out at any point
• Wide range of diameters and colours
SPBA spiral binding offers good protection against abraison.
Spiral binding made of flame-retardant
polyamide 6 can be found in the
Engineered Solutions Catalogue.
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6 (PA6)
Operating Temperature
-60 °C to +95 °C,
intermittent +130 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Nominal
Ø
Wall
(WT)
Pitch
(P)
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
1.5
0.4
6.0
1.6
8
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-42000
SBPA4
4
0.6
7.8
5
20
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-42100
SBPA9
9
1.0
12.5
10
100
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-42200
SBPA16
16
1.2
16.0
20
150
Natural (NA)
30 m
161-42300
TYPE
SBPA1.5
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a173
173
Cable Protection Systems
3.1
Protective Tubing and Spiral Binding
Flexible Cable Support
• Heladuct Flex
Heladuct flexible cable supports are commonly used in switching
cabinets. They are also used in the furniture industry, where cables
need to be routed rapidly and attractively.
Features and Benefits
• Space-saving wiring system
• Highly flexible, can be installed at angles of 90° and higher
• Cable clearly open to view
• Rapid mounting with screws or adhesive strip with high-quality
foam bonding layer
Heladuct Flex- clearly and space-saving arrangement of wiring, even at angles
above 90°.
TYPE
Nominal
Ø
MATERIAL
Polypropylene (PP)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +70 °C
Adhesive
Synthetic rubber with base of
polyethylene foam
Flammability
UL94 V0 (excluding adhesive)
Max. load
on a length
of
500 mm at
70 °C (g)
No. of Wires
Colour
Length
(L)
Article-No.
Heladuct Flex10
10
9 x 0,75 mm²
6 x 1,50 mm²
4 x 2,50 mm²
100
White (WH)
500
164-11008
Heladuct Flex20
20
32 x 0,75 mm²
22 x 1,50 mm²
14 x 2,50 mm²
300
White (WH)
500
164-21008
Heladuct Flex30
30
67 x 0,75 mm²
50 x 1,50 mm²
34 x 2,50 mm²
650
White (WH)
500
164-31008
Heladuct Flex40
40
-
81 x 1,50 mm²
60 x 2,50 mm²
1,100
White (WH)
500
164-41008
Colour
Length
(L)
Article-No.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
Nominal
Ø
Max. load
on a length
of
500 mm at
70 °C (g)
No. of Wires
Heladuct Flex10SK
10
9 x 0,75 mm²
6 x 1,50 mm²
4 x 2,50 mm²
100
White (WH)
500
164-11108
Heladuct Flex20SK
20
32 x 0,75 mm²
22 x 1,50 mm²
14 x 2,50 mm²
300
White (WH)
500
164-21108
Heladuct Flex30SK
30
67 x 0,75 mm²
50 x 1,50 mm²
34 x 2,50 mm²
500
White (WH)
500
164-31108
Heladuct Flex40SK
40
-
81 x 1,50 mm²
60 x 2,50 mm²
400
White (WH)
500
164-41108
174
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a174
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Standard polyester braided sleeving
• Helagaine HEGP
Helagaine HEGP braided sleeving is used in the automotive industry
and in machine construction. It is also used for smaller electrical
appliances to avoid pockets of high temperature. HEGP fulfils the
strict requirement of DIN5510-2 and is therefore also optimal for
railway applications.
Features and Benefits
• Made of sturdy polyester
• Highly flexible
• High abrasion resistance
• Very high surface coverage
• 13 sizes for diameters from 1 - 66 mm for an optimal fit
To prevent fraying, the sleeve can be
cut with the hot cutting tool HSG0,
see page 180.
Braided sleeving made of flame-retardant
polyethylene can be found in the
Engineered Solutions Catalogue.
Helagaine HEGP braided sleeving.
MATERIAL
Polyester (PET)
Operating Temperature
-50 °C to +150 °C,
intermittent +220 °C
Melting Point
+250 °C
Flammability
UL94 V2, FMVSS 302
Specifications
DIN 5510-2
Bundle
Ø min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
HEGP03
1
5
Black (BK)
200 m
170-10300
HEGP04
2
7
Black (BK)
200 m
170-10400
HEGP05
3
9
Black (BK)
200 m
170-10500
HEGP06
4
11
Black (BK)
100 m
170-10600
HEGP08
5
12
Black (BK)
100 m
170-10800
HEGP10
7
15
Black (BK)
100 m
170-11000
HEGP12
8
17
Black (BK)
100 m
170-11200
HEGP15
10
20
Black (BK)
100 m
170-11500
HEGP20
14
26
Black (BK)
50 m
170-12000
HEGP25
18
34
Black (BK)
50 m
170-12500
HEGP30
20
40
Black (BK)
50 m
170-13000
HEGP40
30
50
Black (BK)
50 m
170-14000
HEGP50
40
66
Black (BK)
50 m
170-15000
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Colour grey available on request. Cuts in any lengths. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a175
175
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Standard polyester braided sleeving,
expansion rate: 3:1
• Helagaine HEGPX
Helagaine HEGP and HEGPX braided sleeving is used in the
automobile sector and in machine construction. It is also used for
smaller electrical appliances to avoid pockets of high temperature.
HEGP and HEGPX can be supplied in pre-cut lengths on request.
Features and Benefits
• Made of sturdy polyester
• Highly flexible
• Expansion rate of 3:1
• Easy to apply over irregular shapes
• Good abrasion resistance
• 7 sizes for diameters from 3 - 70 mm for an optimal fit
To prevent fraying, the sleeve can be
cut with the hot cutting tool HSG0,
see page 180.
Braided sleeving made of flame-retardant
polyethylene can be found in the
Engineered Solutions Catalogue.
Helagaine HEGPL Braided Sleeving.
MATERIAL
Polyester (PET)
Operating Temperature
-50 °C to +150 °C,
intermittent +220 °C
Melting Point
+250 °C
Flammability
UL94 V2, FMVSS 302
Specifications
DIN 5510-2, UL-Recognised
Bundle
Ø min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
HEGPX06
3
10
Black (BK)
200 m
170-00060
HEGPX09
5
16
Black (BK)
100 m
170-00090
HEGPX12
6
19
Black (BK)
100 m
170-00120
HEGPX20
13
32
Black (BK)
100 m
170-00200
HEGPX30
19
45
Black (BK)
50 m
170-00300
HEGPX40
32
70
Black (BK)
50 m
170-00400
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
176
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a176
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Colour grey available on request. Cuts in any lengths. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Standard braided sleeving in dispenser boxes
• Helagaine HLB
Helagaine HLB is supplied in practical dispenser boxes and covers a
wide range of applications with only a few sizes. It is ideal for both
the professional and the home user. Helagaine HLB bundles and
effectively protects cables and wires, for instance in HiFi systems
and in industrial plants. Helagaine HLB also provides good resistance
to abrasion.
Features and Benefits
• In practical, space-saving 10m dispenser boxes
• Expansion rate of 3:1
• Bundling diameters from 5mm to 54mm
• Three sizes for very wide range of applications
• Extraction of sleeves
Helagaine HLB: The expansion rate makes it possible. Only three sizes in a
handy dispenser box for almost all standard diameters.
To prevent fraying, the sleeve can be
cut with the hot cutting tool HSG0,
see page 180.
MATERIAL
Polyester (PET)
Operating Temperature
-50 °C to +150 °C,
intermittent +220 °C
Melting Point
+250 °C
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
ØD
Bundle
Ø min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
HLB15
15
5
21
Black (BK)
10.0 m
170-80150
HLB25
25
10
30
Black (BK)
10.0 m
170-80250
HLB35
35
18
54
Black (BK)
10.0 m
170-80350
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a177
177
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Polyester self-closing sleeving
• Helagaine Twist-In
Helagaine Twist-In has many applications in engineering, electronics
and electrical installations. Twist-In in the practical 2m and 5m lengths,
used at home and office, provide perfect cable protection for PC,
TV- and HiFi-equipment.
Features and Benefits
• Self-closing sleeve made of polyester
• Very good protection against abrasion
• Ideal for retro-fitting
• Quick and easy installation and removal
• Allows to bundle for inspection, maintenance and assembly
• Small range of sizes covers a wide range of applications
To prevent fraying, the sleeve can be
cut with the hot cutting tool HSG0,
see page 180.
Helagaine Twist-In gives easy access to cables and wires for inspection,
maintenance and assembly.
Twist-In made of
flame-retardant polyester can be found
in the Engineered
Solutions Catalogue.
MATERIAL
Polyester (PET)
Operating Temperature
-70 °C to +125 °C
Melting Point
+255 °C
Flammability
FMVSS 302, Self extinguishing
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
Twist-In 05
Twist-In Distribution-Pack for
smaller installations.
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
4
5
Black (BK)
150 m
170-01000
Twist-In 08
5
8
Black (BK)
100 m
170-01001
Twist-In 13
10
13
Black (BK)
50 m
170-01002
Twist-In 19
16
19
Black (BK)
25 m
170-01004
Twist-In 25
19
25
Black (BK)
25 m
170-01005
Twist-In 29
25
29
Black (BK)
15 m
170-01006
Twist-In 32
29
32
Black (BK)
15 m
170-01007
Twist-In 38
32
38
Black (BK)
15 m
170-01008
Twist-In 50
38
50
Black (BK)
15 m
170-01010
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
Twist-In 05
4
5
Black (BK)
5m
170-01011
Twist-In 08
5
8
Black (BK)
5m
170-01012
Twist-In 13
10
13
Black (BK)
5m
170-01013
Twist-In 19
16
19
Black (BK)
2m
170-01014
Twist-In 25
19
25
Black (BK)
2m
170-01015
Twist-In 29
25
29
Black (BK)
2m
170-01016
Twist-In 32
29
32
Black (BK)
2m
170-01017
Twist-In 38
32
38
Black (BK)
2m
170-01018
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
178
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a178
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Re-sealable protective sleeving for
post-termination cable organisation
• HELAHOOK
HELAHOOK is used in industrial machines, electrical appliances,
shipbuilding, railway vehicles and in the aerospace industry.
HELAHOOK is also employed in automobiles or commercial vehicles.
It is the ideal solution for post-termination cable organisation and
wherever repeated use is a necessity.
Features and Benefits
• Re-sealable cable protection made of polyester
• Very elastic, fits snugly around the cables
• Hook and loop sealing system can be used for retro-fitting
• High abrasion-resistance
HELAHOOK protective sleeving allows for retrospective fitting and repeated use.
MATERIAL
Polyester (PET)
Operating Temperature
-50 °C to +150 °C
Flammability
UL94 V2, FMVSS 302
Specifications
NF F 16-101
One Step to the Web!
Bundle
Ø min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Colour
Reel
Length
Article-No.
HELAHOOK10
3
15
Black (BK)
25 m
170-05100
HELAHOOK15
10
20
Black (BK)
25 m
170-05150
HELAHOOK20
15
30
Black (BK)
25 m
170-05200
HELAHOOK25
20
40
Black (BK)
25 m
170-05250
HELAHOOK30
25
50
Black (BK)
25 m
170-05300
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cuts in any lengths. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a179
179
Cable Protection Systems
3.2
Braided Sleeving
Hot cutting tool
• HSG0
The HSG0 hand tool is used to cut braided sleeving cleanly and
without fraying.
Features and Benefits
• Light and sturdy
• Heats up quickly with the press of button and cuts in seconds
• The yarn melts and fuses together
• No fraying of the sleeving
The HSG0 hot cutting tool prevents the braided sleeving from fraying.
TYPE
Weight
Colour
Article-No.
HSG0
1.15 kg
Blue (BU)
170-99001
180
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a180
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Cable Protection Systems
3.3
Edge Protection
Cable Protection for sharp-edged cut-out-sections
• Flexiform Edge Protection grommet strip
Flexiform grommet strip is used to protect cables routed through
sharp-edged cutout sections.
Features and Benefits
• Very flexible
• Easily and securely applied without adhesives
• Excellent resistance to high temperatures and most chemicals
• Close-fitting rail for effective, orderly-looking protection
Optimal protection of cables and wires at panel edges.
TYPE
Panel
Thickness
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Height
(H)
MATERIAL
Polyethylene (PE)
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +80 °C, (+120 °C, 200 h)
Flammability
UL94 HB
Height
(H2)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
G51PA
0.40 - 1.30
3.9
1.5
4.3
2.7
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10109
G51PB
1.30 - 2.10
4.6
2.4
4.3
2.7
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10209
G51PC
2.10 - 3.30
5.7
3.5
4.3
2.7
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10309
G51PAA
3.30 - 4.80
2.3
0.9
2.7
1.8
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10009
G51PD
3.30 - 4.80
8.4
5.1
6.2
4.3
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10409
G51PE
4.80 - 6.50
9.9
6.7
6.4
4.5
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10509
G51PF
6.50 - 8.10
11.4
8.3
6.8
4.8
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10609
G51PG
8.10 - 9.70
13.2
10.1
6.8
4.8
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10709
G51PH
9.70 - 12.90
16.4
13.2
6.8
4.8
PE
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-10809
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Flexiform grommet strips are not self-adhesive and therefore not suitable for outer edges.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a181
181
Cable Protection Systems
3.3
Edge Protection
Cable Protection for sharp-edged cut-out-sections
• Flexiform Edge Protection grommet srip
Flexiform grommet strip is used to protect cables routed through
sharp-edged cutout sections.
Features and Benefits
• Very flexible
• Easily and securely applied without adhesives
• Very high abrasion resistance
• Close-fitting rail for effective, orderly-looking protection
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6 (PA6)
Operating Temperature
-60 °C to +95 °C, (+130 °C, 200 h)
Flammability
UL94 HB
Specifications
PAN 6480-A
TYPE
Panel
Thickness
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Material
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
G51NA
0.40 - 1.30
3.9
1.5
4.3
2.7
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21109
G51NB
1.30 - 2.10
4.6
2.4
4.3
2.7
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21209
G51NC
2.10 - 3.30
5.7
3.5
4.3
2.7
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21309
G51ND
3.30 - 4.80
8.4
5.1
6.2
4.3
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21409
G51NE
4.80 - 6.50
9.9
6.7
6.4
4.5
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21509
G51NF
6.50 - 8.10
11.4
8.3
6.8
4.8
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21609
G51NG
8.10 - 9.70
13.2
10.1
6.8
4.8
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21709
G51NH
9.70 - 12.90
16.4
13.2
6.8
4.8
PA6
Natural (NA)
25 m
251-21809
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
182
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a182
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Flexiform grommet strips are not self-adhesive and therefore not suitable for outer edges.
Cable Protection Systems
3.3
Edge Protection
Beading Edge Protection
• EdgeGuard
PVC Beading strip is used to protect cables routed through
sharp-edged cutout sections. It can also be used to provide an
attractive finish to panel edges.
Features and Benefits
• Very flexible
• Easy to apply
• Protects cables from chafing on bulkheads
EdgeGuard.
PS1
MATERIAL
Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride,
cadmium free (PVC)
Operating Temperature
-65 °C to +105 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
RA1
SM1
Width
(W)
Width
(W2)
Width
(W3)
Width
(W4)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
PS1
1.2
0.6
-
-
5.0
3.15
Black (BK)
75 m
800-00200
SM1
5.0
1.0
1.8
4.2
6.3
4.9
Black (BK)
75 m
800-00004
RA1
6.4
2.4
-
-
7.1
5.6
Black (BK)
75 m
800-00001
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a183
183
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Push-on Caps
The protective push-on caps and elbow grommets are specially
constructed to insulate and protect flat pin bushings. The caps and
grommets are used in all areas of automotive electronics and in
electrical connection systems.
Features and Benefits
• Protects effectively against spraying water
• Flexible and easy to apply
• High resistance to chemicals and environmental influences
Push-on caps and elbow grommets in various dimensions.
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Shore Hardness A
70±5
56±5
Nom. 45
Flammability
UL94 HB
UL94 V0
UL94 HB
TYPE
Drawing
Polyvinylchloride, flame-retardant (PVC-FR)
Polyethylene (PE)
-10 °C to +70 °C
Material
Colour
Article-No.
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
631-08190
PVC-FR
Natural (NA)
631-08199
PVC
Black (BK)
631-08200
PVC
Natural (NA)
631-08209
PVC
Black (BK)
631-08230
PVC
Natural (NA)
631-08239
HV4825
PVC
Natural (NA)
631-08259
OP4827
PE
Natural (NA)
631-58279
OP4828
PE
Natural (NA)
631-58289
HV4819
HV4820
HV4823
184
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a184
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Push-on Caps
HV4819
HV4820
HV4823
HV4825
OP4828
OP4827
HV4821
TYPE
Drawing
HV4821
Material
Colour
Article-No.
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
631-08210
PVC-FR
Natural (NA)
631-08219
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a185
185
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Bend protection grommets
Bend protection grommets are typically used for protection of cables
at apertures in casings.
Features and Benefits
• Routes cables free of kinks and breakage
• Provides strain relief
• Flexible and easy to apply
• High resistance to chemicals und environmental influences
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride, flame-retardant
(PVC-FR)
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Shore Hardness A
56±5
Flammability
UL94 V0
HV2101
Drawing
Colour
Article-No.
Black (BK)
632-01010
Grey (GY)
632-01017
White (WH)
632-01019
HV2101A
Black (BK)
632-01020
HV2103
Black (BK)
632-01030
HV2104
Black (BK)
632-01040
HV2107
Black (BK)
632-01070
HV2206
Black (BK)
632-02060
HV2209
Black (BK)
632-02090
HV2210
Black (BK)
632-02100
HV2213
Black (BK)
632-02130
HV2228
Black (BK)
632-02280
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
186
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a186
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Protection of cables and routing free of kinks and breakage.
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Bend protection grommets
HV2206
HV2101
2.5
9.5
HV2101A
HV2209
4.5
HV2103
HV2210
HV2104
HV2213
HV2228
Date of issue: January 2014
HV2107
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a187
187
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Strain protection grommets
Straining protection grommets are used as protection for cables and
wires from pulling. They are also used for bend protection in casing
apertures. They are especially useful in electrical equipment, for
instance in electrical drills.
The use of Hellerine is recommended when working with grommets.
Features and Benefits
• Provides excellent strain relieve
• Flexible and easy to apply
• High resistance to chemicals and environmental influences
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride,
flame-retardant
(PVC-FR)
Operating
Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Shore
Hardness A
56±5
63±5
Flammability
UL94 V0
UL94 HB
TYPE
Flexible Polyvinyl
Chloride, cadmium
free (PVC)
Drawing
H125
Bend and strain protection on casings.
Outside
Ø (OD)
Outside
Ø (OD2)
Outside
Ø (OD3)
ØD
Ø
D2
Material
Colour
Article-No.
9.0
6.0
-
4.0
3.5
PVC
Black (BK)
634-31250
9.0
6.0
-
5.0
4.5
PVC
Black (BK)
634-31260
9.0
6.0
-
5.0
4.5
PVC
Grey (GY)
634-31268
H321
8.5
7.0
8.5
6.0
5.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-03210
H3A
9.0
5.0
8.0
4.5
3.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-00310
H4202
-
-
-
-
-
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-04200
H119
7.0
4.5
6.5
4.5
3.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-01190
H120
8.0
6.0
8.0
4.5
3.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-01200
H121
11.0
8.5
-
8.0
7.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
634-01210
H126
188
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a188
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Strain protection grommets
H125/H126
H119
H120
H121
H321
Date of issue: January 2014
H4202
H3A
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a189
189
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Egde protection grommets
Edge protection grommets are used wherever cable and wires are
routed through outlets and apertures. HellermannTyton grommets
offer excellent mechanical protection.
Features and Benefits
• Protects cables from sharp edges
• Provides additional strain relief
• Flexible and easy to apply
• High resistance to chemicals and environmental influences
Edge protection grommets.
Polyvinylchloride,
flame-retardant
(PVC-FR)
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride
(PVC)
Operating
Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Shore Hardness A
70±5
56±5
Flammability
UL94 HB
UL94 V0
HV1101
HV1201 to HV1218
HV1301 to HV1305
HV1401
HV1402
HV1502 to OP1503
HV1606 to HV1608
HV1606 to HV1608
190
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a190
Date of issue: January 2014
HV1606 to HV1608
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Egde protection grommets
TYPE
Drawing
HV1101
Bundle
Ø max.
Hole Ø
(FH)
ØD
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Material
Colour
Article-No.
25.5
19,0
12.0
10.0
1.6
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-01010
HV1212
9.0
6,0
4.0
7.0
1.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02120
HV1201
9.5
6,4
4.0
5.6
1.6
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02010
HV1201B
9.5
6,4
4.0
6.5
2.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02020
HV1215
10.0
8,0
6.0
5.0
1.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02150
HV1209
11.0
9,0
4.0
5.5
1.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02090
HV1208
14.0
9,5
8.0
8.0
1.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02080
HV1207
14.0
10,0
6.0
6.4
1.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02070
HV1218
14.0
10,0
6.0
9.0
4.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02180
HV1216
14.5
8,0
5.0
6.5
1.5
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02160
HV1210
15.0
9,0
6.0
10.5
2.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02100
HV1203
17.5
12,0
10.0
6.8
2.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02030
HV1204
17.5
12,0
10.0
8.8
4.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02040
HV1206
17.5
12,0
10.0
10.8
6.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02060
HV1205
17.5
13,5
10.0
8.7
4.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-02050
HV1303
15.9
11,0
8.0
6.4
1.6
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-03030
HV1301
15.9
11,0
8.0
7.0
1.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-03010
HV1302
15.9
11,0
8.0
9.0
3.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-03020
HV1304
15.9
11,0
8.0
10.8
6.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-03040
24.0
18,0
14.0
7.0
3.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-03050
24.0
18,0
14.0
7.0
3.0
PVC-FR
White (WH)
633-03059
HV1401
15.9
9,5
5.0
4.8
0.8
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-04010
HV1402
23.0
18,5
6.0
7.0
2.0
PVC-FR
Black (BK)
633-04020
HV1502
11.5
8,0
6.5
8.0
1.5
PVC
Black (BK)
633-05020
HV1606
31.0
25,0
17.0
11.0
3.0
PVC-FR
Grey (GY)
633-06068
HV1607
43.0
37,0
29.0
11.0
3.0
PVC-FR
Grey (GY)
633-06078
HV1608
58.0
52,0
44.0
11.0
3.0
PVC-FR
Grey (GY)
633-06088
HV1305
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a191
191
Cable Protection Systems
3.4
Grommets
Set for Bend and Edge Protection
• HOT Kit
The practical mix of grommets for construction, repairs and home
improvement.
Small, but practical - the HOT Grommet Kit.
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride, flame-retardant
(PVC-FR)
Operating
Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Shore Hardness A
56±5
Flammability
UL94 V0
HV2101
HV1201
HV2210
HV1203
HV2213
Description
Type
Content
Article-No.
Set for Bend and Edge Protection
HOT Kit
-
639-60000
HV2101
15
632-01010
186
Bend Protection Grommets
HV2210
15
632-02100
186
Edge Protection Grommets
Page
HV2213
20
632-02130
186
HV1201
20
633-02010
191
HV1203
15
633-02030
191
HV1208
15
633-02080
190
192
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a192
Date of issue: January 2014
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
For every need the perfect
packaging size!
SBPE spiral binding is also avaialble
in practical 5m lengths.
HIS-3 BAG available in seven
colours and four sizes.
ShrinKit 321 Universal.
For more information
please contact us!
Date of issue: January 2014
HIS-A - with adhesive liner
Highly flexible and with good adhesion
levels HelaTape Flex 15 can be used in
several applications.
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Installation Devices
4
HelaCon series
4.4 Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaCon Plus
198
HelaCon Easy
200
HelaCon Lux
202
Tapes
4.2 Mounting Devices
Down light mounting
device
SpotClip-I
203
SpotClip-II
205
4.3 Cable Installation System
Cable rod system
196
Electrical tapes PVC
Cable Scout+ - Sets
206
Cable Scout+ - Pairs
206
Cable Scout+ - Accessories
207
HelaTape Flex 15 - all purpose PVC
tape
208
HelaTape Flex 1000+ premium PVC
tape
210
HelaTape Flex 2000+ premium
PVC tape for higher mechanical
demands
211
HelaTape Flex 20 - PVC tape for
higher mechanical demands
211
HelaTape Flex 23 - PVC tape for
higher mechanical demands
212
HelaTape Flex 40 - PVC tape for
higher mechanical demands
212
HelaTape Wrap 25 - PVC tape for
corrosion protection
213
Date of issue: January 2014
4.1 Connectors
Installation Devices
Date of issue: January 2014
Rubber and high
voltage tapes
Textile tapes
HelaTape Shield 310 conductive
tape for shielding
213
HelaTape Shield 320 conductive
tape for shielding
214
HelaTape Power 410 - arc and
fireproofing tape
214
HelaTape Power 420 - thermal class
fabric tape
215
HelaTape Power 600 low voltage
tape
215
HelaTape Power 750 - medium
voltage mastic tape
216
HelaTape Power 800 - self-amalgamating silicone high voltage tape
216
HelaTape Power 810 - self-amalgamating high voltage tape
217
HelaTape Power 820 - self-amalgamating high voltage tape, linerless
217
HelaTape Power 900 extra high
voltage tape
218
HelaTape Tex - textile tape
220
197
4
Installation Devices
4.1
Connectors
Connectors
• HelaCon Plus
HelaCon connectors are used for fast, easy and reliable
connection and distribution of cable and conductors in
electrical installation applications.
Features and Benefits
• Sophisticated push-in wire connector
• For professional cable connections in electrical installations
• Double spring for easy assembly
• Supports installers in difficult situations like overhead work
• Correct installation can be visually checked through
transparent housing
• Different colour codes for easy identification of size
• Separate voltage test entry on front
• Safe application, installation and maintenance
A huge variety of connectors from 2 to 8 poles is available according to the
application. The transparent housings allow a quick and easy checking of the
conductor fitting.
MATERIAL
Polycarbonate (PC)
Max Current
24 A
Max Voltage
450 V
Wire Range (VDE)
0.5 to 2.5 mm² solid/stranded
(max 7 cores)
Stripping Length
11 mm
Flammability
UL94 V2
Operating
Temperature
-30 °C to +105 °C
Specifications
CE, cULus, DEMKO, ENEC, FIMKO,
Germanischer Lloyd, KEMA-KEUR,
NEMKO, SEMKO, VDE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page
may have this approval. For product specific
approvals please refer to the Appendix.
198
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a198
Date of issue: January 2014
One Step to the Web!
Connectors of the HelaCon Plus family offering multiple sizes and colours
Installation Devices
4.1
Connectors
Connectors
• HelaCon Plus
Number of
Conductors
Colour
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
HECP-2
2
Transparent (CL), Yellow (YE)
11.8
10.5
19.0
100 pcs.
148-90000
HECP-3
3
Transparent (CL), Orange (OG)
15.9
10.5
19.0
100 pcs.
148-90001
HECP-4
4
Transparent (CL)
20.1
10.5
19.0
75 pcs.
148-90002
HECP-5
5
Transparent (CL), Blue (BU)
24.2
10.5
19.0
50 pcs.
148-90003
HECP-6
6
Transparent (CL), Violet (VT)
28.4
10.5
19.0
50 pcs.
148-90004
HECP-8
8
Transparent (CL), Grey (GY)
36.7
10.5
19.0
40 pcs.
148-90005
TYPE
Drawing
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page
may have this approval. For product specific
approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a199
199
Installation Devices
4.1
Connectors
Connectors
• HelaCon Easy
The HelaCon Easy connectors are used for fast, easy and reliable
connection, distribution of cable and conductors in the field of
electrical installations within junction boxes and control panels.
Features and Benefits
• Fast, easy, reliable push-in wire connectors
• For connection and distribution of conductors in electrical housing
• Use typical range of voltages up to 450 volts
• Variety of input poles for flexible application
• Conductor sizes of: 0.5 up to 1.5 mm² and 1.0 up to 2.5 mm²
The compact design of HelaCon Easy fits perfectly in tight spaces.
Polyamide (PA)
Wire Range
(VDE)
0.5 - 1.5 mm² solid
1.0 - 2.5 mm² solid
Max Current
17.5 A
24 A
Max Voltage
450 V
Stripping
Length
11 mm
Flammability
UL94 V2
Operating
Temperature
-30 °C to +110 °C (VDE), -30 °C to +105 °C
(cULus)
Specifications
ENEC, FIMKO, VDE
CEBEC, cULus, ENEC,
FIMKO, KEMA-KEUR,
VDE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
200
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a200
Date of issue: January 2014
One Step to the Web!
MATERIAL
Installation Devices
4.1
Connectors
Connectors
• HelaCon Easy
Wire Range
(VDE) in mm²
Number of
Conductors
Colour
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
HECE-2
1.0 - 2.5 solid
2
Grey (GY)
10.5
9.5
19.5
100 pcs.
148-90006
HECE-3
1.0 - 2.5 solid
3
Grey (GY)
13.5
9.5
19.7
75 pcs.
148-90007
HECE-4
1.0 - 2.5 solid
4
Grey (GY)
17.2
9.5
19.7
100 pcs.
148-90008
HECE-5
1.0 - 2.5 solid
5
Grey (GY)
21.1
9.5
19.7
100 pcs.
148-90009
HECE-8
1.0 - 2.5 solid
8
Grey (GY)
17.5
16.8
19.0
50 pcs.
148-90010
HECE-3x1.5
0.5 - 1.5 solid
3
Grey (GY)
11.4
8.8
18.5
100 pcs.
148-90013
HECE-5x1.5
0.5 - 1.5 solid
5
Grey (GY)
17.2
8.8
18.5
100 pcs.
148-90015
HECE-8x1.5
0.5 - 1.5 solid
8
Grey (GY)
26.0
8.8
18.5
75 pcs.
148-90018
TYPE
Drawing
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a201
201
Installation Devices
4.1
Connectors
Connectors
• HelaCon Lux
A typical application is lighting installation, where the solid conductor
from concealed cabling has to be connected to a flexible conductor
for lighting. The 2/1 variant allows the looping through of the supply
lines for additional devices.
The conductor on the output/lighting side can easily be inserted by
pressing the locking mechanism and can be released in the same way
at any time. The lighting side can carry any kind of conductor and
makes HelaCon Lux connectors also useful to connect devices that
carry flexible connecting cables like control devices e.g. for blinds, fans
and other drives.
Features and Benefits
• Best suitable to connect solid with flexible wire
• Combines push-in connector with lock/unlock spring mechanism
• For fine-stranded conductors at lighting input
• Use with typical voltage current of 450 V / 24 A
• Either one or two inputs for solid conductor on installation side
• Very flexible application
• Tool-free application for easy, time-saving, safe connection
• Especially for overhead work and when wires are difficult
to access
Quick installation and release of lighting devices with HelaCon Lux.
MATERIAL
Polyamide (PA)
Max Current
24 A
Max Voltage
450 V
Wire Range (VDE)
0.5 (0.75) - 2.5 mm²
Flammability
UL94 V2
Operating Temperature
-5 °C to +100 °C
Specifications
CEBEC, cULus, ENEC, FIMKO,
KEMA-KEUR, VDE
One Step to the Web!
Number of
Conductors
Colour
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Depth
(D)
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
HECL-1/1
2
Grey (GY)
8.1
15.8
20.8
100 pcs.
148-90022
HECL-2/1
3
White (WH)
9.5
15.8
20.8
100 pcs.
148-90023
TYPE
Drawing
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
202
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a202
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Installation Devices
4.2
Mounting Devices
Down light mounting device
• SpotClip-I
SpotClip-I is a unique product that has been developed for mounting
down lights in dry mortarless construction and acoustic construction
applications.
The innovative, 4-leg ceiling brace has a number of outstanding
features and is suitable for use in both panelling and plasterboard.
SpotClip-I consists of non-flammable, fibre-glass reinforced polyamide
and offers a number of thermal and mechanical benefits and can
even be installed retrospectively.
As a result, it opens up a variety of possibilities for applications in both
old and new buildings.
SpotClip-I can be used in ceiling cavities with diameters of 62 to 90 mm.
SpotClip-I ensures that a safe distance is kept between the down
light, insulation foil and roof insulation.
Optimization of 4 fastening feet.
It reduces the risk of damage being caused to any insulation material
as a result of overheating and heat accumulation and may also have a
positive effect on the life time of the lamp.
Cable retainers on the heat protection
top hold the supply cable in place.
SpotClip-I
TYPE
SpotClip-I
Additional retaining spikes prevent
movement during mounting.
One Step to the Web!
Bearing wings ensure that the spacer
locates securely on the plasterboard.
Hole Ø
(FH)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
62 - 90
90.0
82.0
62 - 90
90.0
82.0
Black (BK)
3 pcs.
148-00094
Black (BK)
10 pcs.
148-00076
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a203
203
Installation Devices
4.2
Mounting Devices
Down light mounting device
• SpotClip-I
Features and Benefits
• Mount down lights in dry, mortarless construction and
acoustic construction
• Innovative, 4-leg ceiling spacer
• Suitable for both panelling and plasterboard
• Non-flammable, fibre glass-reinforced polyamide
• Thermal and mechanical benefits
• Can be installed after construction, useful for both old and
new buildings
• Use in ceiling cavities 62-90 mm in diameter
• Keeps safe distance between down light, insulation foil and
roof insulation
• Reduces risk of damage to insulation from overheating,
heat accumulation
• Possible positive effect on lifetime of the lamp
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6, Glassfibre reinforced
(PA66GF15%)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +120 °C
Flammability
UL94 V1, Glow Wire Test (GWT)
960°C
Optimization of 4 fastening feet.
204
SpotClip-II - application with
injected insulation.
SpotClip & SpotClip-II Indispensable accessories for
safe electrical installations.
Push the retaining spikes into the plasterboard to prevent subsequent movement.
Standard spotlight (up to 90 mm height).
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a204
Date of issue: January 2014
SpotClip-II ensures reliability and safety of lighting installations.
Installation Devices
4.2
Mounting Devices
Down light mounting device
• SpotClip-II
SpotClip accessories facilitate the installation of hollow ceiling
embedded spotlights. SpotClips can be inserted easily into the ceiling
cavity, offering considerable time gain when installing a spotlight.
Thanks to their shape and position, SpotClips provide a reliable gap
between the lamp and the insulating material, reducing risks of
overheating and heat build-up. SpotClip-II is suited to installations
with halogen and LED spotlights.
Features and Benefits
• For installing suspended ceiling embedded spotlights
• Insert easily into the ceiling cavity to save considerable time
• Reliable gap between down light and insulating material
• Reduced risk of overheating and heat build-up
• Suitable for installing halogen and LED spots
SpotClip-II ensures reliability and safety of lighting installations.
One Step to the Web!
SpotClip-II – 4 fastening feet +
4 flexible lugs.
H
H2
Optimization of 4 fastening feet.
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6, Glassfibre reinforced
(PA66GF15%)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +120 °C
Flammability
UL94 V1, Glow Wire Test (GWT)
960°C
SpotClip-II.
TYPE
Hole Ø
(FH)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Colour
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
SpotClip-II
62 - 90
115.0
107.0
Black (BK)
10 pcs.
148-00098
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a205
205
Installation Devices
4.3
Cable Installation System
Cable Scout+
• Cable Scout+ - Sets
Features and Benefits
• Professional cable installation tool
• Installation jobs in record time in the most challenging environments
• Rods made of glass-reinforced plastic (GRP)
• Pull cable weight of up to 200 kg
• User can inspect, illuminate and retrieve
• Complete system of rods, useful attachments and storage bag
All components stored neat and tidy with the Cable Scout+ Deluxe set.
One Step to the Web!
Basic Set.
Handy Set.
TYPE
Description
Content
Rods
Rod Capacity
(m)
Content
Accessories
CS-SD
Deluxe Set: a comprehensive
set aimed for carrying out
larger installations.
2 x 4 x 1000 (yellow)
6 x 5 x 1000 (red)
2 x 6 x 1000 (black)
10.0 m
175 white flexi lead, split ring, gender
changer, tuff hook, mini eye, domed bullet,
flat bullet, super beam, single magnet
897-90001
CS-SH
Handy Set: made up for fitting
in a tool box
1 x 4 x 350 (yellow)
2 x 5 x 350 (red)
1 x 6 x 350 (black)
1.6 m
330 white flexi lead, domed bullet, mini
hook, mini eye
897-90003
CS-SB
Standard Set: designed to
1 x 4 x 1000 (yellow)
perform basic cable installation 4 x 5 x 1000 (red)
10.0 m
175 white flexi lead, split ring, gender
changer, tuff hook, mini eye, domed bullet
897-90000
Article-No.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
• Rod Sets - Rod Pairs
Overview of the rods selection.
Content
Rods
Flexibility
ØD
Article-No.
CS-P6
One pair of 1 m
blue rods
strong
6.0
897-90007
CS-PN
One pair of 1 m
nylon rods
fully flexible
5.0
897-90008
CS-P5
One pair of 1 m
red rods
medium
5.0
897-90006
CS-P4
One pair of 1 m
white rods
flexible
4.0
897-90005
r = 220 mm
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
206
r = 450 mm
r = 250 mm
Overview on Rod Sets marginal
bending radii.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a206
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Installation Devices
4.3
Cable Installation System
Cable Scout+
• Cable Scout+ - Further accessories
Cable Scout+ comes with many useful accessories. Cable Grips are
designed to grip objects from the outside and provide a very reliable
super fast method for securing pipes and cables to the rods. Just
open a grip by compressing the braided sleeving, push it over a
cable and let go, the material will contract immediately and establish
a tight grip of the cable to the tool.
Features and Benefits
• Professional cable installation tool
• Installation jobs in record time in the most challenging environments
• Rods made of glass-reinforced plastic (GRP)
• Pull cable weight of up to 200 kg
• User can inspect, illuminate and retrieve
• Complete system of rods, useful attachments and storage bag
Cable Grips are available in five different sizes to attach a wide range of
cable diameters.
The Rod Set Beam - a perfect tool for
seeing into cavities.
The whisk allows the rod to glide
over obstructions easily.
The strong magnet lifts a metallic
tool of up to 2.5 kg.
TYPE
Description
Article-No.
Accessory Kit: Includes a 15 cm long flexi lead, gender changer, mini hook, tuff hook,
mini eye, split ring, round bullet, flat bullet, single magnet, chain
897-90004
CS-ACG1630
Cable Grip: Suitable for diameter 1.6 - 3.0 cm
897-90027
CS-ACG0415
Cable grips: Suitable for diameters 0.4 - 1.5 cm
897-90026
CS-AW
Whisk: Enables cables to glide over rough and uneven surfaces.
897-90018
CS-AB
Beam: Useful for inspection purposes in dark surroundings.
897-90016
Strong Magnet: A helpful tool to lift metal tools with up to 2.5 kg weight
897-90015
CS-SA
CS-AMG2
Drawing
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a207
207
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape
HellermannTyton offers a wide range of PVC and rubber tapes for sealing, insulation and bundling of cable and conduits.
PVC based tapes are designed for low voltage applications and available in a variety of dimensions and colours. Rubber tapes
are best suited for sealing and insulating of cables and splices from low to very high voltage.
Electrical Tapes PVC
• HelaTape Flex 15 - all purpose PVC tape
Features and Benefits
• Insulation tape in several colours
• Highly flexible with good adhesion level
• Flame retardant
• Suitable for mechanical and electrical applications up to 600 volts
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
HTAPE-FLEX15-15x10
HTAPE-FLEX15-MX15x10
HTAPE-FLEX15-15x10
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
Dielectric Strength
40 kV/mm
Adhesion to Steel
2.0 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
1.8 N/10 mm
Elongation at break
200 %
Breaking Strength
24 N/10 mm
Operating Temperature
+90 °C
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00104
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Blue (BU)
710-00100
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Brown (BN)
710-00107
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Green (GN)
710-00103
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
710-00106
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Grey (GY)
710-00108
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Orange (OG)
710-00110
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Red (RD)
710-00101
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Red (RD), Grey (GY), Yellow (YE), Green (GN), Blue (BU),
Orange (OG), White (WH), Brown (BN), Black (BK),
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
710-00146
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Violet (VT)
710-00109
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
White (WH)
710-00105
0.15
15.0
10.0 m
Yellow (YE)
710-00102
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
208
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a208
Date of issue: January 2014
Highly flexible and with good adhesion levels HelaTape Flex 15 can be used in
several applications.
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Electrical Tapes PVC
• HelaTape Flex 15 - all purpose PVC tape
TYPE
HTAPE-FLEX15-15x25
HTAPE-FLEX15-19x20
HTAPE-FLEX15-25x25
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00115
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
710-00111
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Brown (BN)
710-00118
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
710-00114
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
710-00117
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
710-00119
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
710-00112
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Violet (VT)
710-00120
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
710-00116
0.15
15.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
710-00113
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00155
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Blue (BU)
710-00151
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Brown (BN)
710-00158
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Green (GN)
710-00154
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
710-00157
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Grey (GY)
710-00159
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Red (RD)
710-00152
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Violet (VT)
710-00160
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
White (WH)
710-00156
0.15
19.0
20.0 m
Yellow (YE)
710-00153
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00137
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
710-00133
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Brown (BN)
710-00140
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
710-00136
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Green-Yellow (GNYE)
710-00139
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
710-00141
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
710-00134
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Violet (VT)
710-00142
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
710-00138
0.15
25.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
710-00135
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a209
209
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Electrical Tapes PVC
• HelaTape Flex 1000+ premium PVC tape
Features and Benefits
• All-weather, professional grade, self-adhesive vinyl tape
• Excellent performance over wide range of temperatures
• Flame retardant
• Primary insulation for splices up to 600 volts
• Protective outer jacket over splices and all low temperature
applications
HelaTape Flex 1000+ provides excellent performance over a wide range
of temperatures.
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
HTAPE-FLEX1000+19x6
0.18
HTAPE-FLEX1000+19x10
0.18
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
Dielectric Strength
45 kV/mm
Adhesion to Steel
2.2 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
2.0 N/10 mm
Elongation at break
280 %
Breaking Strength
30 N/10 mm
Operating Temperature
-18 °C to +105 °C
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
19.0
6.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00600
19.0
10.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00601
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00602
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Blue (BU)
710-00603
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Brown (BN)
710-00609
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Green (GN)
710-00606
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Grey (GY)
710-00611
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Red (RD)
710-00604
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
White (WH)
710-00607
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
Yellow (YE)
710-00605
HTAPE-FLEX1000+19x33
0.18
19.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00612
HTAPE-FLEX1000+50x33
0.18
50.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00613
TYPE
HTAPE-FLEX1000+19x20
210
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a210
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Electrical Tapes PVC
Electrical Tapes PVC
• HelaTape Flex 2000+ premium PVC tape for higher
mechanical demands
• HelaTape Flex 20 - PVC tape for higher mechanical
demands
As primary insulation for splices up to 600 volts, HelaTape Flex 2000+ is the
best choice.
HelaTape Flex 20 - Additional thickness allows for quicker layering.
Features and Benefits
• All-weather professional grade self-adhesive vinyl tape
• Flame retardant
• 0.21 mm for heavier thickness and more mechanical and electrical
protection
• Primary insulation for splices up to 600 volts
• Excellent cold weather performance
Features and Benefits
• Special high level adhesive
• Flame retardant
• Suitable for mechanical and electrical applications up to 600 volts
• Additional thickness for quicker layering and added abrasion
resistance
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
Dielectric Strength
48 kV/mm
Dielectric Strength
45 kV/mm
Adhesion to Steel
2.2 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Steel
4.0 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
2.0 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
3.8 N/10 mm
Elongation at break
300 %
Elongation at break
220 %
Breaking Strength
35 N/10 mm
Breaking Strength
38 N/10 mm
Operating Temperature
-18 °C to +105 °C
Operating Temperature
+105 °C
• HelaTape Flex 2000+ premium PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
TYPE
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
HTAPE-FLEX2000+19x6
0.21
19.0
6.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00700
HTAPE-FLEX2000+19x20
0.21
19.0
20.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00701
HTAPE-FLEX2000+25x33
0.21
25.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00702
HTAPE-FLEX2000+38x33
0.21
38.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00703
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Flex 20 - PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
TYPE
HTAPE-FLEX20-19x20
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.20
19.0
20.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00300
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a211
211
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Electrical Tapes PVC
Electrical Tapes PVC
• HelaTape Flex 23 - PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
• HelaTape Flex 40 - PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
HelaTape Flex 23 for higher mechanical and electrical demands.
HelaTape Flex 40 for higher abrasion resistance.
Features and Benefits
• Special high level adhesive
• Flame retardant
• Suitable for mechanical and electrical applications up to 600 volts
• Additional thickness for quicker build-up and added abrasion
resistance
Features and Benefits
• Special high level adhesive
• Flame retardant
• Suitable for mechanical and electrical applications up to 600 volts
• Additional thickness for quicker build-up and added abrasion
resistance
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
Dielectric Strength
48 kV/mm
Dielectric Strength
35 kV/mm
Adhesion to Steel
4.0 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Steel
4.2 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
3.8 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
4.0 N/10 mm
Elongation at break
240 %
Elongation at break
280 %
Breaking Strength
45 N/10 mm
Breaking Strength
86 N/10 mm
Operating Temperature
+105 °C
Operating Temperature
+105 °C
• HelaTape Flex 23 - PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
TYPE
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
HTAPE-FLEX23-19x33
0.23
19.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00401
HTAPE-FLEX23-38x33
0.23
38.0
33.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00403
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
HTAPE-FLEX40-50x30
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.40
50.0
30.0 m
Black (BK)
710-00500
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
212
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a212
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Flex 40 - PVC tape for higher mechanical demands
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Electrical Tapes PVC
HelaTape Shield - Conductive tapes
• HelaTape Shield 310 - self-amalgamating,
conductive tape for shielding
• HelaTape Wrap 25 - PVC tape for corrosion protection
HelaTape Wrap 25 can be used for both overhead and direct burial applications.
HelaTape Shield 310 self-amalgamating conducting tape for shielding
high-voltage splices and terminations.
Features and Benefits
• Special adhesive
• Excellent protection against corrosion
• Complete environmental, mechanical and electrical protection
• Resistant to UV, bacteria and fungus
• Used for both overhead and direct burial applications
Features and Benefits
• 0.76 mm self-amalgamating, ethylene propylene rubber
conducting tape
• Shields high-voltage splices and terminations
• Excellent conducting properties
• Prevents corona effect
• Moisture and UV-resistant and easy to apply
• Used for rebuilding strand and insulation shields on
high-voltage splices
MATERIAL
Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
MATERIAL
Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR)
Dielectric Strength
40 kV/mm
Operating Temperature
+90 °C
Adhesion to Steel
2.4 N/10 mm
Adhesion to Backing
2.0 N/10 mm
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+130 °C
Elongation at break
250 %
Water Absorption
0.02 %
Breaking Strength
48 N/10 mm
Tensile Strength
2.0 MPa
Operating Temperature
+105 °C
Elongation at break
600 %
Volume Resistance
870 Ω cm
• HelaTape Wrap 25 - PVC tape for corrosion protection
TYPE
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
25.0
38.0
50.0
100.0
30.0 m
30.0 m
30.0 m
30.0 m
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
710-00800
710-00801
710-00802
710-00803
HTAPE-WRAP25-25x30
HTAPE-WRAP25-38x30
HTAPE-WRAP25-50x30
HTAPE-WRAP25-100x30
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Shield 310 - self-amalgamating, conductive tape for shielding
TYPE
HTAPE-SHIELD310
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.76
0.76
19.0
38.0
4.6 m
9.1 m
Black (BK)
Black (BK)
711-00000
711-00001
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a213
213
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape Shield - Conductive tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Shield 320 - tinned copper tape for shielding
• HelaTape Power 410 - arc and fireproofing tape
HelaTape Shield 320 provides good electromagnetic shielding.
HelaTape Power410 is an unsupported, liner less, elastomeric tape possessing
superior arc and flame resistance.
Features and Benefits
• All-copper knit mesh
• Excellent pliability when applied in the field
• Easy application
• Good electromagnetic shielding
Features and Benefits
• Unsupported, linerless, elastomeric tape
• Superior arc and flame resistance
• For cable protection in all type of applications
• Excellent flexibility and conformability for easy application
• Creates insulating residue when exposed to severe flame conditions
• Water, chemical and UV resistant
MATERIAL
Tin Plated copper
MATERIAL
Elastomer (PM)
Elongation at break
5%
Tensile Strength
8 MPa
Elongation at break
300 %
• HelaTape Shield 320 - tinned copper tape for shielding
TYPE
HTAPE-SHIELD320
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
25.0
4.6 m
Natural (NA)
711-00002
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER410
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.76
38.0
6.0 m
Grey (GY)
711-00100
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
214
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a214
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Power 410 - arc and fireproofing tape
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 420 - thermal class fabric tape
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 600 low voltage tapes
HelaTape Power 420 is a woven glass fabric tape with a service temperature
rating of 130°C.
HelaTape Power 600 is a self-amalgamating low-voltage rubber tape.
Features and Benefits
• Woven glass fabric tape with thermosetting rubber-based
self adhesive
• High tensile strength
• Excellent tear and abrasion resistance
• Operating temperature rating of 130°C
Features and Benefits
• Self-amalgamating low-voltage rubber tape
• Primary insulation at not more than 600 volts
• Easily conforms to irregular shapes and surfaces,
• Void-free electrically stable layering
• Compatible with all extruded dielectric cable insulations
MATERIAL
Glassfibre Cloth (GF-F)
MATERIAL
Natural Rubber (NR)
Operating Temperature
+130 °C
Operating Temperature
+80 °C
Tensile Strength
6.5 MPa
Elongation at break
5%
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+95 °C
Tensile Strength
2.40 MPa
Elongation at break
450 %
Volume Resistance
10¹³ Ω cm
Dielectric Strength
25 kV/mm
• HelaTape Power 420 - thermal class fabric tape
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER420
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.18
19.0
20.0 m
White (WH)
711-00101
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
• HelaTape Power 600 low voltage tapes
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER600
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.76
19.0
6.7 m
Black (BK)
711-00200
0.76
38.0
6.7 m
Black (BK)
711-00201
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a215
215
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 800 - self-amalgamating silicone high
voltage tape
• HelaTape Power 750 - medium voltage mastic tape
HelaTape Power 750 is a self-amalgamating, medium-voltage
insulating compound.
HelaTape Power 800 is a silicone rubber tape with triangular cross-section.
Features and Benefits
• Self-amalgamating, medium-voltage insulating compound
• For quick, void-free insulation layering
• Easily moulded by hand to conform to irregular shapes
• Primary insulation for splices up to 5 kV with other
insulating tapes
• Ideal for covering split bolts, padding bus bar edges
and connections
• Excellent seal against moisture
Features and Benefits
• Self-amalgamating, chemically cross-linked silicone rubber tape
• Triangular cross-section with centre line for precise
half-overlapping
• Resistant to creepage and surface erosion
• Fuses into solid mass within minutes of application
• No adhesive coating
• Non-contaminating, self-cleaning surface
MATERIAL
Isobutene-Isoprene-Rubber
(butyl rubber) (IIR)
Operating Temperature
+80 °C
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+95 °C
Water Absorption
0.13 %
Tensile Strength
0.35 MPa
Elongation at break
1000 %
Volume Resistance
10¹³ Ω cm
MATERIAL
Silicone (SI)
Operating Temperature
+180 °C
Tensile Strength
3.5 MPa
Elongation at break
400 %
Dielectric Strength
23.5 kV/mm
• HelaTape Power 750 - medium voltage mastic tape
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER750
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
3.20
38.0
1.5 m
Black (BK)
711-00300
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER800
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.51
25.0
9.1 m
Grey (GY)
711-00400
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
216
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a216
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Power 800 - self-amalgamating silicone high voltage tape
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 810 - self-amalgamating high voltage tape
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 820 - self-amalgamating high voltage
tape, linerless
HelaTape Power 810 enables jacketing splices up to 69 kV.
The high-voltage tape HelaTape Power 820 yields a uniform and void-free
build-up.
Features and Benefits
• 0.76 mm thick ethylene propylene rubber
• Self-amalgamating and jackets splices up to 69 kV
• Halogen-free with outstanding corona, ozone and UV-resistance
• Amalgamates quickly
• Void-free, electrically stable layering
• Ideal for water-proofing
• Excellent moisture, corrosion and chemical resistance
Features and Benefits
• Ethylene rubber-based, high-voltage tape
• Excellent electrical, chemical and physical properties
• Liner-less, self-bonding tape
• Much quicker taping speeds tapes with liner
• Uniform and void-free layering
• Excellent stretch to conform to the most complex shapes
and contours
MATERIAL
Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR)
MATERIAL
Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR)
Operating Temperature
+90 °C
Operating Temperature
+90 °C
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+130 °C
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+130 °C
Water Absorption
0.06 %
Water Absorption
0.06 %
Tensile Strength
2.50 MPa
Tensile Strength
3.30 MPa
Elongation at break
930 %
Elongation at break
900 %
Volume Resistance
1016 Ω cm
Volume Resistance
1016 Ω cm
Dielectric Strength
35 kV/mm
Dielectric Strength
35 kV/mm
• HelaTape Power 810 - self-amalgamating high voltage tape
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER810
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.76
19.0
9.1 m
Black (BK)
711-00401
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Date of issue: January 2014
• HelaTape Power 820 - self-amalgamating high voltage tape, linerless
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER820
Thickness (T)
Width (W)
Length (L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.76
19.0
9.1 m
Black (BK)
711-00402
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a217
217
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
HelaTape Power - Rubber and higher voltage tapes
• HelaTape Power 900 extra high voltage tapes
Features and Benefits
• Ethylene rubber-based, high-voltage tape
• Superior electrical, chemical, mechanical and thermal properties
• Fuses quickly for void-free, electrically stable layering
• Insulates and jackets splices on power cables from 600 volts
up to 138 kV
• To build stress cones and termination jackets on cables up to 35 kV
• Outstanding corona, ozone, chemical and corrosion resistance
• Withstands UV and cable impregnates
TYPE
HTAPE-POWER900
HelaTape Power 900 - For insulating and jacketing splices on power cables
from 600 volts up to 138 kV.
MATERIAL
Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR)
Operating Temperature
+90 °C
Intermittent Operating
Temperature
+130 °C
Water Absorption
0.02 %
Tensile Strength
3.5 MPa
Elongation at break
880 %
Volume Resistance
1016 Ω cm
Dielectric Strength
38 kV/mm
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.51
19.0
9.1 m
Black (BK)
711-00500
0.51
25.0
9.1 m
Black (BK)
711-00501
0.51
38.0
9.1 m
Black (BK)
711-00502
218
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a218
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
HellermannTyton’s extensive
product range provides full end
to end solutions for cabling project
of any size to all types of business.
the sky is the limit
Better Technology through Innovation
Date of issue: January 2014
Find more information in our
Connectivity Catalogue.
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Technical Tapes
• HelaTape Tex - textile tapes
Features and Benefits
• High quality textile tapes based on cotton
• Highly tear-resistant in longitudinal direction
• Easy to strip-off by hand in lateral direction
• Various colours and the matt finish of the surface for use in stage
and set building where light reflections must be avoided
• Useful for various applications like bundling, fixing, identification
• Tape can be removed without residues due to high quality rubber
based adhesive
TYPE
HTAPE-TEX-12x50
HTAPE-TEX-15x25
HTAPE-TEX-15x50
MATERIAL
Cotton (CO)
Adhesion to Backing
3 N/10 mm
Breaking Strength
64 N/10 mm
Elongation at break
10%
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +80 °C
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00304
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00300
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00303
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00306
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00301
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
White (WH)
712-00305
0.31
12.0
50.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00302
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00054
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00050
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00053
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00056
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00051
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
712-00055
0.31
15.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00052
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00404
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00400
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00403
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00406
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00401
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
White (WH)
712-00405
0.31
15.0
50.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00402
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
220
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a220
Date of issue: January 2014
HelaTape Tex is available in various colours and sizes.
Installation Devices
4.4
Electrical and Technical Tapes
Technical Tapes
• HelaTape Tex - textile tapes
TYPE
HTAPE-TEX-19x25
HTAPE-TEX-19x50
HTAPE-TEX-25x25
HTAPE-TEX-25x50
HTAPE-TEX-50x25
Date of issue: January 2014
HTAPE-TEX-50x50
Thickness
(T)
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Colour
Article-No.
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00154
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00150
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00153
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00156
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00151
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
712-00155
0.31
19.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00152
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00504
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00500
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00503
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00506
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00501
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
White (WH)
712-00505
0.31
19.0
50.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00502
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00254
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00250
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00253
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00256
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00251
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
712-00255
0.31
25.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00252
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00604
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00600
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00603
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00606
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00601
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
White (WH)
712-00605
0.31
25.0
50.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00602
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00354
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00350
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00353
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00356
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00351
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
White (WH)
712-00355
0.31
50.0
25.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00352
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Black (BK)
712-00904
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Blue (BU)
712-00900
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Green (GN)
712-00903
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Grey (GY)
712-00906
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Red (RD)
712-00901
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
White (WH)
712-00905
0.31
50.0
50.0 m
Yellow (YE)
712-00902
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a221
221
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Identification Systems
5
5.1 Label Selection
Pre-printed cable markers
Product Selection
Helagrip, slide on, chevron cut
247
Label selection flowchart
226
Ovalgrip, slide on, straight cut
250
Size Selection Guide: Heat Shrink - Cable Diameters
228
WIC, snap on
252
Size Selection Guide: Preprinted Markers - Cable Diameters
229
Identification for marking cable bundles
Size Selection Guide: Self Laminating Labels - Cable Diameters
229
Arrowtag - Identification plates
255
Q-tags - Identification plates
256
Material Information
Laser Printer
231
IMP and IT Plates - Identification plates
257
Dot Matrix Printer
231
IT Ties - Identification ties
258
Manual
231
Adhesive labels for ties, plates, and tags, thermal transfer
Thermal Transfer
232
Helatag 1210 (White)
259
5.2 Wire and Cable Markers
Helatag 1211 (Yellow gloss)
260
Heat-shrinkable wire identification, thermal transfer
Carrier marking system, laser
234
Helafix HC and HCR Carriers
261
TULT DS - 3:1 'Ladder Style' Sleeves
236
Helafix HFX Labels
262
TCGT - 3:1 Commercial Grade Tubing
238
5.3 Control Panel Labelling
Labels for control panel identification, thermal transfer
Identification tags for cable bundle, thermal transfer
TIPTAG, halogenfree
240
Helatag 323 (White-Transparent), high temperature
Helatag 880 (Yellow matt), removable
263
Helatag 1216 (White)
264
242
Labels for control panel identification, laser
Helatag 1102 (Yellow)
265
243
Helatag 1101 (White)
266
244
Cotton cloth labels, manual marking
Self-laminating labels, laser
Helatag 1104 (White-Transparent)
Helatag 1105 (White-Transparent)
Self-laminating labels, dot matrix
Helatag 101 (White-Transparent)
245
Self-laminating labels, manual marking
RiteOn, Material 1401 dispenser
224
263
241
Self-laminating labels, thermal transfer
Helatag 1209 (White-Transparent)
Helatag 1211 (Yellow gloss)
246
HELASIGN, Material 270 (Yellow), Booklet
267
HELASIGN, Material 270 (Yellow), A4 Sheets
268
HELASIGN, Material 265 (White), A4 Sheets
269
Date of issue: January 2014
TULT - 3:1 UL-Recognized Tubing
5
Identification Systems
5.4 Industrial Identification
5.6 Hazardous Area Identification
Panel plate labels, thermal transfer
Stainless Steel Printing System
Helatag 1220 (White)
270
M-BOSS Lite Printer
285
Helatag 1221 (Silver)
271
M-BOSS Lite Markers
285
Type label identification, thermal transfer
Helatag 1204 (Silver)
Stainless Steel Marking System, manual
272
Asset identification label, thermal transfer
Helatag 1206 (White)
273
Component labelling, thermal transfer
Helatag 1210 (White)
275
276
Type label identification, laser
286
Protective laminates, thermal transfer
Helatag 1207 (Transparent)
287
Helatag 323 (Transparent), high temperature
287
Thermal Transfer Printer
TT4000+, High volume printing
288
Helatag 1103 (Silver)
277
TT430, Small to medium volume printing
289
Helatag 1102 (Yellow)
278
Selection matrix: materials and ribbons
290
Helatag 1101 (White)
279
Thermal Transfer Ribbons for
Warehouse and pipe labelling, thermal transfer
Helatag 1213 (Various colours)
280
Circuit board labels (ESD), thermal transfer
Helatag 823 (White), PCB labelling
Date of issue: January 2014
286
Hellermark SSM
5.7 Printers and Software
Asset tracking labels, thermal transfer
Helatag 1205 (White), removable
Hellermark SSC
Adhesive Labels
291
Heatshrink and TIPTAGs
292
Thermal Transfer Printer Accessories
281
S4000 Cutter
293
5.5 Security Labelling
P4000 Perforator
293
Tamper evident security labelling, thermal transfer
Labelling Software
Helatag 1203 (Silver)
282
Helatag 1208 (White), fragmenting
284
TagPrint Pro
294
225
Identification Systems
5.1
Product Selection
Label Selection
Use our flowchart to find the right label or identification material.
Select the object to be identified (flat or curved surface) and its surface
quality (smooth or rough). Depending on what you require from our
identification systems, you will be guided through the flowchart to
the end. Please note that we have highlighted the respective printer
technology (thermal transfer, matrix or laser printer, etc.) in colour.
When selecting the material, the general rule is that a higher quality
material can of course be used for lower requirements (e.g. a material
for operating temperatures of over +90 °C can also be used for
temperatures below +90 °C). And you can, of course, always ring us
on our usual telephone numbers.
Labels - surface smooth
Temperature
Attributes
Certifications
Material Code
Page
1210
259/275
1211
260/263
1213
280
1216
264
1220
270
1221
271
265
269
270
267/268
880
263
1101
266/279
1102
265/278
1103
277
1204
272
1206
273
1207
287
323
287
823
281
1203
282
1208
284
1205
276
permanent
up to +90 °C
removable
over +90 °C
permanent
UL
special UV-stabilised
ESD safe
permanent
over +90 °C
UL/CSA
over +90 °C
226
removable
UL
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a226
Date of issue: January 2014
tamper evident
Identification Systems
5.1
Product Selection
Labelling material for:
Approvals:
TT printer
Laser printer
1. UL: Underwriter Laboratories
Matrix printer
Handwritten identification
2. LUL: RSE STD 013
3. CSA: Canadian Standards Authority
Labels - surface rough
Temperature
Attributes
Certifications
permanent
up to +90 °C
Material Code
Page
1210
259/275
1211
260/263
1216
264
1220
270
1221
271
265
269
270
267/268
Material Code
Page
101
245
1209
241
1401
246
265
269
270
267/268
323
242
1104
243
1105
244
removable
Labels - cables/tubes smooth
Temperature
Attributes
Certifications
permanent
up to +90 °C
removable
over +90 °C
permanent
Date of issue: January 2014
Heat shrink marker - cable/tubes rough
Temperature
Attributes
Certifications
Material Code
Page
up to +90 °C
halogenfree
LUL
TIPTAG HF
240
high
temperature
UL/CSA
TULT
234/236
over +90 °C
CSA
TCGT
238
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a227
227
Identification Systems
5.1
Product Selection
Size Selection Guide
Heat Shrink - Cable Diameters
39-13
24-8
18-6
12-4
9-3
34.6-18.4
20.8-11.2
15.6-8.4
10.4-5.6
7.8-4.2
4.8-1.6
6-2
5.2-2.8
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a228
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0
30.5
31.0
31.5
32.0
32.5
33.0
33.5
34.0
34.5
Date of issue: January 2014
228
4.2-2.2
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0
30.5
31.0
31.5
32.0
32.5
33.0
33.5
34.0
34.5
2.6-1.4
3-1
mm od
(3:1)
TULT DS & TULT/TCGT
mm od
Ideal Outside Diameter
Identification Systems
5.1
Product Selection
Size Selection Guide
Self Laminating Labels - Cable Diameters
Preprinted Markers - Cable Diameters
Ideal Outside Diameter
Ideal Outside Diameter
7.0
7.0
7.5
7.5
8.0
8.0
9.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
10.5
11.0
11.0
11.5
11.5
12.0
12.0
12.5
12.5
13.0
13.0
13.5
14.0
9.1-18.2
9.5
10.0
13.5
mm od
WIC3
WIC2
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.3-5.3
6.5
6.1-12.1
6.5
2.5
2.0
2.8-3.8
6.0
WIC1
5.5
2.0
2-2.8
5.5
HODS85
5.0
1.5
1.8-6.3
4.5
5.0
HODS50
4.5
1.5
1.7-3.6
4.0
HGDC4-9
4.0
1.0
4.5
4.5
5.0
5.0
5.5
5.5
6.0
6.0
4-9
3.5
HGDC2-5
3.5
WIC
1.0
2-5
3.0
HGDC1-3
2.5
3.0
Ovalgrip
1-3
2.0
2.5
mm od
1.5
2.0
8.5
Helagrip
mm od
RO203
RO202
1.0
1.5
4-8.1
1.0
6.0
Date of issue: January 2014
RO201
mm od
RiteOn
6.5
6.5
7.0
7.0
7.5
7.5
8.0
8.0
8.5
8.5
9.0
9.0
9.5
9.5
14.0
14.5
14.5
15.0
15.0
15.5
15.5
16.0
16.0
16.5
16.5
17.0
17.0
17.5
17.5
18.0
18.0
18.5
18.5
19.0
19.0
19.5
19.5
20.0
20.0
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a229
229
Identification Systems
5.1
Product Selection
Size Selection Guide
Self Laminating Labels - Cable Diameters
23.7-47.5
20.8-47.5
18.2-36.4
20.8-47.5
17.8-35.6
12-37.5
11.1-22.3
11.8-23.6
10-22.2
10-22.2
8.5-18.2
7.7-15.5
8-16
6.7-13.5
7.1-14.3
5.5-12.1
5.5-12.1
5.8-11.6
5.1-10.1
5.1-10.1
4.5-10
4.5-10
3.8-7.6
3.8-7.6
3.5-7.6
3.8-7.6
3.5-7.6
3.5-7.6
2.4-4.8
2.6-5.3
mm od
TAG23
TAG07
TAG38
TAG139
TAG8
TAG107
TAG138
TAG145
TAG6
TAG3
TAG1
TAG91
TAG136
TAG137
TAG135
TAG10
TAG9
TAG09
TAG134
TAG133
TAG25
TAG23
TAG02
TAG132
TAG131
TAG24
TAG22
TAG2
TAG49
TAG130
TAG36
TAG51
TAG26
1.5-3
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a230
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0
30.5
31.0
31.5
32.0
32.5
33.0
33.5
34.0
34.5
35.0
35.5
36.0
36.5
37.0
37.5
38.0
38.5
39.0
39.5
40.0
40.5
41.0
41.5
42.0
42.5
43.0
43.5
44.0
44.5
45.0
45.5
46.0
46.5
47.0
47.5
Date of issue: January 2014
230
2-4.7
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
20.5
21.0
21.5
22.0
22.5
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
25.5
26.0
26.5
27.0
27.5
28.0
28.5
29.0
29.5
30.0
30.5
31.0
31.5
32.0
32.5
33.0
33.5
34.0
34.5
35.0
35.5
36.0
36.5
37.0
37.5
38.0
38.5
39.0
39.5
40.0
40.5
41.0
41.5
42.0
42.5
43.0
43.5
44.0
44.5
45.0
45.5
46.0
46.5
47.0
47.5
1,35-3
mm od
Ideal Outside Diameter
Identification Systems
5.1
Material Information
Material Specifications
Laser
Material
1101
1102
Material Description
Polyester, white
Material Application
Permanent identification of assets
and components, particularly suitable for
identification of switch panels
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
1103
Polyester, yellow
1104
1105
Polyester, silver (SR)
Polyester self-laminating, super
transparent with white write on area.
Permanent identification of assets
and components. Particularly
suitable for type- and nameplates.
Self-laminating wire and cable
marking, also suitable for flat cables
23 µm
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Material Durability
2 years external weathering (central European climate)
50 µm
from +5 °C
Label Type
Certification /
Specification
Page
266, 279
265, 278
277
243
Dot-Matrix
Material
Manual
101
Material Description
A self laminating transparent
vinyl material with acrylic
adhesive. Write on area is
white.
244
Material
265
270
1401
Self-laminating super
transparent vinyl with
white write on area
(WHCL)
Material Description
Type 265,
white cotton
cloth material
Material Application
Used for wire marking round
and flat ribbon cable.
Material Application
Temporary/permanent identification
of assets and components,
particularly suitable for switch panels
Self laminating cable
and wire marking
(also suitable for flat
ribbon cables)
Thickness of Foil (µm)
75 µm
Thickness of Foil (µm)
150 µm
90 µm
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +80 °C
Operating Temperature
-29 °C to +80 °C
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Adhesive
Synthetic rubber
Acrylic
Material Durability
2 years external weathering
(central European climate)
Material Durability
1 year external weathering
(central European climate)
2 years external
weathering (central
European climate)
Label Type
Type 270,
yellow cotton
cloth material
Label Type
Page
245
Page
269
267, 268
246
Plain labels
Date of issue: January 2014
Self-laminating labels
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a231
231
Identification Systems
5.1
Material Information
Material Specifications
Thermal Transfer
Material
323
823
880
Material Description
Polyvinylflouride foil, transparent with
white write on area (WHCL). The foil has
got an excellent resistance against a
wide variety of chemicals and solvents.
The material is flame retardant.
Transparent polyvinylidene
fluoride foil. The foil is excellent
resistance against a big variety
of chemicals and solvents.
The material is flame retardent.
A gloss white,
heat resistant polyester.
Vinyl, matt yellow (YE)
Material Application
Self-laminating wire and cable
identification for extremely dirty
environments.
Protective laminate for labels
in extreme dirty environments.
Especially designed for military
and aeronautic applications.
Electrostatic sensitive
applications.
General Identification.
Suitable for temporary
and permanent
identification.
Mech.
Material Properties
permanent adhesive, extremely
scratch resistant
use as protective over-laminate
or clear printable label
according to ESD requirements of EIA 625 and 541
Adhesive removable
without traces
Thickness of Foil (µm)
25 µm
51 µm
80 µm
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +140 °C
-40 °C to +150 °C
-40 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
At vertical exposure to
weathering (central
European climate) 2 years.
Foil becomes slightly
yellow when exposed to
direct sunlight.
2 years external
weathering (central
European climate)
Material Durability
5 years external weathering
(central European climate). Excellent indoor use.
Label Type
Page
242
287
281
263
Thermal Transfer
Material
1203
1204
1205
Material Description
Polyester, silver (SR), tamper
proof, adhesive suitable for
critical surfaces
A silver-matt, highly heat
resistant, reverse side
aluminised Polyester. Adhesive
suitable for critical surfaces.
Polyester, white (WH),
with adhesive that is
removable without
residuals
A white glossy material suitable
for printing with thermal transfer
printers. Adhesive suitable for
critical surfaces.
1206
Material Application
Electrical and electronic
identification. Security and
warranty identification of
components, housings and
nameplates.
Electro and electronical
identification. Permanent
identification of components
and housings with type labels.
Electro and electronical
identification.
Temporary identification
of components and
housings.
Electro and electronical
identification. Permanent
identification of components
with type labels.
Mech.
Material Properties
tamper proof identification,
leaves small checkboard
traces
permanent adhesive, suitable
for critical surfaces
removable without
residuals
permanent adhesive, suitable for
critical surfaces
Thickness of Foil (µm)
53 µm
55 µm
58 µm
50 µm
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +120 °C
-40 °C to +150 °C
-40 °C to +120 °C
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from +7 °C
from 0 °C
from +15 °C
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Material Durability
2 years external weathering (central European climate)
At vertical exposure
to weathering (central
European climate)
2-3 years.
2 years external weathering
(central European climate)
Certification /
Specification
Page
232
282
272
276
273
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a232
Date of issue: January 2014
Label Type
Identification Systems
5.1
Material Information
Material Specifications
Thermal Transfer
Material
1207
1208
1209
1210
Polyester, transparent (CL),
very temperature resistant,
high adhesiveness, extrepely
chemical resistant.
Acetate foil,
white (WH),
tamper proof
A white/clear, smooth,
flame retardant vinyl.
A smooth, gloss white vinyl foil.
Adhesive suitable for critical surfaces.
Material Application
Protective laminate for labels
General identification
with need of
manipulation detection
Self laminating cable and
wire identification, also
suitable for flat ribbon
cables.
General
identification.
Mech.
Material Properties
protection towards abrasion
tamper proof, material
will easily fragment if
removed
due to its flexibility
particularly suitable for
identification of cables
permanent adhesive, suitable for
critical surfaces
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
56 µm
90 µm
83 µm
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Material Description
Use with
IT identification ties,
Q-tags and AT/IMP
plates.
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Material Durability
2 years external weathering (central European climate)
from +4 °C
from 0 °C
from +5 °C
Label Type
Certification /
Specification
Page
287
284
241
275
259
Thermal Transfer
Material
1211
1213
1216
Material Description
A smooth, gloss yellow Vinyl
label. Adhesive suitable for
critical surfaces.
1213 is a coloured, smooth
vinyl material with excellent
outdoor properties. It has
nearly endless shelf life
when used indoors.
A smooth, gloss
white vinyl label.
Adhesive suitable
for critical surfaces.
A white, glossy
polyester label
mounted with a
compressible
foam carrier.
Material Application
Identification
of control
panels and
warning
labels.
Warehouse labeling,
warning notices.
Also General marking
purposes.
Permanent
identification of
components and
preassembled units
within electrical
industry as well as
asset identification
Suitable for indoor and outdoor
applications on smooth and slightly
rough surfaces. Especially used for
the identification of electrical cabinets
and electrical components.
Mech.
Material Properties
permanent adhesive,
suitable for critical surfaces
permanent adhesive,
suitable for rough surfaces
permanent
adhesive, suitable
for critical surfaces
permanent adhesive with an elastic foam
carrier
Thickness of Foil (µm)
83 µm
66 µm
110 µm
625 µm
Use with IT
identification
ties and
AT/IMP
plates.
1220
1221
A silver, glossy
polyester label
mounted with a
compressible
foam carrier.
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
-40 °C to +90 °C
-30 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +90 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
from +8 °C
from 0 °C
from +4 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Material Durability
2 years external weathering
(central European climate)
7 years external weathering
(central European climate)
2 years external weathering (central European climate)
Label Type
Date of issue: January 2014
Page
263
260
280
264
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a233
270
271
233
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TULT - 3:1 UL-Recognized Tubing
TULT is a UL recognized 3:1 heatshrink material supplied as a
continuous tube and printable on both sides. The supplied accessories
allow users to either perforate the tubing at pre-determined lengths
(P4000), or fully sever the markers (S4000) whilst printing with the
TrakMark DS or TT4000+ printer.
Print with HellermannTyton‘s premium range of thermal printers
and ribbons.
Printers: TrakMark DS, TT4000+, and TT430
Ribbons: TTRC+, TTDTHOUT, TTRW, TT822OUT8
TULT – 5 colours of UL recognised printable tube to cover a wide range
of diameters.
Accessories for TT430: Cutter (S430)
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Software: TagPrint Pro
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink Temperature
+90 °C
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Recommended Ribbon Type
TTRC+, TTDTHOUT, TTRW,
TT822OUT8
Specifications
CSA, UL-Recognised
Features and Benefits
• Shrink ratio 3:1
• Available in Black, Blue, Red, White, and Yellow
• Cable range from 39 mm to 1 mm
• Good mechanical strength and resistance to organic solvents
and chemicals
• Highly flexible
• Fulfils UL224 VW-1 and CSA requirements
• Delivery in convenient storage boxes
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TULT3-1BK
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Black (BK)
553-40300
TULT3-1BU
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Blue (BU)
553-40306
TULT3-1RD
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Red (RD)
553-40302
TULT3-1WH
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
White (WH)
553-40309
TULT3-1YE
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Yellow (YE)
553-40304
TULT4.8-1.6BK
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Black (BK)
553-40480
TULT4.8-1.6BU
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Blue (BU)
553-40486
TULT4.8-1.6RD
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Red (RD)
553-40482
TULT4.8-1.6WH
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
White (WH)
553-40489
TULT4.8-1.6YE
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Yellow (YE)
553-40484
TULT6-2BK
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Black (BK)
553-40600
TULT6-2BU
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Blue (BU)
553-40606
TULT6-2RD
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Red (RD)
553-40602
TULT6-2WH
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
White (WH)
553-40609
TULT6-2YE
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Yellow (YE)
553-40604
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
234
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a234
Date of issue: January 2014
Accessories for TrakMark DS and TT4000+:
Perforator (P4000), Cutter (S4000)
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TULT - 3:1 UL-Recognized Tubing
TYPE
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TULT9-3BK
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Black (BK)
553-40900
TULT9-3BU
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Blue (BU)
553-40906
TULT9-3RD
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Red (RD)
553-40902
TULT9-3WH
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
White (WH)
553-40909
TULT9-3YE
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Yellow (YE)
553-40904
TULT12-4BK
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Black (BK)
553-41200
TULT12-4BU
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Blue (BU)
553-41206
TULT12-4RD
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Red (RD)
553-41202
TULT12-4WH
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
White (WH)
553-41209
TULT12-4YE
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Yellow (YE)
553-41204
TULT18-6BK
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Black (BK)
553-41800
TULT18-6BU
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Blue (BU)
553-41806
TULT18-6RD
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Red (RD)
553-41802
TULT18-6WH
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
White (WH)
553-41809
TULT18-6YE
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Yellow (YE)
553-41804
TULT24-8BK
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Black (BK)
553-42400
TULT24-8BU
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Blue (BU)
553-42406
TULT24-8RD
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Red (RD)
553-42402
TULT24-8WH
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
White (WH)
553-42409
TULT24-8YE
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Yellow (YE)
553-42404
TULT39-13BK
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Black (BK)
553-43900
TULT39-13BU
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Blue (BU)
553-43906
TULT39-13RD
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Red (RD)
553-43902
TULT39-13WH
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
White (WH)
553-43909
TULT39-13YE
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Yellow (YE)
553-43904
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a235
235
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TULT DS - 3:1 'Ladder Style' Sleeves
TULT DS is a 3:1 heatshrink material pre-cut and formatted onto a
convenient ’ladder‘ system that allows printing on both sides of the
marker. The user can easily choose and pick the required marker.
Print with HellermannTyton‘s premium range of thermal printers
and ribbons.
Printers: TrakMark DS, TT4000+, and TT430
Ribbons: TTDTHOUT
Accessories for TrakMark DS and TT4000+:
Perforator (P4000), Cutter (S4000)
TULT DS ladder style shrinkable tubing in yellow and white.
Accessories for TT430: Cutter (S430)
Software: TagPrint Pro
Features and Benefits
• Shrink ratio 3:1
• 50mm, 25 mm, and 16 mm pre-cut marker options as standard,
other lengths available on request
• Available in White and Yellow
• Meets MIL-STD 202G Method 215 print requirements using
TTDTHOUT ribbon
• Fulfils UL224 VW-1 and CSA requirements
• Fulfils LUL C3349 requirements
• Good mechanical strength and resistance to organic solvents
and chemicals
• Highly flexible
• Delivery in convenient storage boxes
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink Temperature
+90 °C
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Recommended Ribbon Type
TTDTHOUT
One Step to the Web!
Supplied
Ø D min.
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
TULT2.4-0.8DS-3x16WH
2.4
0.8
16.0
0.58
3,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71004
TULT2.4-0.8DS-3x16YE
2.4
0.8
16.0
0.58
3,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71005
Article-No.
TULT2.4-0.8DS-2x25WH
2.4
0.8
25.0
0.58
2,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71002
TULT2.4-0.8DS-2x25YE
2.4
0.8
25.0
0.58
2,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71003
TULT2.4-0.8DS-1x50WH
2.4
0.8
50.0
0.58
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71000
TULT2.4-0.8DS-1x50YE
2.4
0.8
50.0
0.58
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71001
TULT3-1DS-3x16WH
3.0
1.0
16.0
0.60
3,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71010
TULT3-1DS-3x16YE
3.0
1.0
16.0
0.60
3,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71011
TULT3-1DS-2x25WH
3.0
1.0
25.0
0.60
2,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71008
TULT3-1DS-2x25YE
3.0
1.0
25.0
0.60
2,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71009
TULT3-1DS-1x50WH
3.0
1.0
50.0
0.60
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71006
TULT3-1DS-1x50YE
3.0
1.0
50.0
0.60
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71007
TULT4.8-1.6DS-3x16WH
4.8
1.6
16.0
0.65
3,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71016
TULT4.8-1.6DS-3x16YE
4.8
1.6
16.0
0.65
3,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71017
TULT4.8-1.6DS-2x25WH
4.8
1.6
25.0
0.65
2,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71014
TULT4.8-1.6DS-2x25YE
4.8
1.6
25.0
0.65
2,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71015
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
236
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a236
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TULT DS - 3:1 'Ladder Style' Sleeves
Supplied
Ø D min.
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Recov.
Ø d max.
Length
(L)
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TULT4.8-1.6DS-1x50WH
4.8
1.6
50.0
0.65
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71012
TULT4.8-1.6DS-1x50YE
4.8
1.6
50.0
0.65
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71013
TULT6-2DS-3x16WH
6.0
2.0
16.0
0.70
3,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71022
TULT6-2DS-3x16YE
6.0
2.0
16.0
0.70
3,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71023
TULT6-2DS-2x25WH
6.0
2.0
25.0
0.70
2,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71020
TULT6-2DS-2x25YE
6.0
2.0
25.0
0.70
2,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71021
TULT6-2DS-1x50WH
6.0
2.0
50.0
0.70
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71018
TULT6-2DS-1x50YE
6.0
2.0
50.0
0.70
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71019
TULT9-3DS-3x16WH
9.0
3.0
16.0
0.80
1,500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71028
TULT9-3DS-3x16YE
9.0
3.0
16.0
0.80
1,500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71029
TULT9-3DS-2x25WH
9.0
3.0
25.0
0.80
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71026
TULT9-3DS-2x25YE
9.0
3.0
25.0
0.80
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71027
TULT9-3DS-1x50WH
9.0
3.0
50.0
0.80
500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71024
TULT9-3DS-1x50YE
9.0
3.0
50.0
0.80
500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71025
TULT12-4DS-3x16WH
12.0
4.0
16.0
0.85
1,500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71034
TULT12-4DS-3x16YE
12.0
4.0
16.0
0.85
1,500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71035
TULT12-4DS-2x25WH
12.0
4.0
25.0
0.85
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71032
TULT12-4DS-2x25YE
12.0
4.0
25.0
0.85
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71033
TULT12-4DS-1x50WH
12.0
4.0
50.0
0.85
500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71030
TULT12-4DS-1x50YE
12.0
4.0
50.0
0.85
500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71031
TULT18-6DS-3x16WH
18.0
6.0
16.0
1.00
1,500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71040
TULT18-6DS-3x16YE
18.0
6.0
16.0
1.00
1,500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71041
TULT18-6DS-2x25WH
18.0
6.0
25.0
1.00
1,000 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71038
TULT18-6DS-2x25YE
18.0
6.0
25.0
1.00
1,000 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71039
TULT18-6DS-1x50WH
18.0
6.0
50.0
1.00
500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71036
TULT18-6DS-1x50YE
18.0
6.0
50.0
1.00
500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71037
TULT24-8DS-3x16WH
24.0
8.0
16.0
1.20
750 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71046
TULT24-8DS-3x16YE
24.0
8.0
16.0
1.20
750 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71047
TULT24-8DS-2x25WH
24.0
8.0
25.0
1.20
500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71044
TULT24-8DS-2x25YE
24.0
8.0
25.0
1.20
500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71045
TULT24-8DS-1x50WH
24.0
8.0
50.0
1.20
250 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71042
TULT24-8DS-1x50YE
24.0
8.0
50.0
1.20
250 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71043
TULT39-13DS-3x16WH
39.0
13.0
16.0
1.25
750 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71052
TULT39-13DS-3x16YE
39.0
13.0
16.0
1.25
750 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71053
TULT39-13DS-2x25WH
39.0
13.0
25.0
1.25
500 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71050
TULT39-13DS-2x25YE
39.0
13.0
25.0
1.25
500 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71051
TULT39-13DS-1x50WH
39.0
13.0
50.0
1.25
250 pcs.
White (WH)
553-71048
TULT39-13DS-1x50YE
39.0
13.0
50.0
1.25
250 pcs.
Yellow (YE)
553-71049
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a237
237
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TCGT - 3:1 Commercial Grade Tubing
TCGT is a commercial grade 3:1 heatshrink material supplied as a
continuous tube and printable on both sides. The supplied accessories
allow users to either perforate the tubing at pre-determined lengths
(P4000), or fully sever the markers (S4000) whilst printing with the
TrakMark DS or TT4000+ printer.
Print with HellermannTyton‘s premium range of thermal printers
and ribbons.
Printers: TrakMark DS, TT4000+, and TT430
Ribbons: TTRC+, TTDTHOUT, TTRW, TT822OUT8
TCGT – 5 colours of printable tube to cover a wide range of diameters.
Accessories for TT430: Cutter (S430)
Software: TagPrint Pro
Features and Benefits
• Shrink ratio 3:1
• Available in Black, Blue, Red, White, and Yellow
• Cable range from 39 mm to 1 mm
• Good mechanical strength and resistance to organic solvents
and chemicals
• Highly flexible
• Fulfils CSA requirements
• Delivery in convenient storage boxes
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Supplied
Ø D min.
TYPE
Recov.
Ø d max.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin, cross-linked (PO-X)
Operating Temperature
-55 °C to +135 °C
Minimum Shrink Temperature
+90 °C
Shrink Ratio
3:1
Recommended Ribbon Type
TTRC+, TTDTHOUT, TTRW,
TT822OUT8
Specifications
CSA
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TCGT3-1BK
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Black (BK)
553-30300
TCGT3-1BU
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Blue (BU)
553-30306
TCGT3-1RD
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Red (RD)
553-30302
TCGT3-1WH
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
White (WH)
553-30309
TCGT3-1YE
3.0
1.0
0.60
176 m
Yellow (YE)
553-30304
TCGT4.8-1.6BK
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Black (BK)
553-30480
TCGT4.8-1.6BU
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Blue (BU)
553-30486
TCGT4.8-1.6RD
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Red (RD)
553-30482
TCGT4.8-1.6WH
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
White (WH)
553-30489
TCGT4.8-1.6YE
4.8
1.6
0.65
110 m
Yellow (YE)
553-30484
TCGT6-2BK
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Black (BK)
553-30600
TCGT6-2BU
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Blue (BU)
553-30606
TCGT6-2RD
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Red (RD)
553-30602
TCGT6-2WH
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
White (WH)
553-30609
TCGT6-2YE
6.0
2.0
0.70
110 m
Yellow (YE)
553-30604
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
238
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a238
Date of issue: January 2014
Accessories for TrakMark DS and TT4000+:
Perforator (P4000), Cutter (S4000)
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Heat-shrinkable wire identification,
thermal transfer
• TCGT - 3:1 Commercial Grade Tubing
Supplied
Ø D min.
TYPE
Recov.
Ø d max.
Wall
(WT)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TCGT9-3BK
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Black (BK)
553-30900
TCGT9-3BU
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Blue (BU)
553-30906
TCGT9-3RD
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Red (RD)
553-30902
TCGT9-3WH
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
White (WH)
553-30909
TCGT9-3YE
9.0
3.0
0.80
72 m
Yellow (YE)
553-30904
TCGT12-4BK
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Black (BK)
553-31200
TCGT12-4BU
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Blue (BU)
553-31206
TCGT12-4RD
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Red (RD)
553-31202
TCGT12-4WH
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
White (WH)
553-31209
TCGT12-4YE
12.0
4.0
0.85
54 m
Yellow (YE)
553-31204
TCGT18-6BK
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Black (BK)
553-31800
TCGT18-6BU
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Blue (BU)
553-31806
TCGT18-6RD
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Red (RD)
553-31802
TCGT18-6WH
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
White (WH)
553-31809
TCGT18-6YE
18.0
6.0
1.00
26 m
Yellow (YE)
553-31804
TCGT24-8BK
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Black (BK)
553-32400
TCGT24-8BU
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Blue (BU)
553-32406
TCGT24-8RD
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Red (RD)
553-32402
TCGT24-8WH
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
White (WH)
553-32409
TCGT24-8YE
24.0
8.0
1.20
26 m
Yellow (YE)
553-32404
TCGT39-13BK
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Black (BK)
553-33903
TCGT39-13BU
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Blue (BU)
553-33902
TCGT39-13RD
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Red (RD)
553-33901
TCGT39-13WH
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
White (WH)
553-33909
TCGT39-13YE
39.0
13.0
1.25
10 m
Yellow (YE)
553-33900
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a239
239
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Identification tags for cable bundle,
thermal transfer
• TIPTAG, halogenfree
Secured to bundles using Cable Ties up to T50R width maximum.
Features and Benefits
• Identification tags for use with large wire and cable bundles
• Perforated format that includes fastening slots for cable ties
• Excellent print performance using TTDTHOUT and TTRC+ ribbon
• Print with TT4000+ and TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
• Special lengths and colours available on request
TIPTAG - High performance cable bundle marking.
MATERIAL
Polyolefin Compound unlinked (PO)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +90 °C
Flammability
Limited Fire Hazard, Low generation
of toxic gases and corrosive acid,
Low smoke generation, Halogen free
Recommended Ribbon
Type
TTRC+, TTDTHOUT
Specifications
BS-6425,
London Underground RSE STD 013
Length
(L)
Width
(W)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TIPTAG11X65WH
65.0
11.0
190
White (WH)
556-20069
TIPTAG11X65YE
65.0
11.0
190
Yellow (YE)
556-20064
TIPTAG15X65WH
65.0
15.0
190
White (WH)
556-21069
TIPTAG15X65YE
65.0
15.0
190
Yellow (YE)
556-21064
TIPTAG11X100WH
100.0
11.0
120
White (WH)
556-20079
TIPTAG11X100YE
100.0
11.0
120
Yellow (YE)
556-20074
TIPTAG15X100WH
100.0
15.0
120
White (WH)
556-21079
TIPTAG15X100YE
100.0
15.0
120
Yellow (YE)
556-21074
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
240
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a240
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self-laminating labels, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1209 (White-Transparent)
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality print
clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range of
materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
Features and Benefits
• High-quality self laminating labels
• Suitable for marking of wires and cables
• Laminating function gives excellent protection against humidity
and mechanical abrasion
• Excellent print performance using TT932DOUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
• Other colours available on request
Bundle Bundle
Ø
Ø
min.
max.
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Width
(W)
Height Height
(H)
(H2)
Self-laminating labels offer an excellent protection against abrasion and
environmental impact.
MATERIAL
Type 1209, Vinyl (PVC),
white-transparent (WH/CL)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
90 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol, most oils,
greases, fuel, aliphatic solvents,
weak acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT932DOUT
Width of Labels
Liner
per
(WL)
Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
ArticleNo.
TAG51TD3-1209-WHCL
1.4
3.0
25.4
8.8
19.1
85.0
3
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12091
TAG26TD6-1209-WHCL
1.5
3.0
12.7
9.5
19.1
85.0
6
10,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12096
TAG36TD7-1209-WHCL
2.0
4.7
12.7
9.0
23.8
95.0
7
10,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12097
TAG2TD6-1209-WHCL
3.5
7.6
12.7
12.7
36.5
82.0
6
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-61209
TAG22TD3-1209-WHCL
3.5
7.6
25.4
12.7
36.5
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-32091
TAG24TD1-1209-WHCL
3.5
7.6
50.8
12.7
36.5
55.0
1
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12094
TAG23TD5-1209-WHCL
4.5
10.0
19.1
12.7
44.5
101.6
5
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12095
TAG25TD3-1209-WHCL
4.5
10.0
25.4
12.7
44.5
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-51209
TAG9TD3-1209-WHCL
5.5
12.1
25.4
19.1
57.1
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-91209
TAG10TD2-1209-WHCL
5.5
12.1
49.5
19.1
57.1
101.6
2
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12090
TAG91TD1-1209-WHCL
8.0
16.0
70.0
35.0
85.0
74.0
1
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-41209
TAG1TD2-1209-WHCL
8.5
18.2
48.2
19.1
79.2
101.6
2
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-21209
TAG3TD3-1209-WHCL
10.0
22.2
25.4
25.4
95.3
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-31209
TAG6TD1-1209-WHCL
10.0
22.2
50.8
25.4
95.3
55.0
1
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-11209
TAG107TD3-1209-WHCL
12.0
37.5
25.4
31.8
149.9
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-01209
TAG38TD3-1209-WHCL
20.8
47.5
25.4
38.1
187.2
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-12098
TAG07TD1-1209-WHCL
20.8
47.5
50.8
25.4
187.2
55.0
1
250
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-71209
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a241
241
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self-laminating labels, thermal transfer
• Material 323 (White-Clear) high temperature
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality print
clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range of
materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
TYPE
Easy marking of flexible, semi-rigid and rigid cables and wires.
MATERIAL
Type 323, Polyvinylidene Fluoride,
white/transp. (WH/CL),
yellow/transp. (YE/CL)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +140 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
25 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance against alcohol,
solvents on petroleum bases,
ester and ketone. Special resistance
against UV radiation.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT932DOUT
Bundle Bundle
Width of Labels
Ø
Ø
Width Height Height
Liner
per
min.
max.
(W)
(H)
(H2)
(WL)
Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG51TD3-323-WHCL
1.4
3.0
25.4
8.8
19.1
85.0
3
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-51320
TAG26TD6-323-WHCL
1.5
3.0
12.7
9.5
19.1
85.0
6
10,000 White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-26320
TAG36TD7-323-WHCL
2.0
4.7
12.7
9.0
23.8
95.0
7
10,000 White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-36320
TAG2TD6-323-WHCL
3.5
7.6
12.7
12.7
36.5
82.0
6
5,000
596-02320
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
TAG22TD3-323-WHCL
3.5
7.6
25.4
12.7
36.5
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-22320
TAG24TD1-323-WHCL
3.5
7.6
50.8
12.7
36.5
55.0
1
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-24320
TAG23TD5-323-WHCL
4.5
10.0
19.1
12.7
44.5
101.6
5
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-23320
TAG25TD3-323-WHCL
4.5
10.0
25.4
12.7
44.5
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-25320
TAG9TD3-323-WHCL
5.5
12.1
25.4
19.1
57.1
82.0
3
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-09320
TAG10TD2-323-WHCL
5.5
12.1
49.5
19.1
57.1
101.6
2
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-10320
TAG1TD2-323-WHCL
8.5
18.2
48.2
19.1
79.2
101.6
2
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-01320
TAG3TD3-323-WHCL
10.0
22.2
25.4
25.4
95.3
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-03320
TAG6TD1-323-WHCL
10.0
22.2
50.8
25.4
95.3
55.0
1
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-06320
TAG107TD3-323-WHCL
12.0
37.5
25.4
31.8
149.9
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-10732
TAG38TD3-323-WHCL
20.8
47.5
25.4
38.1
187.2
82.0
3
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-38320
TAG07TD1-323-WHCL
20.8
47.5
50.8
25.4
187.2
55.0
1
250
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
596-07320
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
242
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a242
Date of issue: January 2014
Features and Benefits
• High temperature self-laminating labels with a white
inscription field
• Survives 5 years external weathering in central European climate
• Material is UL94 V0
• Excellent print performance using TT932DOUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
• Yellow and other colours available on request
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self-laminating labels, laser
• Helatag 1104 (White-Transparent)
The high quality polyester material makes these labels especially
suitable for self-laminating marking of wires and cables.
The protective film provides effective protection against abrasion or
soiling of the labels.
For cable markers with a total length of more than approx. 100 mm,
we use a slightly thicker material (type 750). This allows the marker
to be removed from the sheet more easily by hand and the greater
rigidity of the material simplifies attachment onto a large cable or pipe.
For problem-free printing, we recommend TagPrint Pro software.
This contains all the labels listed, which can be called up immediately.
There is no need for time-consuming installation. For simple
applications we recommend our MS Windows Word printer
templates, from www.hellermanntyton.com (download zone).
Laminating the mark gives long-term print survivability.
Features and Benefits
• High-quality self laminating labels
• Suitable for marking of wires and cables
• Laminating function gives excellent protection against humidity
and mechanical abrasion
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Standard material (23 micron) for standard labels
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for those
wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
TAG26LA4-1104-WHCL
MATERIAL
Type 1104, Polyester (PET), white
transparent (WH/CL), self laminating
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
23 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and Butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid.
Bundle
Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø
max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Labels
per
Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
1.5
3.0
12.7
9.5
19.1
180
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-11041
TAG130LA4-1104-WHCL
2.4
4.8
12.7
9.0
24.0
165
5,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-21104
TAG49LA4-1104-WHCL
2.6
5.3
25.4
8.8
25.4
70
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-11042
TAG131LA4-1104-WHCL
3.8
7.6
12.7
12.7
36.5
105
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-31104
TAG132LA4-1104-WHCL
3.8
7.6
20.3
12.7
36.5
63
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-41104
TAG02LA4-1104-WHCL
3.8
7.6
25.4
12.7
36.5
49
2,450
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-01104
TAG133LA4-1104-WHCL
5.1
10.1
19.1
12.7
44.5
60
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-51104
TAG134LA4-1104-WHCL
5.1
10.1
25.4
12.7
44.5
42
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-61104
TAG09LA4-1104-WHCL
5.8
11.6
25.4
19.1
55.5
35
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-11104
TAG135LA4-1104-CLWH
6.7
13.5
48.5
12.7
55.0
20
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-71104
TAG137LA4-1104-CLWH
7.1
14.3
31.8
22.9
67.7
24
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-91104
TAG136LA4-1104-CLWH
7.7
15.5
25.4
19.1
67.7
28
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-81104
TAG145LA4-1104-CLWH
11.1
22.3
25.4
25.4
95.3
21
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-11040
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a243
243
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self-laminating labels, laser
• Material 1105 (White-Clear)
The high quality polyester material makes these labels especially
suitable for self-laminating marking of wires and cables.
The protective film provides effective protection against abrasion or
soiling of the labels.
For cable markers with a total length of more than approx. 100 mm,
we use a slightly thicker material (type 750). This allows the marker
to be removed from the sheet more easily by hand and the greater
rigidity of the material simplifies attachment onto a large cable or pipe.
For problem-free printing, we recommend TagPrint Pro software.
This contains all the labels listed, which can be called up immediately.
There is no need for time-consuming installation. For simple
applications we recommend our MS Windows Word printer
templates, from www.hellermanntyton.com (download zone).
Laminating the mark gives long-term print survivability.
Features and Benefits
• High-quality self laminating labels
• Suitable for marking of wires and cables
• Laminating function gives excellent protection against humidity
and mechanical abrasion
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Thicker material (50 micron) for longer labels
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for those
wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
MATERIAL
Type 1105, Polyester (PET), white
transparent (WH/CL), self laminating
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
50 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and Butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid.
Software TagPrint Pro for troublefree printing
see page 294.
For MS-Windows Word design templates for
simple applications please refer to
www.HellermannTyton.com (downloadzone).
Bundle
Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø
max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Labels
per
Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG138LA4-1105-WHCL
11.8
23.6
38.1
19.1
93.1
15
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-13876
TAG139LA4-1105-WHCL
18.2
36.4
38.1
25.4
139.7
10
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
594-13976
TYPE
244
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a244
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self Laminating Dot Matrix labels
• Helatag 101 (White-Transparent)
Helatag self laminating wire markers are used in industries ranging
from automotive for wire and pipe identification to electrical panels.
Features and Benefits
• Print industrial grade labels using standard dot matrix printers
• For low to medium print volumes
• Self laminating wire markers for automotive and other industries
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with
TagPrint Pro software
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Unique packaging ensures outstanding label protection.
Bundle
Ø min.
TYPE
Bundle
Ø max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
MATERIAL
Type 101, Self laminating Vinyl,
white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
75 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Good resistance to water, oils and
many solvents
Labels
per Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG22-101-WHCL
3.8
7.6
25.4
12.7
36.5
64
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-22101
TAG25-101-WHCL
5.1
10.1
19.1
12.7
44.5
54
2,500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-25101
TAG9-101-WHCL
6.1
12.1
25.4
19.1
57.2
32
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-09101
TAG10-101-WHCL
6.1
12.1
50.8
19.1
57.2
20
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-10101
TAG3-101-WHCL
11.1
22.2
25.4
25.4
95.3
24
1,000
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-03101
TAG8-101-WHCL
17.8
35.6
25.4
38.1
149.8
16
500
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-08101
TAG23-101-WHCL
23.7
47.5
25.4
38.1
187.2
7
250
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
595-23101
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a245
245
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Self-laminating labels, manual marking
• RiteOn, Starter Pack, Material 1401 dispenser
A specially developed material for use in labels required to wrap
around cables and wires. The conformable structure of the label
ensures that once the label is applied to the wire it remains in place
without lifting.
The SPRO200-1401-WH Starter Pack contains all you need to start
work identifying your wires,
•1xRiteOndispenser
•1xR202reelof150selflaminatinglabelsforcablediameters
ranging from 6 mm to 12 mm
•1xT82S-BKblackindelibleinkmarkerpen
Features and Benefits
• Palm sized hand held self laminating label dispenser
• Easy to write on and dispense labels
• Wide range of wire diameters covered as standard
• Ideal for low volume maintenance and repair work
• Write text with specially formulated fast-drying ink T82 pens
The RiteOn starter pack gets you started right away.
MATERIAL
Type 1401, Vinyl
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
90 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol, most oils,
greases, fuel, aliphatic solvents,
weak acids, salts and alkalis.
TYPE
Description
Bundle
Ø min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Height
(H2)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
SPRO200-1401-WH
Starter pack
6.1
12.1
19.1
12.7
50.8
150
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-14010
4.0
8.1
12.7
12.7
38.1
200
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-14011
Filled dispenser
6.1
12.1
19.1
12.7
50.8
150
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-14012
9.1
18.2
19.1
25.4
76.2
100
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-14013
RO201-1401-WH
RO202-1401-WH
RO203-1401-WH
RO201REF-1401-WH
RO202REF-1401-WH
Refill packs
RO203REF-1401-WH
4.0
8.1
12.7
12.7
38.1
200
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-14014
6.1
12.1
19.1
12.7
50.8
150
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-11401
9.1
18.2
19.1
25.4
76.2
100
White (WH), Transparent (CL)
550-71401
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
Pack Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
246
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a246
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• Helagrip, chevron cut
Helagrip is used to mark cable and wire. Ideally suited to panel
building, mass transit, utilities, telecommunications, and electrical
contracting. Depending on marker size, the product is supplied
either on a reel (HGDC) or in a plastic bag (HGBC).
Markers are available as standard in international resistor colour
code and yellow material marked in black. White material marked
in black is available to special order. Characters are 0-9, A-Z, and
standard electrical symbols.
Features and Benefits
• Easily apply one size marker to wide range of cables
• Markers are applied before termination takes place
• Chevron cut to lock markers together ensuring text remains in place
• Traditional wire marking available in yellow, white and colour code
• Flexible material so product returns securely on the wire
Clearly a better way to identify in confined spaces.
MATERIAL
Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride, cadmium free (PVC)
Operating
Temperature
-65 °C to +105 °C, intermittent +135 °C
Flammability
UL94 V0 (3mm)
Specifications
BS-2782-540B, BS 6746C, IEC 757, UL224
Helagrip chevron cut.
Outside
Ø min.
Outside
Ø max.
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
HGDC1-3
1.0
3.0
3.5
1,000
HGDC2-5
2.0
5.0
3.5
1,000
HGDC4-9
4.0
9.0
5.0
250
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a247
247
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• Helagrip, chevron cut
HGDC1-3
HGDC2-5
HGDC2-5
Article-No.
Article-No.
Article-No.
Article-No.
515-01014
515-01604
515-02014
515-02604
515-01024
515-01614
515-02024
515-02614
515-01034
515-01624
515-02034
515-02624
515-01044
515-01634
515-02044
515-02634
515-01054
515-01644
515-02054
515-02644
515-01064
515-01654
515-02064
515-02654
515-01074
515-01664
515-02074
515-02664
515-01084
515-01674
515-02084
515-02674
515-01094
515-01684
515-02094
515-02684
515-01104
515-01694
515-02104
515-02694
515-01114
515-01704
515-02114
515-02704
515-01124
515-01714
515-02124
515-02714
515-01134
515-01724
515-02134
515-02715
515-01144
515-01734
515-02144
515-02724
515-01154
515-01804
515-02154
515-02734
515-01164
515-01600
515-02164
515-02600
515-01174
515-01611
515-02174
515-02611
515-01184
515-01622
515-02184
515-02622
515-01194
515-01633
515-02194
515-02633
515-01204
515-01644
515-02204
515-02644
515-01214
515-01655
515-02214
515-02655
515-01224
515-01666
515-02224
515-02666
515-01234
515-01677
515-02234
515-02677
515-01244
515-01688
515-02244
515-02688
515-01254
515-01699
515-02254
515-02699
515-01264
515-02264
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
248
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a248
Date of issue: January 2014
HGDC1-3
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• Helagrip, chevron cut
HGDC4-9
HGDC4-9
Article-No.
Article-No.
515-03014
515-03604
515-03024
515-03614
515-03034
515-03624
515-03044
515-03634
515-03054
515-03644
515-03064
515-03654
515-03074
515-03664
515-03084
515-03674
515-03094
515-03684
515-03104
515-03694
515-03114
515-03704
515-03124
515-03714
515-03134
515-03724
515-03144
515-01946
515-03154
515-01947
515-03164
515-03600
515-03174
515-03611
515-03184
515-03622
515-03194
515-03633
515-03204
515-03644
515-03214
515-03655
515-03224
515-03666
515-03234
515-03677
515-03244
515-03688
515-03254
515-03699
Date of issue: January 2014
515-03264
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a249
249
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• Ovalgrip, straight cut
Ideally suited to panel building, mass transit, utilities,
telecommunications and electrical contracting.
These markers are supplied continuous on a reel (HODS).
Markers are available as standard in yellow material marked in black
and international resistor colour code. Characters are 0-9, A-Z and
standard electrical symbols.
White material marked in black available on special request.
AT1 Arrowtags will fit 7 size 50 markers.
AT2 Arrowtags will fit 8 size 85 markers.
A simple idea for complex marking needs.
AT3 Arrowtags will fit 14 size 85 markers.
Features and Benefits
• Oval shaped markers designed to fit AT1, AT2, or AT3 (depends
on Ovalgrip size)
• Ideal for use in maintenance and repair, and fixed with cable ties
• Direct application to wire and cable before termination is
also recomended
• Traditional wire marking available in yellow, white and colour code
MATERIAL
Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride, cadmium free (PVC)
Operating
Temperature
-65 °C to +105 °C, intermittent +135 °C
Flammability
UL94 V0 (3 mm)
Specifications
BS-2782-540B, BS 6746C, IEC 304, IEC 757,
UL224
For details on Arrowtags
please see page 255.
Ovalgrip straight cut
Outside
Ø min.
Outside
Ø max.
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
For
Size
HODS50
1.7
3.6
4.0
1,000
AT1
HODS85
1.8
6.3
4.5
1,000
AT2/AT3
TYPE
250
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a250
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• Ovalgrip, straight cut
HODS50
HODS50
HODS85
Article-No.
Article-No.
Article-No.
Article-No.
531-15014
531-15274
531-07935
531-07925
531-15024
531-15284
531-07936
531-07926
531-15034
531-15294
531-07937
531-07927
531-15044
531-15304
531-07938
531-07928
531-15054
531-15314
531-07939
531-07732
531-15064
531-15324
531-07940
531-07930
531-15074
531-15334
531-07941
531-07931
531-15084
531-15344
531-07942
531-07932
531-15094
531-15354
531-07943
531-07933
531-15104
531-15364
531-07944
531-07934
531-15114
531-00174
531-07945
531-00384
531-15124
531-00175
531-07946
531-07961
531-15134
531-00176
531-07947
531-00386
531-15144
531-00451
531-07948
531-07924
531-15154
531-00452
531-07949
531-07923
531-15164
531-15365
531-07950
531-07728
531-15174
531-15366
531-07951
531-07729
531-15184
531-15367
531-07952
531-07730
531-15194
531-15368
531-07953
531-07731
531-15204
531-15314
531-07954
531-07732
531-15214
531-15370
531-07955
531-07733
531-15224
531-15371
531-07956
531-07734
531-15234
531-15372
531-07957
531-07735
531-15244
531-15373
531-07958
531-07736
531-15254
531-15374
531-07959
531-07737
531-15264
Date of issue: January 2014
HODS85
531-07960
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a251
251
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• WIC, snap on
WIC markers are applied to the wire by simply clicking them on
using the WIC tool or if no tool is available they can easily be applied
by hand.
Simply insert the marker strip into the back of the tool and slide
down to the end and simply press the marker down over the wire.
Twist the marker off and apply the next marker. Once all the markers
are on slide them together until the locking mechanism engages.
Use the applicator to simply snap the marker onto your cable.
Features and Benefits
• Fast and easy to use pre-printed nylon snap-on marker
• Ideal where termination is completed or for maintenance
and repair
• Markers lock together to give perfect text alignment
• Vibration resistant markers, WIC markers lock onto wire and
cable tightly
• WIC tool holds 20 WIC marker in all three sizes
• Gripping system locks markers onto wire and resists rotation
• Available in Yellow, White and international resistor colour code
• Popular 2 digit markings such as L1, L2, L3, PE are available in
Yellow or colour code
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 (PA66)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C, (+105 °C, 500 h)
Flammability
UL94 V0
Specifications
EN 60062, IEC 304, UL94
Outside
Ø min.
Outside
Ø max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
WIC1
2.0
2.8
5.0
6.4
3.0
1,000
WIC2
2.8
3.8
5.6
7.1
3.0
1,000
WIC3
4.3
5.3
8.0
9.6
3.0
500
-
-
-
-
-
5
TYPE
WIC Tool
Application
Tool
WICTOOL
252
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a252
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• WIC, snap on
Date of issue: January 2014
WIC1
WIC1
WIC2
TYPE
Article-No.
TYPE
Article-No.
TYPE
Article-No.
WIC1-A
561-01014
WIC1-0
561-01604
WIC2-A
561-02014
WIC1-B
561-01024
WIC1-1
561-01614
WIC2-B
561-02024
WIC1-C
561-01034
WIC1-2
561-01624
WIC2-C
561-02034
WIC1-D
561-01044
WIC1-3
561-01634
WIC2-D
561-02044
WIC1-E
561-01054
WIC1-4
561-01644
WIC2-E
561-02054
WIC1-F
561-01064
WIC1-5
561-01654
WIC2-F
561-02064
WIC1-G
561-01074
WIC1-6
561-01664
WIC2-G
561-02074
WIC1-H
561-01084
WIC1-7
561-01674
WIC2-H
561-02084
WIC1-I
561-01094
WIC1-8
561-01684
WIC2-I
561-02094
WIC1-J
561-01104
WIC1-9
561-01694
WIC2-J
561-02104
WIC1-K
561-01114
WIC1-0-9
561-01101
WIC2-K
561-02114
WIC1-L
561-01124
WIC1-+
561-01704
WIC2-L
561-02124
WIC1-M
561-01134
WIC1--
561-01714
WIC2-M
561-02134
WIC1-N
561-01144
WIC1-/
561-01724
WIC2-N
561-02144
WIC1-O
561-01154
WIC1-z
561-01734
WIC2-O
561-02154
WIC1-P
561-01164
WIC1-.
561-01744
WIC2-P
561-02164
WIC1-Q
561-01174
WIC1-0
561-01600
WIC2-Q
561-02174
WIC1-R
561-01184
WIC1-1
561-01611
WIC2-R
561-02184
WIC1-S
561-01194
WIC1-2
561-01622
WIC2-S
561-02194
WIC1-T
561-01204
WIC1-3
561-01633
WIC2-T
561-02204
WIC1-U
561-01214
WIC1-4
561-01644
WIC2-U
561-02214
WIC1-V
561-01224
WIC1-5
561-01655
WIC2-V
561-02224
WIC1-W
561-01234
WIC1-6
561-01666
WIC2-W
561-02234
WIC1-X
561-01244
WIC1-7
561-01677
WIC2-X
561-02244
WIC1-Y
561-01254
WIC1-8
561-01688
WIC2-Y
561-02254
WIC1-Z
561-01264
WIC1-9
561-01699
WIC2-Z
561-02264
WIC1A,E,L,N,R,S,T,
+,-,z
561-01994
WIC1-0-9
561-01100
WIC2A,E,L,N,R,S,T,
+,-,z
561-02994
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a253
253
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Pre-printed Cable Markers
• WIC, snap on
WIC2
WIC3
WIC3
TYPE
Article-No.
TYPE
Article-No.
TYPE
Article-No.
WIC2-0
561-02604
WIC3-A
561-03014
WIC3-0
561-03604
WIC2-1
561-02614
WIC3-B
561-03024
WIC3-1
561-03614
WIC2-2
561-02624
WIC3-C
561-03034
WIC3-2
561-03624
WIC2-3
561-02634
WIC3-D
561-03044
WIC3-3
561-03634
WIC2-4
561-02644
WIC3-E
561-03054
WIC3-4
561-03644
WIC2-5
561-02654
WIC3-F
561-03064
WIC3-5
561-03654
WIC2-6
561-02664
WIC3-G
561-03074
WIC3-6
561-03664
WIC2-7
561-02674
WIC3-H
561-03084
WIC3-7
561-03674
WIC2-8
561-02684
WIC3-I
561-03094
WIC3-8
561-03684
WIC2-9
561-02694
WIC3-J
561-03104
WIC3-9
561-03694
WIC2-0-9
561-02101
WIC3-K
561-03114
WIC3-0-9
561-03101
WIC2-+
561-02704
WIC3-L
561-03124
WIC3-+
561-03704
WIC2--
561-02714
WIC3-M
561-03134
WIC3--
561-03714
WIC2-/
561-02724
WIC3-N
561-03144
WIC3-/
561-03724
WIC2-z
561-02734
WIC3-O
561-03154
WIC3-z
561-03734
WIC2-.
561-02744
WIC3-P
561-03164
WIC3-.
561-03744
WIC2-0
561-02600
WIC3-Q
561-03174
WIC3-0
561-03600
WIC2-1
561-02611
WIC3-R
561-03184
WIC3-1
561-03611
WIC2-2
561-02622
WIC3-S
561-03194
WIC3-2
561-03622
WIC2-3
561-02633
WIC3-T
561-03204
WIC3-3
561-03633
WIC2-4
561-02644
WIC3-U
561-03214
WIC3-4
561-03644
WIC2-5
561-02655
WIC3-V
561-03224
WIC3-5
561-03655
WIC2-6
561-02666
WIC3-W
561-03234
WIC3-6
561-03666
WIC2-7
561-02677
WIC3-X
561-03244
WIC3-7
561-03677
WIC2-8
561-02688
WIC3-Y
561-03254
WIC3-8
561-03688
WIC2-9
561-02699
WIC3-Z
561-03264
WIC3-9
561-03699
WIC2-0-9
561-02100
WIC3A,E,L,N,R,S,T,
+,-,z
561-03994
WIC3-0-9
561-03100
Tool
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
254
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a254
561-00001
Date of issue: January 2014
WIC Tool
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Identification ties and plates for
marking cable bundles
• Arrowtag
Used with Ovalgrip markers for identifying larger pipes and cables.
Features and Benefits
• Blank nylon arrowhead shape plate fixed with a cable tie
• Identify with a T82 pen or Ovalgrip markers
• AT1 for 7 size 50 Ovalgrip markers
• AT2 for 8 size 85 Ovalgrip markers
• AT3 for 14 size 85 Ovalgrip markers
• Custom printed plaques are available on request
A clearly better way of identifying cables and pipes.
AT1
TYPE
AT1
AT2
AT3
AT2
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 (PA66)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C, (+105 °C, 500 h)
Flammability
UL94 V2
AT3
Length
(L)
Width
(W)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
62.5
4.7
7.4
100
Black (BK)
151-41110
62.5
4.7
7.4
100
Natural (NA)
151-41119
63.0
9.0
6.4
100
Black (BK)
151-41210
63.0
9.0
6.4
100
Natural (NA)
151-41219
100.0
9.0
6.4
100
Black (BK)
151-41310
100.0
9.0
6.4
100
Natural (NA)
151-41319
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a255
255
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Identification tags for marking cable bundles
• Q-tags
Features and Benefits
• Identify cable or cable bundle
• Quickly read or scan printed information
• Mark by hand with T82 series marker pen or use printed
adhesive label
• HellermannTyton offers complete printing solution
(printers, labels, ribbons)
• Perfect combination with Q-ties to safely secure and mark cables
with highly visible text
The flagged orientation of Q-tags ensures that printed texts are easily visible.
Please find more Q-Series products for
your system solution on page 42 and 77.
Please find the corresponding labels
on page 259.
Q-tags are available in different sizes
and types.
Q-tags can be labelled with
pre-printed labels or by hand.
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 (PA66)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C, (+105 °C, 500 h)
Flammability
UL94 V2
Q-tag QT7016R
Q-tag QT7040R, QT10065R
Q-tag QT7040S
Length
(L)
Length
(L2)
Width
(W)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
QT7040S
88.0
70.0
42.0
3.6
50
White (WH)
151-10952
QT7016R
100.0
70.0
18.0
4.7
50
White (WH)
151-10950
QT7040R
100.0
70.0
42.0
4.7
50
White (WH)
151-10951
QT10065R
135.0
100.0
67.0
4.7
25
White (WH)
151-10953
TYPE
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
256
One Step to the Web!
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a256
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Identification ties and plates for
marking cable bundles
• IMP Plates
The IMP marker plates are suitable for applying to large cable
bundles before or after termination has taken place.
They are secured with cable ties of any length with a maximum
width of 4.8 mm.
They can be marked manually using the T82 series of indelible
markers pens.
Features and Benefits
• IT and IMP plates for identifying large cable bundles or
flat surfaces
• Mark IT and IMP plates with printable labels or T82 pens
• Fix with cable ties or rivets
• Custom printed plaques are available on request
Unlimited cable bundle diameters can be securely identified.
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 (PA66)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C, (+105 °C, 500 h)
Flammability
UL94 V2
IT1, IMP
TYPE
Length
(L)
Width
(W)
Strap Width
max. (G)
Pack
Cont.
IMP1.5
38.1
19.1
4.8
100
White (WH)
TAG18-16TD1
151-42159
IT1
44.0
19.0
4.8
100
Natural (NA)
TAG28-16TD1
151-42119
IMP2
50.8
19.1
4.8
100
White (WH)
TAG43-16TD1
151-42229
63.5
19.1
4.8
100
White (WH)
TAG43-16TD1
151-42259
63.5
44.4
4.8
100
White (WH)
TAG43-41TD1
151-42269
88.9
19.1
4.8
100
White (WH)
TAG68-16TD1
151-42359
IMP2.5
IMP3.5
Colour
Recommended
Labels
Article-No.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a257
257
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Identification ties and plates for
marking cable bundles
• IT Ties
One of the major benefits is the ability to both secure and identify
cable bundles at different times.
Features and Benefits
• Identification ties made of Polyamide 6.6
• For simple identification and securing of cable bundles in one step
• Can be marked either on-site or after bundling (Pen T82)
• In addition a large selection of labels are available
One operation with two benefits.
IT18FL
MATERIAL
Polyamide 6.6 (PA66)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C
Flammability
UL94 V2
Specifications
UL-Recognised
IT18R
IT50R
IT50RD
IT50L
TYPE
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Length
(L)
Width
(W2)
Recommended
Labels
Pack
Cont.
IT18FL
1.5
19.0
20.5
9.0
110.0
2.5
Colour
Article-No.
80
TAG18-07TD1
100
Natural (NA)
111-81919
IT18R
6.0
22.0
25.0
8.0
100.0
IT50R
9.5
44.5
28.0
12.9
203.0
2.3
80
TAG23-06TD1
100
Natural (NA)
111-81821
4.6
225
TAG23-10TD1
100
Natural (NA)
111-85019
IT50RD
10.0
44.0
29.0
26.3
IT50RT
10.0
44.0
46.0
26.3
205.0
4.7
225
TAG26-21TD1
50
Natural (NA)
111-85219
205.0
4.7
225
TAG43-21TD1
50
Natural (NA)
IT50L
19.0
100.0
56.0
12.8
111-85119
390.0
4.7
225
TAG52-10TD1
100
Natural (NA)
111-85319
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
= Minimum Tensile Strength
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
258
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a258
Date of issue: January 2014
IT50RT
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Labels for IT ties, IMP plates and Q-tags,
thermal transfer
• Helatag 1210 (White)
In nearly all areas, but especially suitable for cable and wire
identification in computer and electronic businesses. For
problem-free printing, we recommend our software TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Suited to the slightly rough surfaces of IT and IMP plates
• Adheres to rounded surfaces
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
MATERIAL
Type 1210, Vinyl (PVC),
white gloss (WH)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
83 µm
Chem. Material
Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol, most oils,
greases, fuel, aliphatic solvents, weak
acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
For
Size
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG18-07TD1-1210-WH
18.0
7.0
24.0
1
IT18FL
5,000
White (WH)
596-12126
TAG18-16TD1-1210-WH
18.0
16.0
24.0
1
IMP1.5
2,500
White (WH)
596-12127
TAG23-06TD1-1210-WH
23.0
6.0
30.0
1
IT18R
5,000
White (WH)
596-12128
TAG23-10TD1-1210-WH
23.0
10.0
30.0
1
IT50R
5,000
White (WH)
596-12129
TAG26-21TD2-1210-WH
26.0
21.0
57.0
2
IT50RD
2,500
White (WH)
596-12130
TAG28-16TD1-1210-WH
28.0
16.0
34.0
1
IT1, IMP2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12131
TAG43-16TD1-1210-WH
43.0
16.0
50.0
1
IMP2.5
2,500
White (WH)
596-12132
TAG43-21TD1-1210-WH
43.0
21.0
50.0
1
IT50RT
2,500
White (WH)
596-12133
TAG43-41TD1-1210-WH
43.0
41.0
50.0
1
IMP2.5W1.75
1,000
White (WH)
596-12134
TAG52-10TD1-1210-WH
52.0
10.0
58.0
1
IT50L
5,000
White (WH)
596-12135
TAG63TD1-1210-WH
63.5
38.1
70.0
1
QT7040R, QT7040S
1,000
White (WH)
596-12154
TAG68-16TD1-1210-WH
68.0
16.0
74.0
1
IMP3.5, QT7016R
2,500
White (WH)
596-12136
TAG102-64TD1-1210-WH
102.0
64.0
106.0
1
QT10065R
250
White (WH)
596-00607
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
Identification ties and tags.
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a259
259
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
IT and IMP labels, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1211 (Yellow)
In nearly all areas, but especially suitable for cable and wire
identification in computer and electronic businesses. For
problem-free printing, we recommend our software TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Suited to the slightly rough surfaces of IT and IMP plates
• Adheres to rounded surfaces
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Identification ties and tags.
MATERIAL
Type 1211, Vinyl (PVC),
yellow gloss (GSYE)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
83 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol, most oils,
greases, fuel, aliphatic solvents, weak
acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended Ribbon
Type
TT822OUT
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
For
Size
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG18-07TD1-1211-YE
18.0
7.0
24.0
1
IT18FL
5,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12110
TAG18-16TD1-1211-YE
18.0
16.0
24.0
1
IMP1.5
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12111
TAG23-06TD1-1211-YE
23.0
6.0
30.0
1
IT18R
5,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12112
TAG23-10TD1-1211-YE
23.0
10.0
30.0
1
IT50R
5,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12113
TAG26-21TD2-1211-YE
26.0
21.0
57.0
2
IT50RD
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12114
TAG28-16TD1-1211-YE
28.0
16.0
34.0
1
IT1, IMP2
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12115
TAG43-16TD1-1211-YE
43.0
16.0
50.0
1
IMP2.5
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12116
TAG43-21TD1-1211-YE
43.0
21.0
50.0
1
IT50RT
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12117
TAG43-41TD1-1211-YE
43.0
41.0
50.0
1
IMP2.5W1.75
1,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12118
TAG52-10TD1-1211-YE
52.0
10.0
58.0
1
IT50L
5,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12119
TAG68-16TD1-1211-YE
68.0
16.0
74.0
1
IMP3.5, QT7016R
2,500
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-61211
TYPE
260
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a260
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Carrier Marking System, laser
• Helafix HC and HCR Carriers
Marking of cable looms, cables, pipes, transport systems, valves,
sensors, for inventory marking on machines or other parts.
Features and Benefits
• Versatile transparent carriers for HFX labels used for temporary or
permanent marking
• Fixed in place using T18 series cable ties, screws or rivets
(carrier HC06, no rivet hole)
• Protects inserted HFX label against damp, dirt, damage and
UV radiation
• Helafix HC supplied as cut lengths in bags, pre-cut and
pre-punched rivet hole (carrier HC06 have no punched hole)
• Helafix HCR supplied in continuous tube format and can be cut to
size with HCT tool
• Helafix HFX labels designed to fit into HC & HCR carriers
Multi-purpose identification potential: Helafix HC and HCR.
We recommend as suitable labels
Helafix HFX, see page 262.
MATERIAL
Polyethylene, UV Resistant (PEUV)
Operating Temperature
-60 °C to +65 °C
Flammability
UL94 HB
Chem. Material
Properties
Excellent resistance to UV light, oils,
water and a variety of solvents.
We recommend HCT tool,
see page 322.
TYPE
Length
(L)
Height
(H)
Reel
Length
Pack
Cont.
Recommended
Labels
Application
Tool
Article-No.
HCR06
-
7.0
25 m
-
-
-
525-07003
HCR09
-
10.0
25 m
-
HFX9
HCT1
525-10003
HCR12
-
13.0
25 m
-
HFX12
HCT2
525-13003
HCR18
-
19.0
25 m
-
-
-
525-19003
Date of issue: January 2014
HCR24
-
25.0
25 m
-
-
-
525-25003
HC06
17.5
7.0
-
50
-
-
525-07173
HC09
17.5
10.0
-
50
HFX9-17P
-
525-10173
HC12
17.5
13.0
-
50
-
-
525-13173
HC06
35.0
7.0
-
50
-
-
525-07353
HC09
35.0
10.0
-
50
HFX9-35P
-
525-10353
HC12
35.0
13.0
-
50
HFX12-35P
-
525-13353
HC18
35.0
19.0
-
50
-
-
525-19353
HC09
52.0
10.0
-
50
HFX9-52P
-
525-10523
HC12
52.0
13.0
-
50
HFX12-52P
-
525-13523
HC18
52.0
19.0
-
50
-
-
525-19523
HC24
52.0
25.0
-
50
-
-
525-25523
HC12
70.0
13.0
-
50
-
-
525-13703
HC18
70.0
19.0
-
50
-
-
525-19703
HC24
70.0
25.0
-
50
-
-
525-25703
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a261
261
Identification Systems
5.2
Wire and Cable Markers
Carrier Marking System, laser
• Helafix HFX Labels
Features and Benefits
• Laser printable non-adhesive labels for Helafix carrier strip
(HC & HCR) range
• Every sheet in two colours (front yellow, back white)
• A4 format
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with
TagPrint Pro software
• Mark manually with T82S series indelible markers pens
A precise match for Helafix, for permanent identification coding.
Software TagPrint Pro for
troublefree printing see page 294.
For MS-Windows Word design
templates for simple applications
please refer to
www.HellermannTyton.com
(downloadzone).
MATERIAL
Polyester (SP)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +180 °C
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid. UV light resistant and
suitable for outdoor usage when
marked with marking pen T82S or
printed with laser printer.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Sheets
per Pack
Carton
Quantity
Colour
Article-No.
HFX9-17P
17.5
9.0
319
20
6,380
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-01014
HFX9-35P
35.0
9.0
145
20
2,900
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-01514
HFX12-35P
35.0
12.0
110
20
2,200
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-01714
HFX9-52P
52.5
9.0
124
20
2,480
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-02014
HFX12-52P
52.5
12.0
92
20
1,840
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-02214
HFX12-105P
105.0
12.0
44
20
880
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-02514
HFX24-105P
105.0
24.0
22
20
440
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-03014
HFX48-105P
105.0
48.0
10
20
200
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-04014
HFX12-210P
210.0
12.0
22
20
440
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-05014
HFX24-210P
210.0
24.0
11
20
220
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-05514
HFX48-210P
210.0
48.0
5
20
100
Yellow (YE), White (WH)
526-06014
TYPE
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
262
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a262
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Electrical panel labelling, thermal transfer
• Helatag 880 (Yellow matt), removable
• Helatag 1211 (Yellow) for rough surfaces
In nearly all areas, especially for cable and wire identification in
computer and electronic business. For problem-free printing, we
recommend our software TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Suited to labelling electrical panels
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Switchgear application.
MATERIAL
Type 880, Vinyl,
yellow matt (MTYE), removable
MATERIAL
Type 1211, Vinyl (PVC),
yellow gloss (GSYE)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +80 °C
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
80 µm
Thickness of Foil (µm)
83 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Good resistance to water,
oil and most solvents.
Chem. Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel,
aliphatic solvents, weak acids,
salts and alkalis.
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG15-09TE-880-YE
15.0
9.0
89.0
5
10,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12174
TAG16-06TE-880-YE
16.5
6.0
101.6
5
20,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12172
TAG19-11TE-880-YE
19.0
11.0
89.0
4
10,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12175
TAG20-08TE-880-YE
20.0
8.0
101.6
4
10,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12173
TAG38-11TE-880-YE
38.0
11.0
85.1
2
5,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12176
TAG56-22TE-880-YE
56.0
22.0
62.0
1
2,000
Yellow matt (MTYE)
596-12177
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
TAG15-09TE-1211-YE
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
15.0
9.0
89.0
5
10,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-21211
TAG16-06TE-1211-YE
16.5
6.0
101.6
5
20,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-01211
TAG19-11TE-1211-YE
19.0
11.0
89.0
4
10,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-31211
TAG20-08TE-1211-YE
20.0
8.0
101.6
4
10,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-11211
TAG38-11TE-1211-YE
38.0
11.0
85.1
2
5,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-41211
TAG56-22TE-1211-YE
56.0
22.0
62.0
1
2,000
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-51211
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a263
263
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Electrical panel labelling, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1216 (White) for rough surfaces
In nearly all areas, especially for cable and wire identification in the
computer and electronics industry. For problem-free printing, we
recommend our software TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Suited to labelling electrical panels
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
TYPE
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Clear and permanent identification.
Width of
Liner (WL)
MATERIAL
Type 1216,
Polyethylene white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-30 °C to +60 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
110 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel,
aliphatic solvents, weak acids,
salts and alkalis.
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG05-08TC-1216-WH
5.0
8.0
85.0
16
25,000
White (WH)
596-12147
TAG05-15TC-1216-WH
5.0
15.0
85.0
16
25,000
White (WH)
596-12151
TAG06-10TC-1216-WH
6.0
10.0
85.0
13
25,000
White (WH)
596-12149
TAG08-15TC-1216-WH
8.0
15.0
85.0
10
25,000
White (WH)
596-12152
264
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a264
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Labels for control panel identification, laser
• Helatag 1102 (Yellow)
Used where clarity of print is most important and is ideally suited for
printing barcodes and high definition graphics.
A range of sizes and materials are available to suit most cable
marking and asset identification needs.
For problem-free printing, we recommend our easy to use windows
based TagPrint Pro software program, which comes pre-loaded
with all our standard label templates so you can start producing
labels immediately.
Features and Benefits
• Yellow rating labels for component marking
• Crisp and clear text, barcodes and graphics
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for
those wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Clearly identified labels ensure easy network wire and cable management.
MATERIAL
Type 1102, Polyester, yellow (YE)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents,
butanol, ethyl and butylcellosolve
solvent, battery acid, UV light.
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Sheets
per Pack
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG122LA4-1102-YE
15.0
9.0
372
27
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-21102
TAG120LA4-1102-YE
15.2
6.4
528
19
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-01102
TAG154LA4-1102-YE
17.0
9.0
341
30
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-51102
TAG124LA4-1102-YE
19.0
11.0
260
20
5,000
Yellow (YE)
594-41102
TAG13LA4-1102-YE
19.1
6.4
440
23
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-31102
TAG121LA4-1102-YE
20.0
8.0
315
32
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-11102
TAG62LA4-1102-YE
31.8
9.5
180
28
5,000
Yellow (YE)
594-81102
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a265
265
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Labels for control panel identification, laser
• Helatag 1101 (White)
Used where clarity of print is most important and is ideally suited for
printing barcodes and high definition graphics.
A range of sizes and materials are available to suit most cable
marking and asset identification needs.
For problem-free printing, we recommend our easy to use
windows based TagPrint Pro software program, which comes
pre-loaded with all our standard label templates so you can start
producing labels immediately.
Features and Benefits
• White rating labels for component marking
• Crisp and clear text, barcodes and graphics
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for
those wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Helatag self laminating labels.
MATERIAL
Type 1101, Polyester, white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
petrol, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and Butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid, UV light.
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Sheets
per Pack
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG156LA4-1101-WH
10.2
10.2
532
19
10,000
White (WH)
594-81101
TAG122LA4-1101-WH
15.0
9.0
372
27
10,000
White (WH)
594-31101
TAG120LA4-1101-WH
15.2
6.4
528
19
10,000
White (WH)
594-11101
TAG11LA4-1101-WH
16.5
5.1
605
17
10,000
White (WH)
594-01101
TAG154LA4-1101-WH
17.0
9.0
341
30
10,000
White (WH)
594-61101
TAG124LA4-1101-WH
19.0
11.0
260
20
5,000
White (WH)
594-11017
TAG13LA4-1101-WH
19.1
6.4
440
23
10,000
White (WH)
594-41101
TAG121LA4-1101-WH
20.0
8.0
315
32
10,000
White (WH)
594-21101
TAG155LA4-1101-WH
25.4
8.5
231
22
5,000
White (WH)
594-71101
TAG15LA4-1101-WH
25.4
12.7
154
33
5,000
White (WH)
594-91101
TAG162LA4-1101-WH
38.1
12.7
110
23
2,500
White (WH)
594-11010
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
266
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a266
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Cotton cloth labels, manual marking
• Material 270 (YE)
For fast on-site identification of component parts, switching devices
and other operating equipment.
Features and Benefits
• Yellow fabric adhesive labels
• Supplied in handy pocket-sized booklets
• Booklet cover protects labels when stored
• Easily remove or reposition labels as required
• No sticky residue on removal
• Labels available with or without black border
• Use T82 marker pen for market leading mark endurance
Always on hand: Labels in a convenient, pocket sized and lightweight booklet.
TYPE
Description
Width
(W)
MATERIAL
Type 270, Cotton cloth,
yellow (YE)
Operating Temperature
-29 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Synthetic rubber
Thickness of Foil (µm)
150 µm
Chem. Material Properties
resistant to oils and water,
removable without residue
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG122FB-270-YE
15.0
9.0
70
700
Yellow (YE)
598-92227
TAG124FB-270-YE
19.0
11.0
44
440
Yellow (YE)
598-92427
With border
TAG121FB-270-YE
20.0
8.0
60
600
Yellow (YE)
598-92127
TAG125FB-270-YE
38.0
11.0
22
220
Yellow (YE)
598-92527
TAG122B-270-YE
15.0
9.0
70
700
Yellow (YE)
598-12227
TAG120B-270-YE
15.0
6.0
105
1,050
Yellow (YE)
598-12027
19.0
11.0
44
440
Yellow (YE)
598-12427
20.0
8.0
60
600
Yellow (YE)
598-12127
Without border
TAG124B-270-YE
TAG121B-270-YE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a267
267
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Cotton cloth labels, manual marking
• HELASIGN, Material 270 (Yellow), A4 Sheets
For areas where high label visibility is required, or where temporary
labels are needed. The synthetic rubber adhesive allows the easy
removal or repositioning of the label when needed. Using the T82
pens ensures clarity of written text and excellent mark permanence.
Features and Benefits
• Yellow fabric adhesive labels
• Easily remove or reposition labels as required
• No sticky residue on removal
• Labels available with or without black border
• Use T82 marker pen for market leading mark endurance
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
MATERIAL
Type 270, Cotton cloth, yellow (YE)
Operating Temperature
-29 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Synthetic rubber
Thickness of Foil (µm)
150 µm
Chem. Material Properties
resistant to oils and water,
removable without residue
Helatag cotton fabric labels will adhere to most surfaces.
Please note: These labels are
not suitable for laser printing.
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG122FA4-270-YE
15.0
9.0
348
9,300
Yellow (YE)
597-92227
TAG124FA4-270-YE
19.0
11.0
240
6,000
Yellow (YE)
597-92427
TAG121FA4-270-YE
20.0
8.0
315
7,875
Yellow (YE)
597-92127
TYPE
Description
With border
TAG125FA4-270-YE
38.0
11.0
130
3,250
Yellow (YE)
597-92527
TAG127FA4-270-YE
56.0
22.0
39
975
Yellow (YE)
597-92727
TAG128FA4-270-YE
60.0
35.0
24
600
Yellow (YE)
597-92827
TAG120A4-270-YE
15.0
6.0
611
15,275
Yellow (YE)
597-12027
TAG122A4-270-YE
15.0
9.0
348
9,300
Yellow (YE)
597-12227
TAG124A4-270-YE
19.0
11.0
240
6,000
Yellow (YE)
597-12427
20.0
8.0
315
7,875
Yellow (YE)
597-12127
26.0
10.0
196
4,900
Yellow (YE)
597-12327
TAG126A4-270-YE
30.0
20.0
36
2,100
Yellow (YE)
597-12627
TAG125A4-270-YE
38.0
11.0
130
3,250
Yellow (YE)
597-12527
TAG127A4-270-YE
56.0
22.0
39
975
Yellow (YE)
597-12727
TAG128A4-270-YE
60.0
35.0
24
600
Yellow (YE)
597-12827
TAG121A4-270-YE
TAG123A4-270-YE
Without border
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
268
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a268
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.3
Control Panel Labelling
Cotton cloth labels, manual marking
• HELASIGN, Material 265 (White), A4 Sheets
For areas where high label visibility is required, or where temporary
labels are needed. The synthetic rubber adhesive allows the easy
removal or repositioning of the label when needed. Using the T82
pens ensures clarity of written text and excellent mark permanence.
Features and Benefits
• White fabric adhesive labels
• Easily remove or reposition labels as required
• No sticky residue on removal
• Labels available with black border
• Use T82 marker pen for market leading mark endurance
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Helatag cotton fabric labels will adhere to most surfaces.
Please note: These labels are
not suitable for laser printing.
TYPE
TAG124FA4-265-WH
MATERIAL
Type 265, Cotton cloth, white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-29 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Synthetic rubber
Thickness of Foil (µm)
150 µm
Chem. Material Properties
resistant to oils and water,
removable without residue
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
19.0
11.0
240
6,000
White (WH)
597-92426
TAG126FA4-265-WH
30.0
20.0
36
900
White (WH)
597-92626
TAG125FA4-265-WH
38.0
11.0
120
3,000
White (WH)
597-92526
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
T82S-BK
2
Black (BK)
500-50820
T82R-RD
2
Red (RD)
500-50822
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a269
269
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Labels for control panel identification,
thermal transfer
• Material 1220 (White)
Panel Labels are durable adhesive labels made from a thick material
that is designed to replace traditional engraved plastic plates. The
white and silver glossy colours are suited to industrial control panels,
switchgear, data racks, and general equipment labeling.
Create crisp and clear professional looking labels by printing with
TT4000+ or TT430 printers and TT822OUT ribbons.
Simple label design creation is easily achieved using TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Cost effective replacement for engraved plastic plates
• High performance adhesive and compressible foam backing
ensures optimal adhesion to uneven surfaces if required
• Print high contrast text and barcodes
• Rounded corners ensure better long term durability of adhesion
• Wide range of sizes to suit most commonly installed equipment
• Print high contrast text and barcodes
• Print 'On Site' not order 'Off Site'
• Special sizes and colours are possible on request
• TagPrint Pro label printing software available
Panel labels are an ideal replacement for engraved plates.
MATERIAL
Type 1220, Polyester (PET), white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +90 °C
Curing Temperature
from +4 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
625 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to ageing,
weathering and UV-radiation.
Extensive resistance to the influence
of chemicals and solvents.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT122OUT, TT822OUT
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG13-07TDK1-1220-WH
13.0
7.0
21.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00560
TAG22-22TDK1-1220-WH
22.0
22.0
28.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00561
TAG27-08TDK1-1220-WH
27.0
8.0
33.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00562
TAG27-12.5TDK1-1220-WH
27.0
12.5
33.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00558
TAG27-15TDK1-1220-WH
27.0
15.0
33.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00563
TAG27-18TDK1-1220-WH
27.0
18.0
33.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00564
TAG27-27TDK1-1220-WH
27.0
27.0
33.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00565
TAG35-18TDK1-1220-WH
35.0
18.0
41.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00566
TAG45-15TDK1-1220-WH
45.0
15.0
51.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00567
TAG45-25TDK1-1220-WH
45.0
25.0
51.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-00568
TAG60-30TDK1-1220-WH
60.0
30.0
66.0
1
500
White (WH)
596-00569
TAG90-45TDK1-1220-WH
90.0
45.0
96.0
1
500
White (WH)
596-00570
TAG100-30TDK1-1220-WH
100.0
30.0
106.0
1
250
White (WH)
596-00571
TAG100-70TDK1-1220-WH
100.0
70.0
106.0
1
250
White (WH)
596-00572
270
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a270
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Labels for control panel identification,
thermal transfer
• Material 1221 (Silver)
Panel Labels are durable adhesive labels made from a thick material
that is designed to replace traditional engraved plastic plates. The
white and silver glossy colours are suited to industrial control panels,
switchgear, data racks, and general equipment labeling.
Create crisp and clear professional looking labels by printing with
TT4000+ or TT430 printers and TT822OUT ribbons.
Simple label design creation is easily achieved using TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Cost effective replacement for engraved plastic plates
• High performance adhesive and compressible foam backing
ensures optimal adhesion to uneven surfaces if required
• Print high contrast text and barcodes
• Rounded corners ensure better long term durability of adhesion
• Wide range of sizes to suit most commonly installed equipment
• Print high contrast text and barcodes
• Print 'On Site' not order 'Off Site'
• Special sizes and colours are possible on request
• TagPrint Pro label printing software available
Width
(W)
TYPE
Height
(H)
Panel labels are an ideal replacement for engraved plates.
MATERIAL
Type 1221, Polyester (PET), silver (SR)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +90 °C
Curing Temperature
from +4 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
625 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to ageing,
weathering and UV-radiation.
Extensive resistance to the influence
of chemicals and solvents.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT122OUT, TT822OUT
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG13-07TDK1-1221-SR
13.0
7.0
21.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00573
TAG22-22TDK1-1221-SR
22.0
22.0
28.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00574
TAG27-08TDK1-1221-SR
27.0
8.0
33.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00575
TAG27-12.5TDK1-1221-SR
27.0
12.5
33.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00576
TAG27-15TDK1-1221-SR
27.0
15.0
33.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00577
TAG27-18TDK1-1221-SR
27.0
18.0
33.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00578
TAG27-27-TDK1-1221-SR
27.0
27.0
33.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00579
TAG35-18-TDK1-1221-SR
35.0
18.0
41.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00580
TAG45-15TDK1-1221-SR
45.0
15.0
51.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00581
TAG45-25TDK1-1221-SR
45.0
25.0
51.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-00582
TAG60-30TDK1-1221-SR
60.0
30.0
66.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-00583
TAG90-45TDK1-1221-SR
90.0
45.0
96.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-00584
TAG100-30TDK1-1221-SR
100.0
30.0
106.0
1
250
Silver (SR)
596-00585
TAG100-70TDK1-1221-SR
100.0
70.0
106.0
1
250
Silver (SR)
596-00586
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a271
271
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Type label identification, thermal transfer
• Material 1204 (Silver)
Scratch-resistant type plates for the industry. The high temperature
range suits a wide range of applications on flat surfaces. The
adhesive is also suitable for critical surfaces like plastic and paint.
Features and Benefits
• Marking labels made of matt silver Polyester
• Replacement option for aluminium plates
• Print labels with customer unique references
• Use text, graphics and barcodes as required
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
MATERIAL
Type 1204, Polyester (PET),
silver matt (SR)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
55 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Excellent resistance to water,
alcohol, most oils, greases, fuel,
aliphatic solvents, weak acids,
salts and alkalis.
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width (W)
Height (H)
Width of Liner (WL)
Labels per Row
Pack Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG71TD6-1204-SR
12.7
11.1
101.6
6
15,000
Silver (SR)
596-12071
TAG13TD4-1204-SR
19.1
6.4
101.6
4
10,000
Silver (SR)
596-12043
TAG16TD3-1204-SR
22.9
6.4
80.0
3
10,000
Silver (SR)
596-12046
TAG34TD3-1204-SR
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-34120
TAG15TD3-1204-SR
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-12045
TAG31TD3-1204-SR
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
Silver (SR)
596-31120
TAGR2TD1-1204-SR
30.0
-
30.0
1
37.5 m
Silver (SR)
596-12042
TAG35TD3-1204-SR
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-12035
TAG17TD2-1204-SR
38.1
6.4
85.1
2
5,000
Silver (SR)
596-12047
TAG27TD2-1204-SR
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
5,000
Silver (SR)
596-27120
TAG67TD2-1204-SR
38.1
31.8
85.1
2
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12067
TAG69TD2-1204-SR
40.6
22.9
89.0
2
2,500
Silver (SR)
596-12069
TAG77TD1-1204-SR
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-12077
TAG73TD1-1204-SR
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-73124
TAG66TD1-1204-SR
50.8
36.5
56.8
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12066
TAG68TD1-1204-SR
63.5
25.4
69.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-12068
TAG63TD1-1204-SR
63.5
38.1
70.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12063
TAG76TD1-1204-SR
63.5
50.8
70.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-12076
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
272
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a272
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Professional type plate on a heating unit.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Type label identification, thermal transfer
• Material 1204 (Silver)
TYPE
Width (W)
Height (H)
Width of Liner (WL)
Labels per Row
Pack Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG72TD1-1204-SR
69.9
31.8
76.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12072
TAG65TD1-1204-SR
76.2
36.5
82.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12065
TAG62TD1-1204-SR
76.2
50.8
82.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-12062
TAG64TD1-1204-SR
88.9
36.5
95.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-12064
TAG97TD1-1204-SR
101.6
74.0
106.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-71204
TAGR3TD1-1204-SR
104.0
-
108.0
1
75.0 m
Silver (SR)
596-31204
TAG02TD1-1204-SR
104.0
12.0
104.0
1
5,000
Silver (SR)
596-21204
TAG78TD1-1204-SR
104.0
140.0
105.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-12078
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Asset identification label, thermal transfer
• Material 1206 (White)
Scratch-resistant general identification for industrial applications.
The high temperature range suits a wide range of applications on
flat surfaces. The adhesive is also suitable for critical surfaces such as
plastic and paint coated.
Date of issue: January 2014
Features and Benefits
• Ideal for machinery operating in high temperature areas
(up to +150 °C)
• Barcodes and alphanumeric text remain pin sharp on this hig
quality material
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Helatag label for a permanent asset identification.
MATERIAL
Type 1206, Polyester (PET),
white gloss (GSWH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
50 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel, aliphatic
solvents, weak acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a273
273
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Asset identification label, thermal transfer
• Material 1206 (White)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG71TD6-1206-WH
12.7
11.1
101.6
6
15,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12671
TAG13TD4-1206-WH
19.1
6.4
101.6
4
10,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12061
TAG16TD3-1206-WH
22.9
6.4
80.0
3
10,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12616
TAG61TD3-1206-WH
25.4
4.8
89.0
3
10,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12661
TAG01TD3-1206-WH
25.4
6.4
89.0
3
7,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-01120
TAG34TD3-1206-WH
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12634
TAG15TD3-1206-WH
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12615
TAG31TD3-1206-WH
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12631
TAG35TD3-1206-WH
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12635
TAG17TD2-1206-WH
38.1
6.4
85.1
2
5,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12617
TAG27TD2-1206-WH
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
2,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12627
TAG67TD2-1206-WH
38.1
31.8
85.1
2
2,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12667
TAG69TD2-1206-WH
40.6
22.9
89.0
2
2,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12669
TAG77TD1-1206-WH
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-71206
TAG73TD1-1206-WH
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12673
TAG66TD1-1206-WH
50.8
36.5
56.8
1
1,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12666
TAG68TD1-1206-WH
63.5
25.4
69.0
1
2,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12668
TAG63TD1-1206-WH
63.5
38.1
70.0
1
1,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12663
TAG76TD1-1206-WH
63.5
50.8
70.0
1
500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-61206
TAG4TD1-1206-WH
65.0
20.0
70.0
1
2,500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-41206
TAG72TD1-1206-WH
69.9
31.8
76.0
1
1,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12672
TAG65TD1-1206-WH
76.2
36.5
82.0
1
1,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12665
TAG62TD1-1206-WH
76.2
50.8
82.0
1
500
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12662
TAG64TD1-1206-WH
88.9
36.5
95.0
1
1,000
White gloss (GSWH)
596-12664
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
274
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a274
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Component labelling, thermal transfer
• Material 1210 (White), for rough surfaces
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality print
clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range of
materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
Features and Benefits
• Suited to slightly rough surfaces such as computer panels
• Adheres to rounded surfaces
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Width (W)
Height (H)
TAG08-10TC-1210-WH
8.0
TAG71TD6-1210-WH
12.7
TAG13TD4-1210-WH
Rapid identification marking of products.
MATERIAL
Type 1210, Vinyl (PVC),
white gloss (WH)
Operating Temperature
-20 °C to +80 °C
Curing Temperature
from +5 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
83 µm
Chem. Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel,
aliphatic solvents, weak acids,
salts and alkalis.
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Width of Liner (WL)
Labels per Row
Pack Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
10.0
85.0
10
25,000
White (WH)
596-12150
11.1
101.6
6
15,000
White (WH)
596-12161
19.1
6.4
101.6
4
10,000
White (WH)
596-12137
TAG16TD3-1210-WH
22.9
6.4
80.0
3
10,000
White (WH)
596-12139
TAG29TD3-1210-WH
25.4
6.4
89.0
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12142
TAG34TD3-1210-WH
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12144
TAG15TD3-1210-WH
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12138
TAG31TD3-1210-WH
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
White (WH)
596-12143
TAG35TD3-1210-WH
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12145
TAG17TD2-1210-WH
38.1
6.4
85.1
2
5,000
White (WH)
596-12140
TAG27TD2-1210-WH
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12141
TAG67TD2-1210-WH
38.1
31.8
85.1
2
1,000
White (WH)
596-12158
TAG69TD2-1210-WH
40.6
22.9
89.0
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12160
TAG77TD1-1210-WH
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12165
TAG73TD1-1210-WH
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12163
TAG66TD1-1210-WH
50.8
36.5
56.8
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-12157
TAG68TD1-1210-WH
63.5
25.4
69.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12159
TAG76TD1-1210-WH
63.5
50.8
70.0
1
500
White (WH)
596-12164
TAG72TD1-1210-WH
69.9
31.8
76.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-12162
TAG65TD1-1210-WH
76.2
36.5
82.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-12156
TAG62TD1-1210-WH
76.2
50.8
82.0
1
500
White (WH)
596-12153
TAG64TD1-1210-WH
88.9
36.5
95.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-12155
TAG140TD1-1210-WH
96.0
20.0
100.0
1
2,500
White (WH)
596-12146
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes. Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a275
275
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Asset tracking labels, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1205 (White), removable
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality
print clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range
of materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
Features and Benefits
• Removable labels that leave no adhesive residue
• Ideally suited to temporary identifcation of metal and plastic parts
• Barcodes and alphanumeric text remain pin sharp on this hig
quality material
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Width
(W)
TYPE
Easy to apply and simple to remove.
MATERIAL
Type 1205, Polyester (PET),
white (WH), removable
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +120 °C
Curing Temperature
from +15 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
58 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel, aliphatic
solvents, weak acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG13TD4-1205-WH
19.1
6.4
101.6
4
10,000
White (WH)
596-12013
TAG15TD3-1205-WH
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12015
TAG31TD3-1205-WH
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
White (WH)
596-12031
TAG27TD2-1205-WH
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12027
TAG77TD1-1205-WH
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12577
TAG73TD1-1205-WH
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12473
TAG76TD1-1205-WH
63.5
50.8
70.0
1
500
White (WH)
596-12576
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
276
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a276
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Type label identification, laser
• Material 1103 (Silver)
Used where clarity of print is most important and is ideally suited
for printing barcodes and high definition graphics.
A range of sizes and materials are available to suit most cable
marking and asset identification needs.
For problem-free printing, we recommend our easy to use windows
based TagPrint Pro software program, which comes pre-loaded
with all our standard label templates so you can start producing
labels immediately.
Features and Benefits
• Matt-silver rating labels for component marking
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for those
wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Width
(W)
TYPE
Highly visible and clearly printed labels identify quality assets.
MATERIAL
Type 1103, Polyester, silver (SR)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and Butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid, UV light.
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Sheets
per Pack
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG155LA4-1103-SR
25.4
8.5
231
22
5,000
Silver (SR)
594-01103
TAG15LA4-1103-SR
25.4
12.7
154
33
5,000
Silver (SR)
594-11103
TAG162LA4-1103-SR
38.1
12.7
110
23
2,500
Silver (SR)
594-21103
TAG165LA4-1103-SR
48.3
21.2
52
20
1,000
Silver (SR)
594-31103
TAG169LA4-1103-SR
48.3
33.9
32
32
1,000
Silver (SR)
594-41103
TAG170LA4-1103-SR
63.5
33.9
24
21
500
Silver (SR)
594-51103
TAG171LA4-1103-SR
210.0
297.0
1
25
25
Silver (SR)
594-61103
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a277
277
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Type label identification, laser
• Helatag 1102 (Yellow)
Used where clarity of print is most important and is ideally suited for
printing barcodes and high definition graphics.
A range of sizes and materials are available to suit most cable
marking and asset identification needs.
For problem-free printing, we recommend our easy to use windows
based TagPrint Pro software program, which comes pre-loaded
with all our standard label templates so you can start producing
labels immediately.
Features and Benefits
• Yellow rating labels for component marking
• Crisp and clear text, barcodes and graphics
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for
those wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Optimal print results with a range of office laser printers.
MATERIAL
Type 1102, Polyester, yellow (YE)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol,
gasoline, cleaning solvents, butanol,
ethyl and butylcellosolve solvent,
battery acid, UV light.
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Labels
per Sheet
Sheets
per Pack
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG122LA4-1102-YE
15.0
9.0
372
27
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-21102
TAG120LA4-1102-YE
15.2
6.4
528
19
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-01102
TAG154LA4-1102-YE
17.0
9.0
341
30
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-51102
TAG124LA4-1102-YE
19.0
11.0
260
20
5,000
Yellow (YE)
594-41102
TAG13LA4-1102-YE
19.1
6.4
440
23
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-31102
TAG121LA4-1102-YE
20.0
8.0
315
32
10,000
Yellow (YE)
594-11102
TAG62LA4-1102-YE
31.8
9.5
180
28
5,000
Yellow (YE)
594-81102
TAG171LA4-1102-YE
210.0
297.0
1
25
25
Yellow (YE)
594-71102
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
278
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a278
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Type label identification, laser
• Helatag 1101 (White)
Used where clarity of print is most important and is ideally suited for
printing barcodes and high definition graphics.
A range of sizes and materials are available to suit most cable
marking and asset identification needs.
For problem-free printing, we recommend our easy to use windows
based TagPrint Pro software program, which comes pre-loaded
with all our standard label templates so you can start producing
labels immediately.
Features and Benefits
• White rating labels for component marking
• Crisp and clear text, barcodes and graphics
• Rounded edge design gives addtional bonding strength
• Simple and efficient label design and printing with TagPrint Pro
labelling software
• PDF templates available from www.hellermanntyton.com for
those wishing to use MS Word
• Clear protective box to ensures labels stay as good as new
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Helatag label for a permanent asset identification.
MATERIAL
Type 1101, Polyester, white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to alcohol, petrol,
cleaning solvents, butanol, ethyl and
Butylcellosolve solvent, battery acid,
UV light.
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width (W)
Height (H)
Labels per Sheet
Sheets per Pack
Pack Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG156LA4-1101-WH
10.2
10.2
532
19
10,000
White (WH)
594-81101
TAG122LA4-1101-WH
15.0
9.0
372
27
10,000
White (WH)
594-31101
TAG120LA4-1101-WH
15.2
6.4
528
19
10,000
White (WH)
594-11101
TAG11LA4-1101-WH
16.5
5.1
605
17
10,000
White (WH)
594-01101
TAG154LA4-1101-WH
17.0
9.0
341
30
10,000
White (WH)
594-61101
TAG124LA4-1101-WH
19.0
11.0
260
20
5,000
White (WH)
594-11017
TAG13LA4-1101-WH
19.1
6.4
440
23
10,000
White (WH)
594-41101
TAG121LA4-1101-WH
20.0
8.0
315
32
10,000
White (WH)
594-21101
TAG155LA4-1101-WH
25.4
8.5
231
22
5,000
White (WH)
594-71101
TAG15LA4-1101-WH
25.4
12.7
154
33
5,000
White (WH)
594-91101
TAG62LA4-1101-WH
31.8
9.5
180
28
5,000
White (WH)
594-11016
TAG162LA4-1101-WH
38.1
12.7
110
23
2,500
White (WH)
594-11010
TAG150LA4-1101-WH
48.3
8.5
132
19
2,500
White (WH)
594-51101
TAG163LA4-1101-WH
48.3
12.7
88
29
2,500
White (WH)
594-11011
TAG165LA4-1101-WH
48.3
21.2
52
20
1,000
White (WH)
594-11012
TAG169LA4-1101-WH
48.3
33.9
32
32
1,000
White (WH)
594-11013
TAG170LA4-1101-WH
63.5
33.9
24
21
500
White (WH)
594-11014
TAG171LA4-1101-WH
210.0
297.0
1
25
25
White (WH)
594-11015
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a279
279
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Warehouse labelling, thermal transfer
• Material 1213
Identification of storage systems with barcode and location
information. Coloured labels for general marking of parts and
components, samples and blocked goods in quality assurance,
storage boxes and barrels.
Features and Benefits
• Warehouse and shelving label
• Supplied on a continuous roll and cut by hand or automated
with printer cutters
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
MATERIAL
Type 1213, Vinyl (PVC), glossy colours
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +90 °C
Curing Temperature
from +8 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
66 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Resistant to water, alcohol, most oils,
greases, fuel, aliphatic solvents,
weak acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT, TTRW
Width
(W)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAGR4TD1-1213-YE
25.0
25.0
50 m
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-03103
TAG108TD1-1213-GN
40.0
40.0
50 m
Green (GN)
596-12166
TYPE
TAG108TD1-1213-YE
40.0
40.0
50 m
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12167
TAGR1TD-1213-GN
101.6
101.6
50 m
Green (GN)
596-12170
TAGR1TD-1213-RD
101.6
101.6
50 m
Red (RD)
596-12168
TAGR1TD-1213-WH
101.6
101.6
50 m
White (WH)
596-12171
TAGR1TD-1213-YE
101.6
101.6
50 m
Yellow gloss (GSYE)
596-12169
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
280
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a280
Date of issue: January 2014
Large and highly visible pipe marking.
Identification Systems
5.4
Industrial Identification
Printed circuit board labels (ESD), thermal transfer
• Helatag 823 (White) PCB labelling
In nearly all areas, especially for cable and wire identification in
computer and electronic business. For problem-free printing, we
recommend our software TagPrint Pro.
Features and Benefits
• Labels for printed circuit boards
• Voltage rejecting adhesive properties
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Secure identification of component parts and circuit boards with Helatag.
MATERIAL
Type 823, Polyester, white (WH)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
51 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance against alcohol,
petrol, solvents, butanol, ethyl- and
butylcellosolve solvents, battery acid.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG16TD3-823-WH
22.9
6.4
80.0
3
10,000
White (WH)
596-16823
TAG61TD3-823-WH
25.4
4.8
89.0
3
10,000
White (WH)
596-61823
TAG29TD3-823-WH
25.4
6.4
89.0
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-29823
TAG34TD3-823-WH
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-34823
TAG35TD3-823-WH
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-35823
TAG17TD2-823-WH
38.1
6.4
85.1
2
5,000
White (WH)
596-17823
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a281
281
Identification Systems
5.5
Security Labelling
Tamper evident security labelling, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1203 (Silver)
Electrical and electronic identification. Security and warranty
identification of components, housings and nameplates.
Features and Benefits
• Tamper-evident labels leave clear reminder that label has
been removed
• Mark assets securely and unambiguously
• Print labels with customer unique references
• Use text, graphics and barcodes as required
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Highly visible tamper evidence.
MATERIAL
Type 1203, Polyester (PET),
silver matt (SR), tamper proof
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +120 °C
Curing Temperature
from +7 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
53 µm
Chem.
Material Properties
Excellent resistance to water, alcohol,
most oils, greases, fuel, freezing fluid,
brake fluid, aliphatic solvents, weak
acids, salts and alkalis.
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Specifications
CSA, UL-Recognised
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG71TD6-1203-SR
12.7
11.1
101.6
6
15,000
Silver (SR)
596-71120
TAG13TD4-1203-SR
19.1
6.4
101.6
4
10,000
Silver (SR)
596-31203
TAG16TD3-1203-SR
22.9
6.4
80.0
3
10,000
Silver (SR)
596-61203
TAG34TD3-1203-SR
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-41203
TAG15TD3-1203-SR
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-51203
TAG31TD3-1203-SR
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
Silver (SR)
596-11203
TAG35TD3-1203-SR
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
Silver (SR)
596-35120
TAG27TD2-1203-SR
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
2,500
Silver (SR)
596-71203
TAG67TD2-1203-SR
38.1
31.8
85.1
2
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-67120
TAG69TD2-1203-SR
40.6
22.9
89.0
2
2,500
Silver (SR)
596-69120
TYPE
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
282
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a282
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.5
Security Labelling
Tamper evident security labelling, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1203 (Silver)
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG77TD1-1203-SR
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-77120
TAG73TD1-1203-SR
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-73120
TAG66TD1-1203-SR
50.8
36.5
56.8
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-66120
TAG68TD1-1203-SR
63.5
25.4
69.0
1
2,000
Silver (SR)
596-68120
TAG63TD1-1203-SR
63.5
38.1
70.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-63120
TAG76TD1-1203-SR
63.5
50.8
70.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-76120
TAG72TD1-1203-SR
69.9
31.8
76.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-72120
TAG65TD1-1203-SR
76.2
36.5
82.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-65120
TAG62TD1-1203-SR
76.2
50.8
82.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-21203
TYPE
TAG64TD1-1203-SR
88.9
36.5
95.0
1
1,000
Silver (SR)
596-64120
TAG98TD1-1203-SR
101.0
160.0
105.0
1
250
Silver (SR)
596-98120
TAG97TD1-1203-SR
101.6
74.0
106.0
1
500
Silver (SR)
596-97120
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a283
283
Identification Systems
5.5
Security Labelling
Tamper evident security labelling, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1208 (White), fragmenting
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality
print clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range
of materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
Features and Benefits
• A security label that fragments on removal
• Designed weak spots makes label removal time consuming
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
... if an asset label has been
tampered with.
MATERIAL
Type 1208, Acrylate foil (AC),
white (WH), tamper proof
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Curing Temperature
from +4 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
56 µm
Chem. Material
Properties
Resistant to oils, water and solvents
Recommended
Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG71TD6-1208-WH
12.7
11.1
101.6
6
15,000
White (WH)
596-20871
TAG34TD3-1208-WH
25.4
9.5
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12083
TAG15TD3-1208-WH
25.4
12.7
85.1
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12080
TAG31TD3-1208-WH
25.4
19.1
85.1
3
5,000
White (WH)
596-12084
TAG35TD3-1208-WH
31.8
9.5
101.6
3
7,500
White (WH)
596-12085
TAG17TD2-1208-WH
38.1
6.4
85.1
2
5,000
White (WH)
596-12081
TAG27TD2-1208-WH
38.1
19.1
85.1
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12082
TAG67TD2-1208-WH
38.1
31.8
85.1
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12087
TAG69TD2-1208-WH
40.6
22.9
89.0
2
2,500
White (WH)
596-12089
TAG77TD1-1208-WH
50.8
22.9
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-71208
TAG73TD1-1208-WH
50.8
25.4
55.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-31208
TAG66TD1-1208-WH
50.8
36.5
56.8
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-12086
TAG68TD1-1208-WH
63.5
25.4
69.0
1
2,000
White (WH)
596-12088
TAG72TD1-1208-WH
69.9
31.8
76.0
1
1,000
White (WH)
596-20872
TYPE
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
284
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a284
Date of issue: January 2014
A secure way of identifying ...
Identification Systems
5.6
Hazardous Area Identification
Stainless Steel Printing System
• M-BOSS Lite Printer
• M-BOSS Lite Markers
M-BOSS Lite is the ideal stainless steel marker plate embossing
printer for low to medium volumes.
Installation is quick and it is very easy to operate. Due to it being
small in size, quiet in operation, and able to run off a normal
electrical supply, it is very easy to locate within your business.
All sizes will be printed in under a minute.
Space-saving and easy to use: M-BOSS Lite stainless steel embossing system.
Features and Benefits
• Marine grade stainless steel marker plate embossing printer for
low to medium volumes
• Used to identify pipes and cables
• Used in offshore platforms, floating production storage offloading
(FPSO), refineries, rail infrastructure, utilities, food, and solar farms
• Small enough to install in most premises
• Uses a standard electrical supply and only weighs 35kg
• MBML10X45 printed with 8 characters in under 10 seconds
• MBML20X90 printed with 69 characters in less than a minute
• Use 4.6mm wide cable ties and hand tool to securely fix marker
plate to cable
• Rivets can be applied to MBML20X90 and MBML20X45
if required
• Comes with 42-piece 4mm character set
• Letters: A B C D E F G H I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• Numbers: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
• Symbols: & - / . , ’
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
M-BOSS Lite
Patent Pending
Print Method
Embossed
Power Supply
230 Volt 50/60 Hz
Cycle Time
Just under 1 second per character
Printer Interfaces
USB 2.0
System Requirements
Microsoft Windows operating system
LxHxW
650 mm x 260 mm x 500 mm
Weight
35 kg
Specifications
CE
Width (W)
Length (L)
Pack Cont.
Article-No.
500.0
650.0
1
544-00000
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
MATERIAL
Stainless Steel (SS316)
Operating Temperature
-80 °C to +538 °C
Identification for hazardous environments: M-BOSS Lite stainless steel markers.
Strap Width
max. (G)
Number of
lines
MBML10X45
4.6
1
MBML10X90
4.6
1
MBML20X45
4.6
3
MBML20X90
4.6
3
Date of issue: January 2014
TYPE
Characters
per line
Number of
characters
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Pack
Cont.
Article-No.
8
8
10.0
45.0
1,000
544-80101
23
23
10.0
90.0
500
544-80102
8
24
20.0
45.0
1,000
544-80201
23
69
20.0
90.0
500
544-80202
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a285
285
Identification Systems
5.6
Hazardous Area Identification
Stainless Steel Pre-embossed Marking System,
manual
• Hellermark SSC
• Hellermark SSM
Hellermark is used in the rail, marine, offshore, petrochemical, food
and construction industries, for the identification of cables, pipes
and other equipment in harsh enviroments.
TYPE
SSM
TYPE
Marking Text
Pack Cont.
Article-No.
A
200
540-01010
B
200
540-01020
C
200
540-01030
D
200
540-01040
E
200
540-01050
F
200
540-01060
G
200
540-01070
H
200
540-01080
I
200
540-01090
Marking Text
Pack Cont.
Article-No.
J
200
540-01100
-
200
540-01703
K
200
540-01110
,
200
540-01702
L
200
540-01120
/
200
540-01720
.
200
540-01701
SSM
M
200
540-01130
N
200
540-01140
+
200
540-01700
O
200
540-01150
z
200
540-01730
P
200
540-01160
0
200
540-01600
Q
200
540-01170
1
200
540-01610
R
200
540-01180
2
200
540-01620
S
200
540-01190
3
200
540-01630
T
200
540-01200
4
200
540-01640
U
200
540-01210
5
200
540-01650
V
200
540-01220
6
200
540-01660
W
200
540-01230
7
200
540-01670
X
200
540-01240
8
200
540-01680
Y
200
540-01250
9
200
540-01690
Z
200
540-01260
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
Marker tiles per carrier
Pack Cont.
Article-No.
SSCPP (Plastic)
Width (W)
Length (L)
-
7.0
-
100
540-02011
SSC46
11.0
46.0
5
10
540-01046
SSC56
11.0
56.0
7
10
540-01056
SSC82
11.0
82.0
11
10
540-01082
SSC106
11.0
106.0
15
10
540-01106
SSC134
11.0
134.0
20
10
540-01134
SSC286
11.0
286.0
45
10
540-01286
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
286
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a286
Date of issue: January 2014
Hellermark SSC and SSM.
Features and Benefits
• Stainless steel pre-embossed marker tiles and carriers
• Made of grade 316 stainless steel for ideal use in
aggressive environments
• Insert marker tiles (SSM) into fitting carrier (SSC) and either
seal with a plastic cap (SSCPP) or close ends with pliers
• Fasten carriers using stainless steel cable ties with max. strap
width of 8 mm
• Carrier can be riveted or screw-fixed using two 3 mm holes at
each end
Identification Systems
5.6
Hazardous Area Identification
Protective Laminates, thermal transfer
• Helatag 1207 (Clear)
• Helatag 323 (White-Clear)
high temperature and weather resistant
The specially formulated adhesive labels give the highest quality
print clarity when printed on thermal transfer printers. The range
of materials and ribbons have been developed to suit the needs of
most users. Designing and printing labels is simple and users can
quickly print out professional labels in a matter of moments when
using TagPrint Pro labelling software.
Features and Benefits
• Generally used as an additional protective barrier over a label
• The barrier label needs to overlap the covered label
• Excellent print performance using TT822OUT ribbon
• Print with TT4000+, TT430 for best results
• Easy label design with TagPrint Pro
Helatag protective laminates.
MATERIAL
Type 1207, Polyester (PET),
transparent (CL)
MATERIAL
Type 323, Polyvinylidene
Fluoride, transparent (CL)
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +150 °C
Operating Temperature
-40 °C to +140 °C
Curing Temperature
from 0 °C
Curing Temperature
from +10 °C
Adhesive
Acrylic
Adhesive
Acrylic
Thickness of Foil (µm)
60 µm
Thickness of Foil (µm)
25 µm
Chem. Material Properties
excellent resistance against
alcohol, petrol, solvents,
butanol, ethyl- and butylcellosolve solvents, battery acid
Chem. Material Properties
Excellent resistance against
alcohol and solvents on
petroleum bases. Special
resistance against UV radiation.
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Recommended Ribbon Type
TT822OUT
Specifications
UL-Recognised
Width
(W)
TYPE
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
TAG1325TL3-1207-CL
30.5
17.8
101.6
3
5,000
Transparent (CL)
596-32512
TAG0638TL2-1207-CL
43.2
11.4
94.9
2
5,000
Transparent (CL)
596-63812
TAG1351TL1-1207-CL
55.9
17.8
62.0
1
2,000
Transparent (CL)
596-35112
TAG2551TL1-1207-CL
55.9
30.5
62.0
1
2,000
Transparent (CL)
596-55112
TAG3863TL1-1207-CL
68.6
43.2
75.0
1
1,000
Transparent (CL)
596-38631
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
TAG0638TL2-323-CL
Width
(W)
Height
(H)
Width of
Liner (WL)
Labels
per Row
Pack
Cont.
Colour
Article-No.
43.2
11.4
94.9
2
5,000
Transparent (CL)
596-38321
TAG1351TL1-323-CL
55.9
17.8
62.0
1
2,000
Transparent (CL)
596-51321
TAG2551TL1-323-CL
55.9
30.5
62.0
1
1,000
Transparent (CL)
596-52321
TAG3863TL1-323-CL
68.6
43.2
75.0
1
1,000
Transparent (CL)
596-63321
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a287
287
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Thermal Transfer Printer
• TT4000+
Features and Benefits
• High volume single sided printing
• Print on TLFX DS and TULT DS (Ladder Products)
• Print on TLFX, TULT, and TCGT (Continuous tubing)
• Print on Tiptags
• Print on Adhesive Labels
• Uses standard 300 m ribbons
• Barcodes: standard and 2D
• Print speed up to 125 mm/s
(30 mm/s recommended for Ladder Products and Tubing)
• Multiple language selection
• Windows drivers: 32 / 64 bit for Windows XP, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, and Windows 8
• Options: External Reel Holder (556-00451), Cutter (556-04025),
Perforator (556-04024)
TT4000+ series printer.
More information on printer accessories
can be found on page 293.
For problem-free printing
we recommend TagPrint Pro,
page 294.
TYPE
Article-No.
TT4000+ 300dpi
556-04000
Print Method
Thermal Transfer
Print Head Type
300 dpi, flat type
Print Speed
30, 40, 50, 75, 100, 125 mm/s
Max. Print Width
105.6 mm
Max. Label Length
1,000 mm
Printer Interfaces
RS232 C, USB 2.0, Ethernet 10/100 Base T
Supported
Barcodes, Printer
Standard, 2D
Printer Memory
64 MB RAM
LxHxW
446 x 274 x 242 mm
Weight
10 kg
Specifications
CE, FCC, UL
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
288
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a288
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Thermal Transfer Printer
• TT430
Features and Benefits
• Medium volume single sided printing
• Print on TLFX DS and TULT DS (Ladder Products)
• Print on TLFX, TULT and TCGT (Continuous tubing)
• Print on Tiptags
• Print on Adhesive Labels
• Uses standard ribbons
• Barcodes: standard and 2D
• Print speed up to 125 mm/s
(30mm/s recommended for Ladder Products and Tubing)
• Adjustable label sensor
• Multiple language selection
• Windows drivers: 32/64 bit for Windows XP, Windows Vista,
Windows 7, and Windows 8
• Options: Cutter (556-00452) and External Reel Holder (556-00451)
TT430 thermal transfer printer.
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
Article-No.
TT430
556-00450
Print Method
Thermal Transfer
Print Head Type
300 dpi, flat type
Print Speed
up to 125 mm/s
Max. Print Width
106 mm
Max. Label Length
1,000 mm
Printer Interfaces
USB 2.0, Ethernet 10/100 Base T
Supported Barcodes,
Printer
Standard and 2D
Printer Memory
64 MB RAM
LxHxW
322 mm x 187,5 mm x 253 mm
Weight
4 kg
Specifications
CE, FCC, UL
Subject to technical changes.
TYPE
Article-No.
P430 Perforator
556-00456
S430 Cutter
556-00452
TT430 External Reel Holder
556-00451
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval.
For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a289
289
Identification Systems
5.7
Product Selection
Use this selection matrix to find the right combination of material and ribbon to suit your application.
Autom
Electro
nics
Machin
e
Military
Proces
Rail
■
-
-
-
TT822OUT
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
-
-
-
-
■
■
■
-
■
-
-
■
TT822OUT
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
-
■
-
-
-
TT822OUT
-
-
-
■
-
■
■
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
-
■
TT822OUT
-
■
■
-
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
-
■
■
-
-
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
-
■
TT822OUT
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
-
■
■
-
-
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
-
■
TT822OUT
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
-
-
-
-
■
■
■
-
-
-
-
-
TT822OUT
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
-
-
TT932DOUT
-
-
-
-
-
-
■
1216 (264)
■
■
-
■
-
-
-
TT822OUT
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
1220 (270)
1221 (271)
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TT122OUT
-
-
■
■
-
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
-
-
-
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
■
■
■
-
TTRC+
-
-
-
■
-
-
■
823 (281)
1206 (273)
1207 (287)
880 (263)
1210 (259, 275)
1211 (260, 263)
1213 (280)
1203 (282)
1204 (272)
1205 (276)
1208 (284)
TIPTAG HF (240)
TULT (234)
TCGT (238)
TULT DS (236)
■
-
290
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
TT822OUT8
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
■
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
■
-
TTRC+
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
TTRW
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
TT822OUT8
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
-
-
TTDTHOUT
■
■
-
■
■
■
-
■
■
-
■
■
■
-
TTRC+
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
-
-
■
-
-
-
-
TTRW
■
-
-
■
■
■
-
yes
no
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a290
Date of issue: January 2014
Aerosp
a ce
s Contr
ol
Appro
ved
Buildin
g
Etchin
g
-
otive
Alcoho
lic solv
e
■
323 (242, 287)
1209 (241)
TT ribb
on
Oils / b
enzene
nts
Partly
■
Materi
al
(Page)
Scratch
proof
s
Market (suggested)
Smudg
eproof
smudg
eproof
Resistance to
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Thermal Transfer Ribbons for
• Adhesive Labels
The thermal transfer print technology is based on heating up certain
dots in the print head. This transfers the ink very precisely from the
ribbon onto the surface of the printed material.
Features and Benefits
• Thermal transfer ribbons for highest quality and performance of
printed labels
• Ribbons are specifically designed to maximise print performance
for the recommended material
Ribbons for printing on Adhesive Labels.
ID: The standard inside
core diameter is 25.4 mm.
Recommended Material
Colour
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Article-No.
TT822OUT 60MM
323/823/880/951/1203/1204/1205/1206/1207/1208/
1210/1211/1213/1216/1220/1221
Black (BK)
60.0
300.0 m
556-00111
TT822OUT 110MM
323/823/880/951/1203/1204/1205/1206/1207/1208/
1210/1211/1213/1216/1220/1221
Black (BK)
110.0
300.0 m
556-00101
TT932DOUT 30MM
323/1209
Black (BK)
30.0
300.0 m
556-00124
TYPE
TT932DOUT 85MM
323/1209
Black (BK)
85.0
300.0 m
556-00117
TT932DOUT 110MM
323/1209
Black (BK)
110.0
300.0 m
556-00118
TT122OUT 60mm
1220/1221
Black (BK)
60.0
300.0 m
556-00060
TT122OUT 110mm
1220/1221
Black (BK)
110.0
300.0 m
556-00061
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a291
291
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Thermal Transfer Ribbons for
• Heatshrink and TIPTAGs
The thermal transfer print technology is based on heating up certain
dots in the print head. This transfers the ink very precisely from the
ribbon onto the surface of the printed material.
Features and Benefits
• Thermal transfer ribbons for highest quality and performance of
printed markers
• Ribbons are specifically designed to maximise print performance
for the recommended material
Ribbons for printing on Tubing and TIPTAGs.
ID: The standard inside
core diameter is 25.4 mm.
Recommended Material
Colour
Width
(W)
Length
(L)
Article-No.
TTRC+ 30MM
TIPTAG/TIPTAG PU/TULT/TCGT/TLFX
Black (BK)
30.0
300.0 m
556-00114
TTRC+ 60MM
TIPTAG/TIPTAG PU/TULT/TCGT/TLFX
Black (BK)
60.0
300.0 m
556-00115
TTRC+ 100MM
TIPTAG/TIPTAG PU/TULT/TCGT/TLFX
Black (BK)
100.0
300.0 m
556-00103
TTDTHOUT 40MM
TIPTAG/TULT/TCGT/TLFX/TULT DS/ TLFX DS
Black (BK)
40.0
300.0 m
556-00139
TTDTHOUT 60MM
TIPTAG/TULT/TCGT/TLFX/TULT DS/ TLFX DS
Black (BK)
60.0
300.0 m
556-00140
TTDTHOUT 100MM
TIPTAG/TULT/TCGT/TLFX/TULT DS/ TLFX DS
Black (BK)
100.0
300.0 m
556-00141
TT822OUT8 110MM
TULT/TCGT
Silver Grey (SRGY)
110.0
300.0 m
556-00161
TTRW 30MM
TULT/TCGT
White (WH)
30.0
300.0 m
556-00125
TTRW 60MM
TULT/TCGT
White (WH)
60.0
300.0 m
556-00137
TTRW 100MM
TULT/TCGT
White (WH)
100.0
300.0 m
556-00133
TYPE
292
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a292
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Thermal Transfer Printer Accessories
• S4000 Cutter
Features and Benefits
• To cut printed tubing and continuous label material at a
desired length
• The cutter automatically initialises each time the printer is
powered on
• The cutter tray ensures the cut pieces are collected in one place
• The plug and play cutter is simply attached with one Allen screw
Cutter S4000 for both TT4000+ and TrakMark DS.
TYPE
Article-No.
Cutter Tray for S4000
556-03011
S4000 Cutter
556-04025
Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
• P4000 Perforator
Features and Benefits
• To perforate printed tubing and continuous label material at a
desired length
• Perforation depth can be adjusted to different thicknesses of
the material
• Very useful accessory if tubings are printed with serial numbers
• Plug and play perforator is simply attached with one Allen screw
Perforator P4000 for both TT4000+ and TrakMark DS.
TYPE
Article-No.
P4000 Perforator
556-04024
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a293
293
Identification Systems
5.7
Printers and Software
Labelling Software
• TagPrint Pro
Easily import a variety of image types into the label design
Use any Windows based font in the label design for
complete customization
Layer objects like professional page layout programs
Rulers on top and side allow for exact placement of object
Easily change text color, fill color and border color to make text
stand out and accomplish 'full reverse' printing
Allow text characters to be stretched or compressed to almost
anyheight or width
Draw lines, circles and boxes on the label as a simple way of making
the label look more professional
Features and Benefits
• Alphanumeric sequences
• Print to multiple printers at one time
• Save jobs in a queue and print all at one time with
'Print later' function
• Print faster
• Connect or import directly from other databases including Excel,
Access, text files
• More bar code types
• Inverse, flip, and mirror image options for graphic images
• Multi-lingual
• Print log available
• Manually adjust font size to 1/10 of a point
• Customize height and width of characters
• Customize line spacing
• And much more!
TYPE
TagPrint Pro 3.0
Pack Cont.
Article-No.
1
556-00051
The easy to use software speeds up production of markers, labels, and
identification tags.
System
Requirements
PC running Microsoft Windows XP SP3,
Vista SP1 or later,
Windows 7 .NET Framework 4, Windows 8
512 MB RAM (XP SP3)
1.0 GB RAM (Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8)
500 MB available hard disk space
294
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a294
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Discover M-BOSS Lite, a user friendly on-site printer for
embossing stainless steel plates.
Date of issue: January 2014
Metal Systems Brochure
Durable Products for
Hazardous Environments.
Order NOW!
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Date of issue: January 2014
Date of issue: January 2014
Application Tooling
6
6.1 Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Processing Tool with Plastic Housing
EVO7, EVO7SP
308
302
MK7
309
303
MK9
311
MK7HT
309
MK9HT
312
Product Selection
Flowchart for Optimum Tool Selection
Technical Information
How to use a cable tie tool
304
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Metal Housing
Manual Processing Tool for cable ties with low profile head
MK10-SB
306
MK20, MK 21
306
Manual Processing Tool with Metal Housing
MK3SP
307
MK6
311
298
MK3PNSP2
307
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
Manual Processing Tool, simple version
MK7P
310
MK9P
313
MK9PSST
314
Date of issue: January 2014
Tool Overview for Cable Ties
6
Application Tooling
6.2 Application Tooling for Non Shrinkable Tubing
Manual Processing Tool for Metal Ties MBT- and AMT-Series
HDT16
315
Manual Processing Tool for Metal Ties MBT- and MAT-Series
Three-Pronged for sleeves and grommets
NA
319
MK9SST
314
VA2.5/5 - Reinforced
320
KST-STG200
315
K, S, SS
321
Manual Processing Tool for Metal Ties MLT-Series
MTT4
6.2 Application Tooling for Identification
316
Manual Processing Tool for Metal Ties
THT
Manual Tool for Helafix HCR
Helafix HCT Application tool
322
316
6.2 Application Tooling for Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Electrical Hot Air Tool
H5002- handy tool
317
H5004 - for professional use
317
Gas powered Hot Air Tool
Date of issue: January 2014
E4500
318
299
Find more information in our
Engineered Solutions Catalogue
in chapter 6.1.
Date of issue: January 2014
Automatic Cable
Tying Systems
Autotool 2000 – automated solutions
Date of issue: January 2014
For more information
please contact us!
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Application Tooling
6.1
Product Selection
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
MK10-SB
see page 306.
MK20, MK21
see page 306.
MK3SP
see page 307.
MK3PNSP2
see page 307.
EVO7 / EVO7SP
see page 308.
MK7
see page 309.
MK7HT
see page 309.
MK7P
see page 310.
MK6
see page 311.
MK9
see page 311.
MK9HT
see page 312.
MK9P
see page 313.
HDT16
see page 315.
KST-STG200.
see page 315.
MK9SST
see page 314.
MK9PSST
see page 314.
MTT4
see page 316.
THT
see page 316.
302
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a302
Date of issue: January 2014
Processing Tools for Metal Ties
Application Tooling
6.1
Product Selection
Product Selection
Cable tie
Attributes
Tool
Page
MK10-SB
306
MK20
306
MK10-SB
306
MK21
306
MK3PNSP2
307
MK7P
310
MK9P
313
EVO7 / EVO7SP
308
MK3SP
307
MK7
309
MK7HT
309
MK6
311
MK9
311
MK9HT
312
4.8 mm
bandwidth
no
4.8 mm
4.8 mm
yes
standard
cable ties
bandwidth
tool must
have
automatic
cut-off
4.8 mm
yes
pneumatic
4.8 mm
no
bandwidth
4.8 mm
yes
Date of issue: January 2014
metal
cable ties
tool must
have
automatic
cut-off
no
yes
bandwidth
16.0 mm
MK9PSST
314
no
bandwidth
13.0 mm
MK9SST
314
16.0 mm
HDT16
315
12.3 mm
KST-STG200
315
12.0 mm
MTT4
316
7.9 mm
THT
316
pneumatic
bandwidth
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a303
303
Application Tooling
6.1
Technical Information
How to use a cable tie tool (using an MK7 as an example)
1. Rough adjustment (1) depending on cable tie, and set according
to details in the user instructions. Value is displayed in the
viewing window (2).
4. Push the tool with the open side of the tool head (5) over the free
strip end and guide in the direction of the bundle until the tool
head buts on the tie head (4).
2. Use fine adjustment (3), if necessary, to set the desired value.
5. Pull manual lever one or more times to the stop. Once the
pre-selected tension is reached, the free tie end is automatically
cut off flush with the tie head.
3. Lay cable tie around the bundle and guide strip end through the
cable tie head (4). Tighten tie firmly enough that one stroke of
the tool is enough to tension and cut off.
Tool testing - Determination of tensions
To date, no generally applicable test method has been established
on the market. The companies within the HellermannTyton group
work with a usual force meter with minimum 10 kHz frequency of
data sampling to determine the tensile forces of the tools and to
guarantee the quality of the tools.
It is more difficult to test cable tie tools than would appear at first
glance. It is of supreme importance to comply with a standardised
test procedure and consistent test conditions. This means e.g. the
size and thus the cross-section of the cable ties, but also the water
content of the tie. A test using different ties and / or different
conditioning can easily lead to different values.
In general, the speed of cut-off, the position of the tool with
respect to the cable tie, the condition of the wearing parts in the
tool and the state of the cable tie play a fundamental role in the
determination of tensile forces.
Therefore we must point out that any values we provide must only
ever be regarded as guide values for your information. The values
cannot be transferred into practice 'one for one'.
In our user instructions, we specify an adjustment range for each
type of cable tie. If tension values must be documented or comply
with a specification, we recommend that you adjust them with
the aid of the force meter. Also, as a guideline, half the minimum
holding strength of the cable tie should be used as tensile force.
The minimum tensile strength (also referred to as minimum
unlocking strength) is the least force which the cable tie can
withstand before it tears or stretches. This strength is determined
using a threaded tie, hence the following formula should be
used for guidance as to the correct tensile force of the tool:
Min. tensile strength
= rec. tensile force
2
Example:
225 N min. tensile strength
T50R =
2
304
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a304
Date of issue: January 2014
225 N 112.5 N rec. tensile force according
=
2
to formula
Application Tooling
6.1
Technical Information
The tensile force can of course be adjusted up or down, in line with the corresponding applicatoin.
Please bear in mind that this statement applies only to HellermannTyton products. Cable ties from other manufacturers may require a higher
or lower force setting.
In order to secure the device after it has been adjusted using the force meter against manipulation or unintentional maladjustment,
HellermannTyton offers an adjustment safety cap (Art. No.: 110-07200 for MK7, MK7HT, MK7P, MK9, MK9HT, MK9SST, MK9P) which you
can push onto the device after removing the adjustment unit (loosening a screw is all it takes to remove).
After a period of time, to be defined, you test the device again and if necessary re-adjust it. The problem of determination of forces depends
on the individual case and has no direct connection with the quality of our product. An exact value for each setting (e. g. in Newtons),
without stating a tolerance, cannot be confirmed.
Test set-up with a usual force meter (Chatillon DFS-II) and EVO7 cable tie tool.
The following describes how to check the tension force of a manual
tensioning tool.
1. Lay the cable tie (green) into the fixture (A).
2. Bring the nose piece of the tensioning tool (B) flush to the test
block (C).
3. Insert the strap of the cable tie into the tensioning tool and pull
the strap flush against the fixture (A).
4. Re-set the force meter (D) to zero.
5. Pull the trigger of the tensioning tool continuously until the cable
tie is cut.
6. The tension force achieved at the cut off point is determined.
Your contact and our partner for the testing of cable tie tools:
AMETEK GmbH
Mr. Sancar Eser
Rudolf-Diesel-Straße 16
40670 Meerbusch
Germany
Telephone: +49 2159 913684
Fax: +49 2159 9136684
E-Mail: [email protected]
Date of issue: January 2014
Website: www.ametek.de
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a305
305
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool for Cable ties with low
profile head
• MK10-SB up to 9.5 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Ideal for easy handling of entire HellermannTyton RPE and
PE-Series
• Tensions and cuts off pre-looped cable ties flush at the head
MK10-SB.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
9.5
2.5
0.33 kg
110-10001
MK10-SB
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Manual Tensioning Tool for Cable Ties,
simple version
• MK20 up to 4.8 mm strap width
• MK21 up to 7.6 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Lightweight, ergonomic tools
• For tensioning and cutting HellermannTyton standard cable ties
4.8 - 7.6 mm wide
• MK20 and MK21 ideal for on-site assembly
• Mounted and pre-tensioned ties are cut off by twisting tool
MK20, MK21.
Tension.
Twist to cut.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MK20
4.8
1.5
0.05 kg
110-20006
MK21
7.6
2.5
0.05 kg
110-21016
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
306
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a306
Date of issue: January 2014
Apply.
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool with Metal Housing
• MK3SP up to 4.8 mm strap width
This tough metal tool MK3SP is used by harness makers for the
automotive industry and white goods as well as in the aerospace,
railway and medical industry.
Features and Benefits
• Tough metal tool for HellermannTyton plastic cable ties up to
4.8 mm width
• For consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tensioning force
• Reliable and low maintenance
MK3SP.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MK3SP
4.8
1.5
0.33 kg
110-03500
-
-
0.01 kg
110-03524
Replacement Blade
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Metal Housing
• MK3PNSP2 up to 4.8 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Pneumatic tensioning tool
• Tough metal housing
• For cable ties up to 4.8 mm width
• For consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force
• High application speed
• Reliable and low maintenance
MK3PNSP2.
Non oiled / oiled
Air Pressure (min.)
3 Bar
Air Pressure (max.)
6 Bar
Hose Internal Diameter
4.0 mm
LxHxW
approx. 225 x 140 x 40mm
Specifications
CE, GS
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
4.8
1.5
0.56 kg
110-03400
Compressed-air hose
-
-
0.35 kg
110-30002
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-30101
TYPE
MK3PNSP2
Date of issue: January 2014
Air Supply
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a307
307
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• EVO7 up to 4.8 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Ergonomic, slip-proof handle for a comfortable and secure grip
• Extremely low maintenance
• Fast and precise application with minimum effort
(TLC mechanism)
• Convenient and simple tension adjustment
• Extended, slim nose for use in narrow spaces
• Housing made of resilient and lightweight glass fibre-reinforced
polyester
• Standard grip span (90 mm) and short grip span (80 mm) available
EVO7.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
EVO7
4.8
1.5
0.275 kg
110-70129
EVO7SP
4.8
1.5
0.275 kg
110-70130
-
-
-
110-70106
BLADEKIT
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
TLC-Technology: Tension - Lock - Cut
The new EVO7 protects muscles and joints and increases effectiveness
•Lessrecoilshockreducesimpacttotheoperator‘shand
•Applicationofforceissignificantlyreduced
One Step to the Web!
308
3. Cut: Innovative, effortless and less recoil shock cut-off function.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a308
Date of issue: January 2014
1: Tension: Tie is tensioned as usual.
2: Lock: When the desired tension is met the locking mechanism locks the tie
in place.
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK7 up to 4.8 mm strap width
The MK7 tensioning tool is used by harness makers. Based on the
US Military Specification (MIL) and the German Military Specification
(VG), the MK7 is also used to apply cable ties in all military vehicles
and aircrafts. Other applications can be seen within electrical
installation eg. in buildings or production plants.
Features and Benefits
• Light glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• Ergonomic design
• For ties up to 4.8 mm width
• Consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force combined with three-step
quick adjustment
• MIL and VG approved
TYPE
MK7.
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
MK7
Weight
Article-No.
4.8
1.5
0.29 kg
110-07500
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-07511
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Manual Processing Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK7HT up to 4.8 mm strap width
MK7HT application tool is mainly used to apply cable ties in harness
making industries.
Features and Benefits
• Light glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• Ergonomic design
• For cable ties up to 4.8 mm width
• MK7 HighTension version with higher tension force than MK7
• Consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force combined with three-step
quick adjustment
MK7HT.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MK7HT
4.8
1.5
0.29 kg
110-07000
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-07511
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a309
309
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK7P up to 4.8 mm strap width
The MK7P pneumatic bundling tool sets a new benchmark for the
rational application of ties in the industrial production process.
Improved compressed air supply moves the tensioning piston faster
than in comparable tools.
Features and Benefits
• Pneumatic tensioning tool
• Light glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• For cable ties up to 4.8 mm width
• For consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force
• High application speed
MK7P.
The easy to use quick-set-knob.
Air Supply
Non oiled / oiled
Air Pressure (min.)
3 Bar
Air Pressure (max.) 6 Bar
Hose Internal
Diameter
4.0 mm
LxHxW
approx. 220 x 170 x 40 mm
Specifications
CE, GS
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MK7P
4.8
1.5
0.43 kg
110-07100
Compressed-air hose
-
-
0.35 kg
110-30002
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-07111
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
310
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a310
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool with Metal Housing
• MK6 up to 9.0 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Tough metal tool
• For cable ties up to 9.0 mm width
• For consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force
• Reliable and low maintenance
MK6.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
9.0
2.0
0.52 kg
110-06000
-
-
0.01 kg
110-06026
MK6
Replacement Blade
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Manual Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK9 up to 13.5 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• Ergonomic design
• For HellermannTyton plastic cable ties up to 13.5 mm width
• Consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force combined with two-step
quick adjustment
• MIL and VG approved
MK9.
TYPE
MK9
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
13.5
2.0
0.385 kg
110-09500
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-09511
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a311
311
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK9HT up to 13.5 mm strap width
The MK9HT boasts especially high tensioning forces. Ideal for
applications where larger cable ties need to be securely fastened,
such as in truck and bus construction.
Features and Benefits
• Glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• Ergonomic design
• For cable ties up to 13.5 mm width
• MK9 HighTension version with higher tension force than MK9
• Consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force combined with two-step
quick adjustment
MK9HT.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MK9HT
13.5
2.0
0.385 kg
110-09000
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
110-09511
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
312
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a312
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK9P up to 13.5 mm strap width
The MK9P is constructed with heavy duty parts to ensure optimum
performance. It is ideally designed to apply heavy-duty ties that are
used in vehicle construction like trucks, busses and railways.
Features and Benefits
• Pneumatic tensioning tool
• Glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• For cable ties up to 13.5 mm width
• For consistent tensioning and automatically flush cutting
• Infinitely adjustable tension force
• High application speed
• Holding ring for a balancer
• Option of lower or upper air attachment
MK9P.
MK9P is also available with upper air attachment.
TYPE
MK9P
Air Supply
Non oiled / oiled
Air Pressure (min.)
3 Bar
Air Pressure (max.)
6 Bar
Hose Internal Diameter
4.0 mm
LxHxW
approx. 280 x 200 x 55mm
Specifications
CE, GS
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Air att.
Position
Article-No.
13.5
2.5
0.91 kg
Lower air connection
110-09100
13.5
2.5
0.91 kg
Top air connection
110-09110
Compressed-air hose
-
-
0.35 kg
-
110-30002
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
-
110-07200
Replacement Blade
-
-
0.01 kg
-
110-09111
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Please note! Not all products listed on this page may have this approval. For product specific approvals please refer to the Appendix.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a313
313
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool for Metal Ties MBT- and
MAT-Series
• MK9SST up to 13.0 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Glass-fibre-reinforced housing
• Ergonomic design
• Consistent tensioning and automatically cutting of metal ties
MBT / MAT-series
• Infinitely adjustable tension force combined with two-step
quick adjustment
MK9SST.
TYPE
MK9SST
Replacement Blade
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
13.0
-
Weight
Article-No.
0.3
0.6 kg
110-95000
-
0.01 kg
110-95011
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Pneumatic Tensioning Tool with Plastic Housing
• MK9PSST up to 16.0 mm strap width
TYPE
MK9PSST
MK9PSST.
Air Supply
Non oiled / oiled
Air Pressure (min.)
3 Bar
Air Pressure (max.)
6 Bar
Hose Internal Diameter
4.0 mm
LxHxW
approx. 280 x 200 x 55 mm
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
16.0
0.7
0.91 kg
110-95350
Replacement Blade
-
-
-
110-95307
Lock cap tensioning knob
-
-
0.011 kg
110-07200
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
314
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a314
Date of issue: January 2014
Features and Benefits
• Unique levels of repeatability and accuracy
• High application speed and low maintenance
• Improved compressed air supply for faster tensioning
piston movement
• Shorter processing time and greater volume of connecting
tie application
• Ergonomic design
• Automatic ejection of cut-off cable tie end
• Ideally designed to apply stainless steel MBT-Series up to
16.0 mm width
• Air pressure between 3 and 6 bar
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool for Metal Ties MBT- and
AMT-Series
• HDT16 up to 16.0 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Two way nose piece for use with both MBT-Series and AMT-Series
stainless steel cable ties
• Easy adjustment of the handles to ensure the most ergonomic
position for the operator
• Integrated cutting mechanism delivering a flush cut and
professional finish every time
• The ideal tool for achieving a perfect installation of MBT and
AMT cable ties
HDT16.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Article-No.
HDT16
16.0
110-40000
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Manual Tensioning Tool for Metal Ties MBT- and
MAT-Series
• KST-STG200 up to 12.3 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Tough metal tool
• Operator controlled tensioning
• Cut off by pulling the hand lever
KST-STG200.
TYPE
KST-STG200
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
12.3
0.3
0.561 kg
110-09950
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a315
315
Application Tooling
6.1
Application Tooling for Cable Ties
Manual Tensioning Tool for Metal Ties MLT-Series
• MTT4 up to 12.0 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Tough metal tool
• Simple ratchet operation, easy to use
• Operator controlled tensioning and cutting facility
MTT4.
TYPE
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
MTT4
12.0
0.7
0.78 kg
110-04000
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Manual Tensioning Tool for Metal Ties
• THT up to 7.9 mm strap width
Features and Benefits
• Ergonomic T-Handle design with rubber grip
• Suitable for MBT cable ties (4.6 mm and 7.9 mm)
• Simple tensioning mechanism coils the strap tail quickly without
cut off
T-Handle Tensioning tool.
TYPE
THT Tool
Strap Width
max. (G)
Strap Thickness
max.
Weight
Article-No.
7.9
1.0
0.145 kg
110-09970
316
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a316
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Electrical Hot Air Tool
• H5002 - handy tool
For applying heat shrinkable products like thin walled shrink tubing and
Moulded Shapes.
Features and Benefits
• Lightweight and compact hot air tool
• Enables comfortable, fatigue-free work
• Temperature electronically controlled from 100- 600 °C, cold air
step of 50 °C
• Air-flow regulation adjusted in two stages (300 l/min and
500 l/min)
H5002 - The light, convenient hot-air tool.
TYPE
Air Flow
l/min
Operating
Temperature
Standby
Temp. °C
Wattage
H5002
300 - 500
+100 °C to +600
°C
50 °C
2,000 W
Z3 Reflector
-
-
-
Z4 Wide Slot
Nozzle
-
-
-
Operational
Voltage
Weight
Article-No.
230 V AC ~ /
230-240 V
0.9 kg
391-50200
-
-
50 g
391-50500
-
-
50 g
391-50600
Subject to technical changes.
Electrical Hot Air Tool
• H5004 - for professional use
H5004 electrical Hot Air Tool is designed for shrinking down many
heat shrinkable products like thin wall tubing, with and without
adhesive, End Caps, and Moulded Shapes.
Features and Benefits
• Professional hot air gun
• Temperature electronically controlled
• Air flow regulation
• Equiped with LED temperature indication enableling precise
temperature adjustment
H5004 - for professional use.
Accessories suitable for both H5002 and H5004.
Air Flow
l/min
Operating
Temperature
Standby
Temp. °C
Wattage
Operational
Voltage
Weight
Article-No.
150 - 500
+50 °C to +650
°C
50 °C
2,300 W
230-240V, 50Hz
1.13 kg
391-50400
Z3 Reflector
-
-
-
-
-
50 g
391-50500
Z4 Wide Slot
Nozzle
-
-
-
-
-
50 g
391-50600
TYPE
Date of issue: January 2014
H5004
Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a317
317
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Heat Shrinkable Tubing
Gas powered Hot Air Tool
• E4500
The E4500 hot-air gun Starter Kit is ideal for working in cramped
spaces or where there is no power supply. The Kit includes a E4500
Hot Air Tool with protective spring, gas cartridge P445, Reflector
Nozzle Z2 and Flat Nozzle Z3. The Hot Air Tool is suitable for
shrinking all types of heat shrink products including tubing, shapes
and cable repair sleeves. It can also be used for the bending and
shaping of PVC pipes, soft soldering of copper pipes, drying,
defrosting (of locks) , heating and paint stripping.
Features and Benefits
• Cordless hot air gun works with special gas cartridge
• Does not need any power supply
• Suitable for outdoor use
• Designed for heat shrink tubing, end caps and moulded shapes
• Supplied with protective spring, two nozzles and a gas cartridge
• Allows precise working in any position even in restricted spaces
• Can be operated on its stand for hands free use
• Light weight tool
• Operating time of cartridige: approx. 1.5 hours
• With easy Piezo ignition
One Step to the Web!
TYPE
E4500-H with heat protecting spring.
Practical hot air gun kit E4500 with accessories.
Gas cartridge P445.
Description
Article-No.
E4500
GAS-HEATGUN4500
Hot air gun with protective spring incl. gas cartridge, reflector nozzle Z2
and flat nozzle Z3
391-90002
P445
P445
P445 Refill Gas Cartridge (Methyl Acetylene Propadiene, Butane, Propane)
391-90101
Z2 Deflector Nozzle
Z2
Deflector Nozzle
391-90300
Z3 Reduction Nozzle
Z3
Reduction Nozzle
391-90001
318
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a318
Date of issue: January 2014
Subject to technical changes.
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Non Shrinkable Tubing
Three-Pronged Pliers for Sleeves and Grommets
• NA
Three-pronged expansion tools are used to ensure speedy and
precise application of expandable markers and sleeves.
Features and Benefits
• To easy affix expandable sleeves of every type onto
cables/connectors
• Sleeve simply slide onto the prongs
• Push pliers and pull over cable
• Close pliers, sleeve is placed easily
• Hellerine lubricant recommended for easy operation
Fast, secure application with the NA three-pronged pliers.
Replacement prong NA0/1
Replacement prong NA1K/3
Replacement prong NA4/5
Replacement prong NA8/10
Bundle Ø
min.
TYPE
Bundle
Ø max.
Three-prong pliers max.
application diameter
ØD
max.
Max. length
of marker
Article-No.
NA/01
1.3
1.8
10.5
28
621-10001
NA1K/3
2.5
5.0
11.0
28
621-10103
NA4/5
7.5
10.0
15.5
50
621-10405
NA8/10
12.0
17.0
25.5
60
621-10810
NA/01 PRONG
1.3
1.8
-
28
621-60001
NA1K/3 PRONG
2.5
5.0
-
28
621-60103
NA4/5 PRONG
7.5
10.0
-
50
621-60405
NA8/10 PRONG
12.0
17.0
-
60
621-60810
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a319
319
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Non Shrinkable Tubing
Three-Pronged for sleeves and Grommets
• VA2,5/5 - Reinforced
Expansion tools are used to ensure speedy and precise application of
expandable markers and sleeves
Features and Benefits
• Suitable for expanding tubing cut lengths and rubber parts
• Withstands high loading
• Set of 3 2.5/5 pins
• Replacement pins available in sizes 8 and 18
VA2.5/5.
Replacement prong size 18
Three-prong pliers max.
application diameter
Replacement prong size 8
Replacement prong size 2.5/5
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
ØD
max.
Article-No.
VA2.5/5
2.5
5.0
26.0
621-00200
VA-2.5/5 PRONG
2.5
5.0
26.0
621-01200
VA2.5/5 PRONG 8
8.0
10.0
28.0
621-02200
VA2.5/5 PRONG 18
18.0
20.0
30.0
621-03200
TYPE
320
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a320
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Non Shrinkable Tubing
Three-Pronged for sleeves and Grommets
• K, S, SS
Three-pronged expansion tools are used to ensure speedy and
precise application of expandable markers and sleeves.
Features and Benefits
• For speedy application of markers and sleeves
• Hellerine lubricant recommended for easy operation
• Handy D kit contains a tool body, a range of prongs and small
bottle of Hellerine lubricant.
Fast, secure application with the three-pronged expansion tools.
Three-prong pliers max.
application diameter
TYPE
Bundle Ø
min.
Bundle
Ø max.
ØD
max.
Max. length
of marker
Article-No.
D KIT
1.2
11.5
17.0
32
621-80005
K TOOL
5.0
10.0
17.0
32
621-80007
SS TOOL
1.2
2.0
15.0
20
621-80008
S TOOL
2.5
4.0
15.0
20
621-80009
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a321
321
Application Tooling
6.2
Application Tooling for Identification
Helafix Tool
• HCT1 for carrier size HCR09
• HCT2 for carrier size HCR12
HCT1 and HCT2 tools are ideal for cleanly cutting the carrier strip
as well as punching out the securing holes. For HCR7, HCR19 and
HCR25, the front part of the pliers can be used. To fix the character
holders HC and HCR simply use the T18 range of cable ties, fixings
or rivets.
Features and Benefits
• Cleanly cut Helafix HCR carrier tubing
• Punch securing holes on edges of HCR09 (HCT1) and HCR12
(HCT2)
• Apply punched HCR09 and HCR12 with T18 range of cable ties
• Suitable for punching rivet holes in HCR06, HCR18 and HCR24
tubing
• Punch hole diameter 2.5mm
• Fix with T18 range of cable ties, or suitable rivets
Any length can be used…
…just cut to suit.
TYPE
For Carrier
Width
For
Size
ØD
Article-No.
HCT1
10.0
HCR09
2.5
525-00010
HCT2
13.0
HCR12
2.5
525-00013
322
Further information and products at www.HellermannTyton.co.uk/a322
Date of issue: January 2014
All dimensions in mm. Subject to technical changes.
Minimum Order Quantity (MOQ) may differ from package content.
Date of issue: January 2014
Manual and pneumatic processing tools.
The professional way to fasten metal cable ties!
www.HellermannTyton.co.uk
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement